JP2008022927A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To suppress a decrease in interests in games by eliminating the monotonousness in the derivation process of the result of lottery. <P>SOLUTION: When starter slots 390, 392 and 394 are won, a lottery is conducted and in the game performance corresponding to the result of the lottery, any one of a plurality of loss symbol performances, a plurality of ready-for-win symbol performances and a plurality of specific ready-for-win performances is derived onto a performance display device 115. At this point, when any specific ready-for-win performance is derived, the generation of a ready-for-win state is shown by a ready-for-win music to be outputted during a ready-for-win music output period while loss in the result of the lottery is shown by the outputting of only a part of the ready-for-win music. In addition, the jackpot in the result of a lottery means shown by the outputting of all of the ready-for-win music. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2008,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed. In this game area, for example, a game ball is driven by the player as a game medium. The game balls that are driven into the game area flow down along the game board. In the game area, a number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at an appropriate position in the vertical direction of the game area. In addition, the game area is provided with a start port capable of receiving a game ball that is driven toward the game area.

  Some conventional pachinko machines are provided with a lottery means for performing a big hit lottery by winning a game ball at a starting port, such as a first type of gaming machine. And the lottery result by the lottery means is derived by the stop symbol after the change display of a plurality of symbols is performed in the effect image display means composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display. If the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game that can give a predetermined game value to the player is generated (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  By the way, in jackpot games, it is known that a predetermined amount of game balls are awarded as prizes to the player. As for the jackpot game, the jackpot lottery is performed with a normal jackpot where a `` normal game '' in which a jackpot lottery is performed with a predetermined winning probability after the jackpot game ends, and with a higher win probability than the `` normal game '' after the jackpot game ends. It is known that there is a probability change jackpot in which the “probability game” is generated.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, when winning the probability variation jackpot, the lottery result is derived by arranging “probability variation symbols” as stop symbols in the effect image display means. In addition, when a normal jackpot is won, the lottery result is derived by arranging “normal symbols” as stop symbols in the effect image display means.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-56893

  By the way, as in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, when the three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are variably displayed on the effect image display means, when the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, The expectation of winning the jackpot was increasing. Furthermore, if the middle symbol is variably displayed and stopped, and if the stopped symbol is the same symbol as the left symbol and right symbol, a “big hit” is derived, while the stopped symbol is different from the left symbol and right symbol. If so, “out” was derived.

  However, in such a pachinko machine, there is no possibility of winning a big win if it does not reach the reach state after the change display of multiple symbols is made, so if the reach state does not occur, the entertainment of the game will be greatly It was falling. Further, if the lottery result is derived by whether or not the stop symbols are aligned in the effect image display means, the effect tends to be monotonous, and the player's interest is concentrated only on the mode in which the stop symbols are aligned. There was a problem that would reduce the interest of.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game by eliminating monotony in the process of deriving the lottery result.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention for solving the above-described problems is capable of accepting a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball is driven toward the game area, and a game ball driven toward the game area. And a game effect deriving means capable of deriving at least a plurality of symbols and sound effects as a predetermined game effect, and detecting that a game ball that has been driven toward the game area is received by the start port Start detection means, lottery means for determining whether or not a big win is won in accordance with detection of a game ball by the start detection means, the predetermined game effect and the lottery result by the lottery means, the game effect derivation means A plurality of game effect derivation control means for deriving the game, and a plurality of the lottery results derived by the lottery means are derived after a plurality of symbol variation periods in which a plurality of symbol variations are displayed The lottery result is derived by the lottery means after passing the symbol design period and the reach symbol variation period in which the plurality of symbol variation periods and some of the symbols are stopped at the same symbol and the remaining symbols are variably displayed. A plurality of reach design effects, and a plurality of special reach effects in which the lottery results are derived after the plurality of symbol variation periods and the reach music output period in which a part or all of the predetermined reach music is output. A game effect storage means for storing a plurality of game effects including at least, and a game control means having at least a jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game in response to winning a lottery result by the lottery means When the lottery result by the lottery means is out of the game machine, the game effect derivation control means Any one of the plurality of reach symbol effects and the plurality of reach symbol effects are derived to the game effect deriving means, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a big hit, any one of the plurality of reach symbol effects Is derived to the game effect deriving means, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is unsuccessful or jackpot, any of the plurality of special reach effects instead of the plurality of out symbol effects and the plurality of reach symbol effects One of them can be derived to the game effect deriving means, and the plurality of special reach effects are composed of one piece of continuous music that is output in the reach music output period, and a plurality of design variations A reach state with a higher expectation of jackpot than the period is generated by the output of the reach music instead of the pattern fluctuation in the reach symbol fluctuation period In the reach music output period, after only a part of the reach music is output, a plurality of special reach off effects in which a lottery result by the lottery means is derived, and the reach music output period And at least a plurality of special reach winning effects from which a lottery winning result by the lottery means is derived after all of the reach music is output, and the game control means derives the game effects Game effect determining means for selectively determining a game effect derived by the control means to the game effect deriving means from a plurality of game effects stored in the game effect storage means according to at least a lottery result by the lottery means. , And the game effect determining means is the first game state in which the lottery result by the lottery means is out of place and If there is, one of the plurality of out symbol effects and the plurality of reach symbol effects is selectively determined from the game effect storage means, the lottery result by the lottery means is out, and the first If it is the second gaming state in which a privilege more advantageous to the player than the one gaming state is given, any one of the plurality of special reach off effects is selectively determined from the gaming effect storage means, If the lottery result by the lottery means is a big hit and the first gaming state, any one of the plurality of reach symbol effects is selectively determined from the game effect storage means, and the lottery If the lottery result by the means is a big hit and the second gaming state, any one of the plurality of special reach winning effects is selectively determined from the gaming effect storage means, When the game effect deriving control means derives any of the special reach effects to the game effect deriving means, the reach music is output by the reach music output during the reach music output period, and a part of the reach music is generated. Is output to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is out of order, or that all of the reach music is output to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is a big hit. It is characterized by that.

  According to this, the game board in which the game area is formed is provided with a start port capable of receiving a game ball, a game effect deriving unit capable of deriving a predetermined game effect, and a game control unit. The game control means includes at least start detection means, lottery means, game effect derivation control means, game effect storage means, and jackpot game execution means. When it is detected by the start detection means that a game ball has been received at the start port, it is determined by the lottery means whether or not at least a big win has been won. Then, the game effect deriving control means derives any one of the plurality of game effects stored in the game effect storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means to the game effect deriving means. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot game executing means executes the jackpot game.

  Here, in the game effect storage means, a plurality of out symbol lottery results are derived after a plurality of symbol variation periods, and a lottery result is derived after a plurality of symbol variation periods and a reach symbol variation period. A plurality of game effects including at least a plurality of reach symbol effects and a plurality of special reach effects from which a lottery result is derived after a plurality of symbol variation periods and a reach music output period are stored. Then, if the lottery result is out, one of a plurality of out symbol effects and a plurality of reach symbol effects is derived, and if the lottery result is a big hit, any one of a plurality of reach symbol effects is derived. Alternatively, any one of a plurality of special reach effects can be derived in place of the plurality of out symbol effects and the plurality of reach symbol effects. “Multiple symbol variation period” is a period during which multiple symbols are displayed. “Reach symbol variation period” is a part of multiple symbols that stops at the same symbol and the remaining symbols are variablely displayed. The “reach music output period” is a period during which a part or all of a predetermined reach music is output.

  And, in the case of multiple special reach production, the reach state where the expectation to the jackpot is higher than the multiple symbol variation period is replaced with the variation of the reach symbol variation period, the reach music composed of one continuous piece of music is reached It occurs when it is output during the music output period. Then, during the reach music output period, after a part of the reach music is outputted, a special lottery effect in which a lottery result is obtained, and after all the reach music is outputted, And at least a plurality of special reach achievements from which the lottery result is derived.

  Further, the game control means selectively determines a game effect derived by the game effect deriving means from a plurality of game effects stored in the game effect storage means according to at least a lottery result by the lottery means. , Further. Specifically, if the lottery result is out and the game state is the first game state, one of a plurality of out symbol effects and a plurality of reach symbol effects is selectively determined. Also, if the lottery result is out and the second gaming state, any one of a plurality of special reach out effects is selectively determined. Further, if the lottery result is a big hit and the first gaming state, any one of a plurality of reach symbol effects is selectively determined. Further, if the lottery result is a big hit and the second gaming state, any one of a plurality of special reach winning effects is selectively determined. The “second gaming state” is a gaming state in which a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the “first gaming state” is given.

  With the above configuration, when any special reach effect is derived to the game effect deriving means, the reach state is taught by the reach music output during the reach music output period. At the same time, it is taught that the lottery result is out of order by outputting only a part of the reach music, or that the lottery result is a big hit by outputting all of the reach music. The

  According to the present invention, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness in the process of deriving the lottery result and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened on one side of an outer frame of a pachinko machine and a front frame is opened on one side of the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the entire front side of the pachinko machine. In FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the decorative members in the game area are omitted.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a front frame 4, a game board 5, and the like. The outer frame 2 is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame shape by upper, lower, left, and right wooden frame members, and has a lower receiving plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the front lower portion of the outer frame 2. A main body frame 3 is attached to one side of the entire surface of the outer frame 2 by a hinge mechanism 7 so as to be opened and closed forward. The outer frame 2 may be formed of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

[About the frame structure]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the main frame of the pachinko machine and the game board separated from the front right and diagonally.

  The main body frame 3 is configured by integrally molding the front frame body 11, the game board mounting frame 12 and the mechanism mounting body 13 with a synthetic resin or the like. The front frame body 11 of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the support plate 6 on the front side of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 1). A body frame side hinge device 15 is fixed to the upper and lower portions of one side of the front frame body 11, and hinge pins and hinge holes are provided to the outer frame side hinge device 14 fixed to the upper and lower portions of one side of the outer frame 2. It is mounted so that it can be opened and closed freely. That is, the hinge mechanism 7 is constituted by the outer frame side hinge device 14, the main body frame side hinge device 15, the hinge pin, and the hinge hole.

  On the front side of the front frame body 11, a speaker box portion 16 is integrally formed in the front lower left area of the front frame body 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, and is formed in the front opening portion of the speaker box portion 16. The speaker mounting plate 17 is mounted so as to close the opening. A speaker 18 is mounted on the speaker mounting plate 17.

  In the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 11, a firing rail 19 is attached to the upper half of the front frame 11 in an inclined manner. A lower front plate 30 is mounted on the lower half of the lower area of the front surface of the front frame 11. A lower tray 31 capable of storing game balls is provided at a substantially central portion of the front surface of the lower front plate 30, an operation handle 32 is provided on the right side, and an ashtray 33 is provided on the left side. . The lower plate 31 is provided with a ball discharge lever 34 for discharging the game ball downward.

[About front frame configuration]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. The front frame 4 is mounted on one side of the front surface of the front frame body 11 so as to cover a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame body 11 to the upper edge of the lower front plate 30 so as to be opened and closed forward by a hinge mechanism 36. Yes.

  A substantially circular opening window 38 through which the game area 37 of the game board 5 can be seen through from the front is formed at a substantially central portion of the front frame 4. A window frame 39 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 38 is provided on the rear side of the front frame 4, and a transparent plate 50 such as a glass plate or a transparent resin plate is attached to the window frame 39. A substantially entire front surface of the front frame 4 is decorated by a front decoration member in which a lamp or the like is provided, and an upper plate 51 is formed at a lower portion of the front surface of the front frame 4. Specifically, in the periphery of the opening window 38, side decoration devices 52 are mounted on the left and right sides, an upper plate 51 is mounted on the lower portion, and an acoustic lighting device 53 is mounted on the upper portion.

  The side decoration device 52 is mainly configured by a side decoration body 54 in which a lamp driving substrate is disposed and formed of a synthetic resin material. A plurality of slit-like opening holes that are long in the horizontal direction are arranged in the side decoration body 54 in the vertical direction, and a lens 55 corresponding to the light source disposed on the lamp driving substrate is incorporated in the opening hole. The acoustic illumination device 53 includes a transparent cover body 56, a speaker 57, a speaker cover 58, a reflector body (not shown), and the like, and these constituent members are assembled together to form a unit.

  An effect selection switch 60 is provided on the left side of the front surface of the upper plate 51. The effect selection switch 60 is configured to be pressed by the player himself. When the player depresses the effect selection switch 60, the player's intention can be reflected in the effect display on the effect display device 115 described later. It should be noted that a lever or a button may be used instead of the effect selection switch 60. Moreover, the voice input means which receives a player's voice may be sufficient. In other words, any device that reflects the player's intention is acceptable.

[About the configuration of the locking device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 3. A function of locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and a function of locking the front frame 4 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the rear side of the free end side opposite to the hinge mechanism 36 of the front frame body 11 The locking device 70 having both of the above is mounted.

  That is, in this embodiment, the locking device 70 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 72 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 71 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the body frame 3 in a closed state, From the front of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 74 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 73 provided on the rear side of the free end side of the front frame 4 to lock the front frame 4 in a closed state. And a cylinder lock 75 exposed through the front frame body 11 and the lower front plate 30 so that the key can be inserted and unlocked. Then, a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 75 and rotated in one direction, so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 72 and the closing tool 71 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is unlocked. By rotating in the opposite direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 74 and the closing tool 73 of the front frame 4 is released and the front frame 4 is unlocked.

[About the structure of the game board mounting frame]
A description will be given with reference to FIGS. 1, 3 and 4. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3 is provided on the rear side of the front frame body 11 and the game board 5 is mounted so as to be attachable / detachable from the front. .

  The game board 5 is formed in a substantially square plate shape having a size to be fitted from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 (see FIG. 11). A guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 is provided on the board surface (front surface) of the game board 5, and a game area 37 is defined inside the guide rail 78.

  A predetermined gap is provided between the launch rail 19 and the guide rail 78, and when the launched game ball returns to the guide rail 78, the game ball is discharged from the gap. The lower plate 31 is guided.

  Further, a front structural member 79 made of synthetic resin is attached to the front surface of the game board 5 in the outer region of the guide rail 78.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower part on the rear side of the game board 5 receives a game ball that has flowed into the various winning devices in a portion extending from the center part to the lower part, and serves as a collective bag for guiding the game ball to a predetermined position. A box mounting base 118 having both the above function and the function as a box mounting portion is provided.

  A sub-control board box 130 in which a sub-control board 119 such as a sound control board and a lamp control board is housed is mounted on the box mounting base 118, and is superposed on the rear side of the sub-control board box 130. A main control board box 132 in which the control board 131 is housed is mounted.

  Further, in a state where the box mounting base 118, the sub control board box 130 and the main control board box 132 are respectively mounted on the rear side of the game board 5, the game board 5 is moved from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3. The box mounting base 118, the sub control board box 130, and the main control board box 132 are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the outline of the game board 5 so that they can be fitted and installed.

[Configuration of body frame mechanism mounting body, ball tank and tank rail]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing the state in which various members are assembled to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right rear, and FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing the main body frame from diagonally upper right rear.

  A tank mounting portion 133, a rail mounting portion 134, a dispensing device mounting portion 135, and the like are formed on the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3, and a ball tank 136 is mounted on the tank mounting portion 133.

  The ball tank 136 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is formed in a box shape opening upward so that a large number of game balls supplied from the island facility can be stored. The storage state of the game balls in the ball tank 136 is visible through the rear side wall of the ball tank 136.

  In addition, a discharge port 138 for discharging a game ball is formed at the rear corner of the bottom plate portion 137 of the ball tank 136, and the bottom plate portion 137 is formed on an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the discharge port 138. .

  The mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3 is integrally formed with a rail mounting portion 134 so as to approach the tank mounting portion 133 downward, and the rail component 139 is mounted on the rail mounting portion 134 so that the tank rail 150 is configured. That is, in this embodiment, the rail mounting portion 134 is formed in a state in which the upper lateral portion of the main body frame 3 is recessed by a predetermined depth, and the rear side wall of the recess is used as the front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150. An inclined rail shelf 155 is formed along the lower edge of the concave portion so as to incline downward from one end (left side in FIG. 8) to the other end (right end in FIG. 8). An upward surface extending in the lateral direction of the rail shelf 155 is a rail receiving portion 158.

  The rail constituting member 139 that is mounted on the rail mounting portion 134 and constitutes the tank rail 150 includes a rear wall portion 152 that forms a rail passage between the rail mounting portion 134 and the front wall portion 151, and an inclined lower plate And a partition wall (both not shown) that project along the center in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate part and divide the rail passage into front and rear rows (in this embodiment, front and rear rows). It is formed in preparation.

  The rail constituting member 139 is attached to the rail attaching portion 134 by an appropriate attachment means, whereby the tank rail 150 having a plurality of front and rear rail passages is configured. Then, after the game balls discharged from the discharge port 138 of the ball tank 136 (dropped by its own weight) are received at one end of the rail passages in the front and rear rows of the tank rail 150, the game balls are moved along the rail passage by their own weight. And rolling toward the other end of the rail passage.

  Further, in this embodiment, the rail component member 139 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, whereby the flow state of the game balls in the rail passage is visually recognized through the rear wall portion 152 of the rail component member 139. It is possible.

  The front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150 (rail mounting portion 134) has a first space portion in order to avoid interference with the rear upper end portion of equipment (for example, the center accessory 300) that protrudes to the rear side of the game board 5. It is provided in a separated state.

  In this embodiment, the rear end of the rail shelf 155 serving as the rear end portion of the main body frame 3 and the rear wall portion of the tank rail 150 are substantially flush with the rear side wall of the ball tank 136. In other words, the tank rail 150 is arranged rearwardly from the rear surface of the game board 5 until the rear wall portion of the ball tank 136 is substantially flush with the rear wall portion of the ball tank 136. Thus, a first space portion for avoiding interference with the rear portion of the center accessory 300 is provided between the rear side of the game board 5 and the front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150.

  Above the tank rail 150, a rectifier 156 for aligning the game balls flowing in the rail passage without overlapping each other is mounted on the upper portion thereof so as to be swingable about the shaft 157. The rectifier 156 is provided with a weight from the center to the bottom.

[Configuration of payout device mounting part and ball payout device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. A vertically long paying device mounting portion 135 corresponding to a ball paying device (ball paying unit) 170 described below is formed in the vertical direction of one side of the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3. The dispensing device mounting portion 135 is formed in a concave shape having an opening on the rear side.

  In addition, an opening 173 through which a payout motor 172 (see FIG. 3) of the ball payout device 170 can project is formed at a predetermined position of a back wall portion (not shown) having a stepped shape of the payout device mounting portion 135. Yes.

  In a state where the ball paying device 170 is mounted in the recess of the paying device mounting portion 135, a second space portion is provided between the game board 5 and the first space portion, which is at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction. . Thus, the rail passage and the ball passage are arranged at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the rear end of the body frame 3, that is, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion of the dispensing device mounting portion 135, the rear end of the rail shelf 155, the rear surfaces of the ball tank 136, the tank rail 150, and the ball dispensing device 170 are substantially the same surface. There is no.

  The ball payout device 170 has a vertically long box shape that is substantially the same size as the recess of the payout device mounting portion 135, and is unitized by mounting various parts related to payout.

  The ball payout device 170 is fitted from the rear opening of the recess of the payout device mounting portion 135 and is mounted by appropriate mounting means (for example, mounting means such as an elastic clip, a locking claw, and a screw). ing.

  Although not shown, the ball dispensing device 170 is formed by dividing the ball passages having inflow ports respectively communicating with the outlets of the rail passages in the tank rail 150 into a plurality of front and rear rows (for example, front and rear rows). Further, the downstream portions of the front and rear rows of ball passages formed in the interior are bifurcated to form front and rear rows of award balls, a ball rental ball passage, and a ball removal ball passage. A payout member (not shown) made of a rotating body for distributing and paying out game balls to any of the passages is rotated in the forward and reverse directions at the branch portion between the winning ball and the ball passage for lending and the ball passage for ball removal. It is arranged to be possible.

[Equipment on the lower rear of the main frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. On the rear side of the front frame 11 of the main body frame 3, on one side (left side in FIG. 4) of the rear lower region of the front frame 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, A launching device unit in which a launching hammer (not shown) for launching a game ball sent to the launching position of the tilted end, a launching motor 192 for differentially launching the launching hammer, and the like are assembled to the mounting substrate 193 and unitized. 194 is installed.

  A power supply board box 196 for receiving the power supply board 195 is mounted at a substantially central portion of the rear lower region of the front frame body 11, and the dispensing control board 197 is received in a state of being superimposed on the rear side of the power supply board box 196. A payout control board box 198 is mounted.

  The payout control board 197 includes a RAM for storing the number of game balls to be paid out, and transmits a control signal for paying out game balls in accordance with a payout signal transmitted from the main control board 131 to a relay circuit board (not shown). Thus, the operation of the payout motor 172 is controlled.

[Configuration of rear cover body]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine from the upper right rear.

  The rear end portions of the display device control board box 117 (see FIG. 9) and the main control board box 132 arranged on the rear surface of the game board 5 protrude toward the window opening portion opened in the center portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. .

  Between the side wall portion constituting one side wall of the window opening portion of the mechanism mounting body 13 and the one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135 constituting the other end wall, an opaque synthetic resin material is formed into a substantially square box shape. Then, the rear cover body 210 is detachably mounted by a cover hinge mechanism 211.

  The rear cover body 210 is configured integrally with a substantially rectangular rear wall portion 212 and a peripheral wall portion 213 that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the rear wall portion 212. Of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, the one side wall portion 213 a is respectively viewed from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 214 formed at a total of three locations above and below the rear wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. A hinge body 216 having a hinge pin 215 that is detachably fitted downward is integrally formed.

  Further, of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, the other wall portion 213b has a locking claw that can be elastically engaged with a locking hole formed in one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135. An elastic closing body 217 is integrally formed.

  That is, in the rear cover body 210, the hinge pins 215 of the upper and lower and intermediate hinge bodies 216 are respectively fitted from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 214 of the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. In this state, the rear cover body 210 is rotated toward the other side of the mechanism mounting body 13 around the hinge pin 215, and the elastic closing body 217 is inserted into the locking hole on one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135. The rear cover body 210 is held in the closed state on the rear side of the mechanism mounting body 13 by being elastically engaged. Then, the rear cover body 210 covers the entire display device control board box 117 (see FIG. 9) on the rear surface of the game board 5 and a portion extending from the substantially middle portion to the upper end of the main control board box 132 by the rear cover body 210. ing. As a result, the board connector of the main control board 131 exposed at the upper part of the main control board box 132 (mainly a board connector for connecting to the display device control board 116) is hidden from view from behind.

  Further, a portion from the substantially middle portion to the lower end of the main control board box 132 is exposed without being covered by the rear cover body 210. The inspection connector 218 disposed on the main control board 131 is exposed below the main control board box 132, and the inspection connector on the main control board 131 is closed with the rear cover body 210 closed. A board inspection device (not shown) can be connected to the connector 218 for inspection.

  A large number of heat radiation holes 230, 231, 232, and 233 are provided in the rear cover body 210, and internal heat is released from these many heat radiation holes 230, 231, 232, and 233. . In this embodiment, the rear cover body 210 is provided with a large number of slit-like heat radiation holes 230 extending from the peripheral wall portion 213 to the rear wall portion 212, and from the substantially middle height position of the rear wall portion 212 to the upper portion. A large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 231 are penetrated, and a large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 232 and a predetermined number of horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation holes 233 are penetrated below the rear wall 212. Has been.

  Further, the horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation holes 233 have a size corresponding to the size and arrangement position of the plurality of parallel seal portions 235 sealed by the seal screws (sealing members) of the main control board box 132. It penetrates the position. As a result, even when the opaque rear cover body 210 is closed, the plurality of parallel sealing portions 235 of the main control board box 132 are exposed so as to be visible at the portion of the heat radiation hole 233. For this reason, even when the rear cover body 210 is closed, the sealing state of the sealing portion 235 of the main control board box 132 can be easily visually confirmed. Further, since the opaque synthetic resin material can be easily used as a synthetic resin material that is recycled compared to the transparent synthetic resin material, the rear cover body 210 can be manufactured at low cost.

  Of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, a predetermined position (two places on the left and right in this embodiment) of the upper wall portion 213c is substantially C-shaped to hold a power cord (not shown) in an appropriately folded state. An elastically deformable cord holder 237 extends toward the rear wall surface of the upper tank rail 150 (the rear wall surface of the rail component 139). A knob for removing the power cord by elastically deforming the cord holder 237 is formed at the tip of the cord holder 237.

  One end of the power cord is detachably connected to the board connector 239 of the distribution board 238, and the power plug at the other end is inserted into a power outlet. As described above, by forming the cord holding body 237 integrally with the rear cover body 210 and holding the power cord, the power cord hangs when the pachinko machine 1 is transported and stored, and it becomes an obstacle to foreign matter. The trouble which is caught can be prevented.

[About the configuration of ball derivatives etc. for the lower pan of the rear lower part of the main body frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 6. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the rear cover body and various control boards are removed from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  A lower dish ball derivative 253 is attached to the other side portion (the hinge portion) of the rear lower region of the main body frame 3 in the recessed portion of the rear step portion of the speaker box portion 16. The lower tray ball derivative 253 is used when the game balls paid out to the upper plate 51 through the upper plate connecting path (not shown) from the winning and rental ball passages of the ball dispensing device 170 are full. The game ball on the upper plate communication path is for guiding the game ball to the lower plate 31.

  In this embodiment, a board box 254 that houses the interface board 252 is mounted on the outer surface of the rear wall of the lower dish ball derivative 253. The interface board 252 is interposed between the ball rental machine installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 197, and transmits / receives a signal related to ball rental between the ball rental machine and the payout control board 197. Electrical connection is possible.

[About the configuration of the game board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing a configuration of a game board having a game area. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the game board obliquely from the front. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board disassembled for each major component and shown obliquely from the front. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing the game board disassembled for each major component and shown obliquely from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the game board 5 has a substantially circular game area forming wall 80 that forms the game area 37. Inside the game area forming wall 80 (on the game area 37 side) and on the left side, a guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 for guiding the game ball to the game area 37 is provided. A game ball launched from the launcher unit 194 (see FIG. 7) is driven toward the game area 37 along the guide rail.

  In the center of the game area 37, a center accessory 300 is arranged. The center accessory 300 has a size that occupies more than two-thirds of the width direction of the game area 37. The center accessory 300 has a substantially rectangular opening 301, and an effect display device 115 is disposed in the opening 301. The center accessory 300 has a frame-shaped decorative body 370, and the frame-shaped decorative body 370 is provided along the opening edge of the opening 301. Further, the center accessory 300 has an emblem accessory 385, and this emblem accessory 385 is provided adjacent to the effect accessory 430 (details will be described later) at the upper opening edge of the opening 301. Yes.

  A first start port 390 capable of receiving a game ball driven toward the game area 37 is disposed below the center combination 300. Below the first start port 390, a third start port 394 having a pair of movable pieces 396 (the second start port will be described later) is disposed. When the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the closed state, the third start port 394 is unable or impossible to receive the game ball. When the pair of movable pieces 396 is in the open state, It becomes easier to accept a game ball than the one start port 390. Note that the pair of movable pieces 396 illustrated in FIGS. 10 and 11 are represented by solid lines in both the open state and the closed state.

  In the present embodiment, “downward” means the downstream side of the game ball in the downflow direction, and “upward” means the upstream side of the game ball in the downflow direction.

  An opening 372 is formed in the lower frame 370a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 directly above the first start port 390.

  An opening / closing device for production 398 is provided on the upper part of the center accessory 300. The effect opening / closing device 398 includes an effect large winning opening 398a and an effect large winning opening opening / closing door 398b provided corresponding to the effect large winning opening 398a.

  The stage winning prize opening 398a is an open area where a game ball can be received. Specifically, from the player in six directions around the upper side, the lower side, the left side, the right side, the near side, and the back side. This is an area in which openings are formed on the front side and the upper side as viewed, and walls are formed on the left side, the right side, the lower side, and the rear side. The opening on the near side from the player is closed by a glass plate attached to the window frame 39. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball received in the large prize winning opening 398a for performance. On the other hand, the upper opening portion is configured to be freely opened and closed by an effect grand prize opening opening / closing door 398b described later. Further, the back wall is made of a transparent member that can transmit light, and behind this transparent member is provided an effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 that can emit light by switching between red and green. Yes. That is, the effect opening / closing device status display lamp 651 can be displayed in the effect opening / closing device 398.

  The stage prize winning opening / closing door 398b switches the opening on the upper side of the stage prize winning opening 398a between an open state in which the game ball can be received and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be received or difficult. It is a member. Specifically, it is a movable piece made of a rectangular flat plate configured to be able to be inserted and removed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 5 (that is, the front-rear direction). When the player protrudes from the board surface of the game board 5 as viewed from the player side, the upper opening is closed and when the board is retracted to the board surface side of the game board 5 (in this embodiment, the board surface of the game board 5 is used for production. When the big prize opening opening / closing door 398b is substantially flush), the upper opening is opened. Thus, the stage opening / closing device 398 occupying the game area 37 can be saved by arranging the stage winning prize opening / closing door 398 b to be freely inserted and removed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 5. It can be made into a space. In recent years, in order to increase the interest of the game related to the production, the production display device 115 has been enlarged. Therefore, it is necessary to efficiently provide each member in the game area 37, and the effect is remarkable. In particular, in this embodiment, since the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided separately from the hit jack game opening / closing device 400 provided conventionally, the area of the effect opening / closing device 398 occupying the game area 37 is reduced. The effect by is tremendous.

  In addition, when the stage winning prize opening 398a is in the closed state, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 37 and collided with the flat portion of the stage winning prize opening / closing door 398b is the stage winning prize opening opening / closing door 398b. An impact is given to the flat part of. However, in the present embodiment, since the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided above the effect display device 115, compared to the case where the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided below the first start port 390, The impact of the game ball on the flat surface of the effect opening / closing device 398 is reduced. This is because the game ball thrown toward the game area 37 is accelerated by gravity, so that the direction in which the production-use grand prize opening / closing door 398b is provided further upward is the plane of the production-use grand prize opening / closing door 398b. This is because the speed of the game ball when colliding with the part is small.

  In the present embodiment, the effect large winning opening opening / closing door 398b is configured to be freely put in and out in a direction substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5, but is not limited thereto, and the effect opening / closing for the game area 37 is occupied. As long as the area of the device 398 can be saved, the directions may intersect.

  In the present embodiment, the “front-rear direction” means a direction orthogonal to the surface of the game board 5, that is, a front-rear direction viewed from the player.

  A jackpot gaming opening / closing device is provided between the first start port 390 and the ball discharge port 406, specifically below the third start port 394 and above the ball discharge port 406 (directly above in the present embodiment). 400 is provided. The effect opening / closing device 398 and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 constitute an opening / closing device 397. The jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 includes a jackpot gaming big prize opening 400a and a jackpot gaming big prize opening opening / closing door 400b provided corresponding to the jackpot gaming big prize opening 400a. The jackpot game grand prize winning port 400a is an opening through which a game ball can be received. The jackpot gaming prize winning opening / closing door 400b is a member for switching the jackpot gaming prize winning opening 400a between an open state in which a game ball can be received and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be received or difficult. is there. It should be noted that when the big hit game winning prize opening 400a is in the closed state, it is not necessarily limited to the fact that it is impossible to accept the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37, and it is difficult, preferably extremely difficult. There may be.

  A passing gate 402 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the center accessory 300, and three lower left corners (on the left side of the first start port 390 and the third start port 394) of the center accessory 300. One general winning opening 404 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the “left side” means the left side as viewed from the player.

  The game balls that have not won any of the start openings 390, 392, 394, the production opening / closing device 398, the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, and the general winning opening 404 are most downstream in the flow direction of the game balls. A ball discharge port 406 for discharging behind the board 5 is formed. That is, each of the start ports 390, 392, 394, the effect opening / closing device 398, the jackpot game opening / closing device 400, and the general winning port 404 provided upstream of the ball discharge port 406 in the flow direction of the game ball. The game balls that have not won the prize flow down toward the ball discharge port 406.

  The jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is disposed immediately above the ball discharge port 406. As a result, during the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, game balls that have not won any of the start ports 390, 392, 394, the production opening / closing device 398 and the general winning opening 404 are the jackpot gaming opening / closing device. Since it gathers in the vicinity of 400, it can have a sense of expectation of winning a prize.

  On the lower right of the center object 300, a first special symbol display 84 for displaying a lottery result by a first special symbol lottery means 700, which will be described later, and a second special symbol for displaying a lottery result by a second special symbol lottery means 710. A display 86, a first special symbol hold indicator 88 that displays the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 700, and a second special symbol hold indicator that displays the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 710. 90 is provided. Also, a normal symbol display 82 for displaying the lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 720 and a normal symbol hold indicator 92 for displaying the number of lotteries held by the normal symbol lottery means 720 are provided.

  Each of these indicators 82, 84, 86, 88, 90, 92 is constituted by, for example, an LED, and the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700, the second special symbol lottery means, depending on the lighting state of this LED. The lottery result by 710, the lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 720, the holding number of lotteries by the first special symbol lottery means 700, the holding number of lotteries by the second special symbol lottery means 710, and the holding number of lotteries by the normal symbol lottery means 720 Is notified.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the “number of lottery holds” means the number of holds for determining whether or not the acquired random number for determining whether or not the winning random number for winning is acquired, However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of determinations may be the number of determination random numbers for which determination is made and the acquisition determination random numbers are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol hold indicator 88 and the second special symbol hold indicator 90 may be the number of lots to be held instead of the lottery hold number. In other words, although it is determined whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained and whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired, the determination result is not displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. , The number of such hold may be displayed.

  When the game board 5 of this embodiment is disassembled for each major component, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, from the front side, the front component member 79 including the guide rail 78 and the frame-shaped center accessory 300 are provided. A jackpot game opening / closing device 400, a third start opening 394, and a general winning opening 404, a side opening member 262 including a passing gate 402, a center accessory 300, a winning opening from the front side. A plate-like game board base 266 having a plurality of appropriately sized through holes 264 for attaching the unit 260 and the side decoration member 262, and a back having a frame-like opening attached to the rear side of the game board base 266. A unit 270, an effect display device 115 fixed to the back unit 270 so as to close the opening of the back unit 270 from the rear side, and a lower side of the back unit 270 An outlet port passage that is disposed and attached to the rear side of the game board base 266, supports the sub control board box 130 and the main control board box 132, and discharges the game balls that are driven into the game area 37 from the game board 5. And a substrate box holder 268 having a main body.

[About the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd stages in the center role]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the center accessory 300 includes a first shelf (hereinafter referred to as “first stage 330”) and a game ball in the vicinity of the lower frame 370 a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370. It has the 2nd shelf part (henceforth "the 2nd stage 350") arrange | positioned downstream from the 1st stage 330 about the flow-down direction. The position where the second stage 350 is disposed is on the opposite side of the effect display device 115 with respect to the first stage 330 (that is, the front (player) side).

  A first stage guiding path for guiding a flowing game ball to the first stage 330 in the vicinity of the substantially vertical center of the left frame 370 b of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 (that is, the side of the frame-shaped decorative body 370). (Hereinafter referred to as "first warp 316") is provided with a first warp inlet 306 that can be received.

  Also, below the first warp inlet 306, a second warp inlet 308 that can be received in a second stage guide path (hereinafter referred to as “second warp 318”) is juxtaposed with the first warp inlet 306. Yes.

  Below the first warp inlet 306 and the second warp inlet 308, a first warp guide piece (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the first warp inlet 306 and the game ball to the second warp inlet 308, respectively. A second warp guide piece 310 is provided. The second warp guide piece 310 protrudes from the frame-shaped decorative body 370 toward the left (that is, from the center accessory 300 to the game area 37). Thereby, the second warp inlet 308 is easier to guide the game ball than the first warp inlet 306. Therefore, even if the game ball is not guided to the first warp inlet 306, the expectation of being accepted at the second warp inlet 308 is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

  The first stage 330 has a curved surface formed in a wave shape from the first warp outlet side end 336 to the first warp opposite outlet side end 338. Specifically, a mountain portion 332 that swells upward is formed at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the first stage 330, and a valley portion continuously connected to the mountain portion 332 is formed on the left and right sides of the mountain portion 332. 334 is formed.

  In addition, the height of the peak portion 332 is lower than the first warp outlet side end 336 and the first warp counter-exit side end 338. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the first warp outlet 312 can get over the mountain portion 332, and reciprocates between the first warp outlet side end 336 and the first warp counter-exit side end 338. Can roll.

  A hill portion 352 is formed at a substantially central portion of the second stage 350. The elevated part 352 is located in front of the peak part 332 of the first stage 330. The second stage 350 has a curved portion 354 having a curved surface formed from the second warp outlet side end portion 356 to the elevated portion 352 in addition to the elevated portion 352. Moreover, it has the curved part 354 in which the curved surface was formed from the 2nd warp opposite exit side edge part 358 to the high platform part 352. FIG. These curved portions 354 are curved below the hill portion 352.

  The height of the hill portion 352 is lower than the second warp outlet side end 356 and the second warp counter-exit side end 358. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the second warp outlet 314 can get over the hill part 352 and reciprocate between the second warp outlet side end part 356 and the second warp counter-exit side end part 358. Can roll.

  The game balls received in the first warp inlet 306 and the second warp inlet 308 are discharged from the first warp outlet 312 and the second warp outlet 314, respectively, and are guided to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350.

  Note that the direction in which the game ball flows down in the first warp 316 and the direction in which the game ball rolls in the first stage 330 are substantially collinear, the game ball that has flowed down the first warp 316 has little loss of kinetic energy. . That is, if the game ball that has flowed down the first warp 316 changes its traveling direction, kinetic energy is lost. Accordingly, the game ball that has flowed down the first warp 316 rolls on the first stage 330 vigorously. Similarly, since the flow direction of the game ball in the second warp 318 and the rolling direction of the game ball in the second stage 350 are substantially on the same line, the game ball flowing down the second warp 318 also has a loss of kinetic energy. Few. As a result, both the game ball guided to the first stage 330 and the game ball guided to the second stage 350 roll vigorously on the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, and on each stage. The time spent staying at 330 and 350 becomes longer, and as a result, the game balls play at the respective stages 330 and 350, and the interest is enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball is not guided to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350 from the right side of the center accessory 300. That is, since the game balls are guided only from the left side of the center accessory 300 to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, the game balls rolling on the first stage 330 and the second stage 350 are viewed from opposite directions. Rolling is not inhibited by the guided game ball. As a result, the time spent on each stage 330, 350 is lengthened, and as a result, the game ball plays in each stage 330, 350, and the interest is enhanced.

  In the vicinity of the lower frame 370 a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 and between the effect display device 115 and the first stage 330, a center electrical decoration unit 302 adjacent to the effect display device 115 is formed. A shelf-like curved surface is formed in the center electrical decoration portion 302 along the width direction of the center accessory 300, and a plurality of center decoration lamps 304 are arranged on the curved surface.

  A second start port 392 that can receive a game ball is formed at a position that is substantially in the center in the left-right direction of the center illumination part 302 and that corresponds to the mountain part 332 of the first stage 330. That is, the second start port 392 is provided not in the second stage 350 side, which is the flow-down direction of the game ball, but in the opposite direction (rear side of the first stage 330). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392. This is because the second stage 350 is formed below the first stage 330 and a stage partition wall 364 described later is provided between the first stage 330 and the second stage 350.

  In addition, a second start guide port 340 for guiding a game ball to the second start port 392 is formed in the mountain portion 332 of the first stage 330. The second start guide port 340 is inclined downward from the peak portion 332 to the second start port 392, so that the game ball is guided to the second start port 392. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 330 does not have the momentum to roll in the vicinity of the mountain portion 332, the second starting guide port 340 is easily guided to the second starting port 392.

  The game ball that has won the second starting port 392 is discharged to the back of the game board 5 through a discharge path (not shown) communicating with the back of the game board 5.

  A first stage inclined groove 342 for allowing the second stage 350 to flow down the game ball is formed in the valley portion 334 of the first stage 330. The first stage inclined groove 342 is inclined downward from the trough 334 to the second stage 350 (that is, from the rear to the front), so that the game ball is guided to the second stage 350. It has become. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 330 does not have the momentum to climb over the mountain portion 332, it is easily guided to the second stage 350 by the first stage inclined groove 342. The game ball that has lost its momentum to reciprocate between the first warp outlet side end 336 and the first warp counter-exit side end 338 wins the third starting port 394 from the mountain portion 332. The possibility of being guided from the valley 334 to the second stage 350 is much higher than the possibility.

  Between the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, a thin plate-like stage partition wall 364 for partitioning the stages 330 and 350 is provided. The stage partition wall 364 is disposed so as to protrude upward from the surface on the first stage 330, so that a game ball rolling on the first stage 330 does not flow down to the second stage 350. It has become. However, a communication portion 366 that connects the first stage 330 (specifically, the valley portion 334) and the second stage 350 is formed at a position corresponding to the valley portion 334 of the first stage 330 of the stage partition wall 364. ing. The game balls that have lost the momentum to roll to the left and right near the communication portion 366 flow down from the first stage 330 to the second stage 350 through the communication portion 366.

  A first start port guide path 374 is provided at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the second stage 350 (that is, a portion corresponding to the mountain portion 332 of the first stage 330) and a position corresponding to the hill portion 352. A first start guide port 368 communicating with an opening 372 formed in the lower frame 370a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 is formed. In other words, the first start guide port 368 is provided not in the flow-down direction side of the game ball but in the opposite direction (the rear side of the second stage 350). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize that the game ball is received in the first start guide port 368.

  The game ball guided to the first start guide port 368 passes through the first start port guide path 374 and is discharged from the opening 372 onto the game board 5. Here, since the first start port guide path 374 is formed so as to guide the game ball to a position directly above the first start port 390, the first start port guide path 374 is guided to the first start port guide path 374 and discharged to the game board 5 surface side. The expectation that the played game ball wins the first start opening 390 becomes very large. However, a nail (not shown) is disposed directly above the first start port 390, and this nail may inhibit the winning of the game ball to the first start port 390. Therefore, the probability that the game ball discharged from the opening 372 onto the game board 5 through the first start port guiding path 374 wins the first start port 390 is about one fourth to three fourths. Become.

  The substantially central portion of the hill portion 352 in the left-right direction corresponds to the position of the first start guide port 368 and is downward from both ends of the hill portion 352 to the substantially center portion (that is, toward the first start guide port 368 side). It has the inclination part 353 which inclines to. In addition, a front inclined groove 360 for guiding a game ball to a later-described third shelf (hereinafter referred to as “third stage 376”) is formed in a substantially central portion of the hill portion 352. Further, a first start guide opening guide groove 362 for guiding the game ball to the first start guide opening 368 is further formed inside the front inclined groove 360. That is, a front inclined groove 360 that is inclined downward from the rear to the front is formed in a substantially central portion of the hill portion 352, and further inclined downward from the front to the rear in the front inclined groove 360. Thus, the first start guide opening guide groove 362 is formed. Thereby, the game ball that has lost the momentum to roll to the left and right in the vicinity of the front inclined groove 360 is guided to the first start guide opening 368 along the first start guide opening guide groove 362 and to the front inclined groove 360. Along the third stage 376 in some cases.

  Further, a third stage 376 having a curved surface so as to draw an arc in the left-right direction is formed on the lower frame 370a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370. The game ball can roll on the third stage 376 in the left-right direction. A front guide groove 378 that is inclined downward from the rear to the front is formed in a substantially central portion of the third stage 376 in the left-right direction. The game ball that has lost the momentum to roll from side to side in the vicinity of the front guide groove 378 flows down on the game board 5 along the front guide groove 378.

  As described above, since the first start guide port guide groove 362 is formed in the substantially central portion of the hill portion 352, the expectation that the game ball is guided to the first start guide port 368 is from the mountain portion 332 to the second start. This is much higher than the expectation for winning the mouth 392. In addition, only the game balls received from the first warp inlet 306 into the center character 300 can be won at the second start opening 392, while the first warp inlet 306 or the second warp can be won at the first start opening 390. Not only the game balls received from the entrance 308 into the center combination 300 but also the game balls flowing down the left side of the center combination 300 may be guided by the nail and win the first starting port 390. Thus, the probability that a game ball wins the first start port 390 is higher than the probability that the game ball wins the second start port 392.

[About the first and second warps and the light transmitting member in the center role]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is a perspective view showing the game board obliquely from the front, and is a perspective view in which the first warp and the second warp are made visible by removing the decorative cover. FIG. 15 is a perspective view showing a configuration around the first warp and the second warp. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the light transmitting member and the first and second warps. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the light transmitting member at a position different from that in FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view including the light transmissive member according to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the 1st warp 316 and the 2nd warp 318 are divided and formed mutually. That is, a game ball taken in from the first warp inlet 306 flows down only the first warp 316, and a game ball taken in from the second warp inlet 308 flows down only the second warp 318. Thereby, the game ball taken in from the first warp inlet 306 and the game ball taken in from the second warp inlet 308 are guided to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, respectively, without interfering with each other.

  Further, each of the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 is made of a transparent member so that a game ball flowing down inside can be visually recognized. Thereby, the game ball received from the 1st warp entrance 306 or the 2nd warp entrance 308 can be visually recognized. That is, in the past, the player is often attracted attention to the center character 300 and the effect display device 115, and thus misses that the game ball has been received at the first warp entrance 306 or the second warp entrance 308. In many cases, the interest was reduced. Therefore, by using the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 as transparent members, even if the player has missed that the game ball has been received at the first warp inlet 306 or the second warp inlet 308, the first warp Since the game balls flowing down 316 and the second warp 318 can be visually recognized, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are arranged along the opening 301 of the center accessory 300 adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction. Specifically, the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are adjacent to each other and provided along the opening 301 of the center accessory 300 so that the second warp 318 is on the front side. Thereby, even if it is a narrow space, both can be arranged efficiently.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, an effect light source 380 is arranged behind the first warp 316 and the second warp 318. The light source 380 includes a base 382 and a plurality of LEDs 384, and the plurality of LEDs 384 are arranged on the base 382. The light source 380 (base 382 and LED 384), the decorative cover 386, and the light transmitting member 388 constitute an electric decoration member 379.

  The light emitted from the light source 380 enters the light transmission member 388, passes through the light transmission member 388 along the plane portion 388a, and is guided to the front of the game board 5. The light transmitting member 388 is a curved plate-like member and is made of a resin such as a transparent plastic. The light transmitting member 388 has a flat portion 388a and an end portion 388b intersecting the flat portion 388a. The light transmitting member 388 is disposed such that the end portion 388b is on the front side (player side).

  The first warp 316, the second warp 318, and the light transmission member 388 are covered with a colored non-transparent decorative cover 386. Since the light transmitted through the light transmitting member 388 is guided to the decorative cover 386, the front portion of the decorative cover 386 emits light. As described above, the light transmission member 388 can guide the light emitted from the light source 380 forward to emit light linearly. In addition, since the light transmitting member 388 can guide light forward by the length in the width direction of the flat portion 388a, the degree of freedom of the position where the light source 380 is arranged is increased.

  In addition, since the decorative cover 386 is colored, it is difficult to visually recognize the first warp 316 and the second warp 318. Accordingly, the first warp visual recognition hole 386a and the second warp so that the game ball flowing down the second warp 318 can be visually recognized on the front surface of the decorative cover 386 so that the game ball flowing down the first warp 316 can be visually recognized. A visual recognition hole 386b is formed. Thereby, while being able to perform the effect by the colored light, the game balls flowing down the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 can be visually recognized, and the interest is enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16, the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are attached along the flat portion 388 a of the light transmission member 388. Here, since the light emitted from the light source 380 is guided forward from the end portion 388b of the light transmitting member 388, the path through which the game ball flows can be easily grasped by the light emitted from the light source 380.

  In addition, since the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are disposed adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction, the first light warp 316 and the second warp 318 are not provided with the light source 380 and the light transmission member 388, respectively. The game balls flowing down each of the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 can be grasped.

  Further, since the light transmitted through the light transmitting member 388 is emitted from the end portion 388b, the light can be emitted linearly. Thereby, it is possible to emit light even in a narrow place such as a place along the periphery of the center accessory 300, and a gorgeous effect can be executed. Furthermore, it is possible to emit light in a frame shape as in the case where light is emitted along the opening 301 of the center accessory 300.

  In addition, a planar portion 388a is formed in a bowl shape at the end portion 388b of the light transmitting member 388 when viewed from the front view direction. As a result, the light transmitted through the plane portion 388a is not guided linearly forward, but is dispersed in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the end portion 388b, so that the light emitting area becomes larger and looks more gorgeous. Enhanced.

  Out of the illumination members 379 arranged on the outer periphery of the center accessory 300 according to the present embodiment, the illumination members 379 on the lower right side of the center accessory 300 when viewed from the front, that is, below the stages 330, 350, and 376. It is extended and arranged in the vicinity (left side) of the normal symbol display 82, the first and second special symbol indicators 84 and 86, the first and second special symbol hold indicators 88 and 90, and the normal symbol hold indicator 92. In the electric decoration member 379, a light transmitting member 389 having a shape characteristic as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 is used.

  Similar to the light transmitting member 388, the light transmitting member 389 is made of a transparent plate having a predetermined thickness, and an incident side end 389a to which light from the LED 384 of the light source 380 is directly irradiated and an incident side end 389a. And a radiation-side end 389b that radiates light that has entered the light-transmitting member 389 from the incident-side end 389a to the outside. A fine convex lens is formed on the surface of the radiation side end portion 389b so that the emitted light is diffused.

  Further, the light transmitting member 389 is formed with a V-shaped cutout portion 389c from the radiation side end portion 389b side to the incident side end portion 389a, and the longitudinal direction of the light transmission member 389 in the cutout portion 389c. An end surface on the direction tip portion side (upper side in the figure) is a first light guiding portion 389d. The first light guiding portion 389d has a surface shape such that light incident from the incident side end portion 389a is reflected and guided in the longitudinal direction of the light transmitting member 389.

  When light entering from the incident end side 389a side reaches the first light guiding unit 389d inside the light transmitting member 389 by the first light guiding unit 389d, a part of the light is transmitted to the first light guiding unit 389d. The light is reflected in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the light transmitting member 389, and the light travels inside the light transmitting member 389 toward the distal end side in the longitudinal direction. There is light emitted from the first light guiding portion 389d to the outside of the light transmitting member 389 without being reflected by the first light guiding portion 389d, and the light emitted to the outside is a decoration in front of the notch portion 389c. The cover 386 is irradiated.

  Further, the light transmitting member 389 has a longitudinal end portion (upper end portion in the drawing) on the same side as the side where the first light guiding portion 389d of the cutout portion 389c is disposed, in the longitudinal direction of the light transmitting member 389. A second light guiding portion 389e is formed for reflecting and guiding the light that has traveled along the light source to the radiation side end portion 389b side. The second light guiding portion 389e has a plurality of inclined surfaces formed at an angle that makes an acute angle from the end surface of the incident side end portion 389a toward the longitudinal tip. As shown in the figure, these inclined surfaces have different angles, and in this example, have a saw shape. By the second light guiding portion 389e, the light that has traveled in the light transmitting member 389 toward the front end side in the longitudinal direction is reflected toward the radiation side end portion 389b and can be emitted from the radiation side end portion 389b. ing.

  According to the light transmitting member 389 of the present example, the light from the light source 380 disposed at a predetermined position is caused to enter the inside from the incident side end 389a, and then reflected by the first light guiding portion 389d to have its optical axis. Is directed in the longitudinal direction of the light transmitting member 389 that is substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, and is sent to the second light guiding portion 389e that is a predetermined distance away from the first light guiding portion 389d. In the light guiding portion 389e, the light that has traveled in the longitudinal direction is reflected from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 to be emitted from the radiation side end portion 389b on the front side of the second light guiding portion 389e, and the decorative cover in front thereof By irradiating 386, light decoration can be performed.

  That is, according to the light transmissive member 389 of the present example, the light from the light source 380 can be irradiated even on a portion of the decorative cover 386 that is not disposed directly in front of the light source 380. Therefore, the light source 380 is disposed directly behind. Even if it is not possible, the decoration cover 386 can be well decorated with light by irradiating the entire decoration cover 386 with light.

[Relationship between back unit and effect display device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 19 is a perspective view showing the front unit and the effect display device as viewed from the front. 20 is a perspective view showing FIG. 19 from the rear. FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing the back unit from the rear. FIG. 22 is a rear view of the effect display device. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear unit and the effect display device etc. from the front.

  As shown in the figure, in this example, the effect display device 115 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 270. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, the back unit 270 has an inner periphery of an opening 412 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in the back box 410, and is vertically moved to one side (left side in the rear view) extending vertically. Two attachment / detachment grooves 414 formed away from each other, and an attachment / detachment mechanism 418 having an attachment / detachment lever 416 disposed on the rear surface of the back box 410 on the opposite side to the attachment / detachment groove 414 (right side in rear view). ing.

  The attachment / detachment lever 416 of the attachment / detachment mechanism 418 has a box shape that is long in the vertical direction with the side facing the center of the opening 412 in the back box 410 open, and can be slid vertically on the rear surface of the back box 410. Is retained. On the rear surface side of the detachable lever 416, there are provided a knob portion 416a that protrudes rearward at the approximate center in the vertical direction, and an opening portion 416b that is opened to the rear side by cutting out the rear surface below the knob portion 416a. ing.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22, the effect display device 115 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and is formed at positions separated from each other in the vertical direction on one of the left and right side surfaces (the side surface on the left side in the rear view). Two detachable protrusions 420 projecting outward, and the other side surface (the side surface on the right side of the back view) opposite to the side surface on which the detachable protrusion 420 is formed, are formed at a substantially center in the vertical direction and outward An attachment / detachment locking portion 422 protruding toward the surface is provided. These attachment / detachment protrusions 420 and attachment / detachment locking portions 422 are formed so as to correspond to the attachment / detachment grooves 414 and the attachment / detachment mechanism 418 of the back unit 270.

  The effect display device 115 is attached to the back unit 270 in a state where the attachment / detachment lever 416 of the attachment / detachment mechanism 418 in the back box 410 is slid upward and the display screen of the effect display device 115 is directed to the front side and the rear unit 270 is attached. The attachment / detachment protrusion 420 is inserted into the attachment / detachment groove 414, and the attachment / detachment locking portion 422 is inserted into the attachment / detachment mechanism 418 from the opening 416 b of the attachment / detachment lever 416. Then, by sliding the attachment / detachment lever 416 downward, the rear side of the attachment / detachment locking portion 422 is covered with the rear surface of the attachment / detachment lever 416, the attachment / detachment locking portion 422 is locked, and the effect display device 115 moves to the back unit 270. Will be installed.

  Note that the effect display device 115 is attached to the back unit 270, whereby the opening 412 of the back box 410 is closed by the effect display device 115, and the rigidity of the back box 410 is increased.

  In addition, the attachment / detachment groove 414 in the back unit 270 is a cooperation between the back box 410 and a production accessory back ball path upper member 424 (detailed configuration and operation will be described later) fixed to the rear side of the back box 410. Is to be formed. The effect accessory back ball path upper member 424 is fixed to the back box 410 by a predetermined screw from the rear side, and has a color clearly different from the back box 410 of the back unit 270 and the effect display device 115. It is colored so that it can be easily distinguished from them (see FIG. 20, FIG. 21, etc.).

  By the way, when the effect display device 115 is detached from the back unit 270 due to a failure or the like, the attachment / detachment mechanism 418 for attaching / detaching the effect display device 115 to / from the attachment / detachment mechanism 418 is provided due to the presence of the knob portion 416a of the attachment / detachment lever 416. It can be easily recognized by the operator. However, even if the attachment / detachment locking portion 422 is unlocked by the attachment / detachment mechanism 418, the attachment / detachment protrusion 420 is inserted and fitted into the attachment / detachment groove 414, so that it is removed only by pulling the effect display device 115 rearward. This may cause the operator to think about the removal method, and may increase the time required for the work, or may be forcibly removed and damaged.

  However, in this embodiment, the production-use accessory back sphere path upper member 424 can be easily identified, and the production-use accessory back sphere path upper member 424 can be immediately recognized that it can be removed by another member. Therefore, when removing the effect display device 115, the effect accessory back ball path upper member 424 can be removed, and the effect display device 115 can be easily removed, and the time taken for the removal can be obtained as a result. In addition, the rear unit 270 and the like can be prevented from being damaged due to excessive removal.

  In the light source 380 described above, the LED 384 disposed in the back box 410 emits an emblem accessory 385 (see FIG. 14 and the like) located on the front side (that is, the player side) from behind. It is configured to irradiate. A part of the emblem accessory 385 is a resin-made transparent body in order to transmit light emitted from the LED 384 behind to the front side. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the light emission mode of the LED 384 disposed in the back box 410 as the light emission mode of the emblem accessory 385.

[Overall configuration of back unit]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board including the effect bonus. FIG. 25 is a perspective view showing the rear unit attached to the rear of the game board from the front upper front. FIG. 26 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. FIG. 28 is a perspective view showing the rear unit disassembled for each main member from the front.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with an effect accessory 430 that is arranged in the game area 37 and can perform an effect using a game ball. This stage effect 430 is arranged inside the center role 300 and adjacent to the right frame 370c of the frame-shaped decorative body 370, and receives the game ball received from the stage prize winning opening 398a. It is used to produce an effect.

  The effect accessory 430 includes a cylindrical accessory rotator 432, and a figure 434 is accommodated in the accessory rotator 432 as shown in FIG. This accessory rotating body 432 is made up of a transparent member in which a part in the circumferential direction can visually recognize the inside, and another part different from a part in the circumferential direction is made up of an opaque member that cannot visually see the inside. Has been. However, an opening may be formed instead of the transparent member. If the figure 434 accommodated in the inside can be visually recognized, the aspect is not limited.

  In this specification, the side on which the figure 434 can be visually recognized is referred to as an effect side area, and the side on which the figure 434 cannot be viewed is referred to as a decoration side area.

  The accessory rotator 432 of the effect accessory 430 is configured to be rotatable about the center extending in the longitudinal direction (that is, the center line of the cross section crossing the longitudinal direction of the accessory rotator 432). Therefore, the player can or cannot visually recognize the figure 434 depending on the rotation position. That is, the figure 434 cannot be visually recognized when the opaque member is on the front (player side) (see FIG. 10), and the figure 434 can be visually recognized when the transparent part is on the front. (See FIG. 24).

  Note that the phrase “freely rotatable with respect to the game board 5” does not mean that it is attached to the game board 5, but whether it is attached to the game board 5 or not. Can be freely rotated.

  When this figure 434 cannot be visually recognized, the character of “Utahime Legend” can be visually recognized on the front surface of the accessory rotating body 432. Although the detailed configuration will be described later, this character is composed of a transparent member capable of transmitting light, and a light source such as an LED is disposed behind the character. When light is emitted from the light source toward the front of the game board 5, the “diva legend (decorative character)” is turned on. Then, by changing the lighting mode of the light source to various modes, it is possible to use the effect accessory 430 as a decorative member.

  In other words, the effect accessory 430 can be arbitrarily set between the effect position where the accessory rotator 432 can visually recognize the figure 434 and the decoration position where the figure 434 cannot be visually recognized and the decorative characters of “Daiba Legend” can be visually recognized. It has a rotatable structure.

  Therefore, the production role 430 functions as a production role 430 when the figure 434 can be visually recognized, and functions as a decoration member when the figure 434 cannot be visually recognized (that is, when the decorative characters can be visually recognized). The area 5 can be used effectively, and the player can be surprised by rotating the accessory rotating body 432, so that interest is enhanced.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 27, the game ball received from the stage winning prize opening 398 a is directed to the stage actor 430 between the stage actor 430 and the stage opening / closing device 398. An accessory guiding path 436 for guiding is provided.

  The accessory guide path 436 is inclined downward from the effect opening / closing device 398 toward the effect accessory 430 (see FIG. 25). As a result, the game ball received in the stage special prize winning opening 398 a rolls on the accessory guide path 436 toward the stage accessory 430. Further, the accessory guiding path 436 is made of a transparent resin member, so that a game ball rolling on the accessory guiding path 436 can be visually recognized.

  Here, the above-described effect accessory 430, the accessory guide path 436, and the like are supported by the back box 410, and are constituent members of the back unit 270. That is, the back unit 270 includes an effect opening / closing device 398 having an effect winning prize opening 398a, and an accessory guiding path 436 for guiding a game ball received in the effect winning prize opening 398a of the effect opening / closing device 398. An effect accessory 430 capable of providing an effect using the game ball as the game ball guided by the accessory guide path 436 enters the interior, an effect opening / closing device 398, an accessory guide path 436, and It mainly includes a back box 410 having a rectangular opening portion 412 that holds the effect-use accessories 430 and the like in predetermined positions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  In addition, the back unit 270 causes a game ball arranged at the upper part of the effect bonus 430 and guided by the bonus guidance path 436 to enter the effect bonus 430 or outside (the effect bonus 430). The game ball distributed to the outside of the production-use accessory 430 by the distribution mechanism 438 and the production-use accessory back sphere on-path member 424. Further, a production accessory back sphere path lower member 426 (see FIG. 43) is further provided. In FIG. 28, reference numeral 440 denotes a lamp driving board box that houses a lamp driving board 688 described later.

  Further, the back unit 270 includes a plurality of light sources 380 for light-decorating the frame-shaped decorative body 370 in the center accessory 300 described above, and light sources of the center illumination unit 302 disposed in the vicinity of the stages 330, 350, and 376. And a center light source unit 442 having a center decoration lamp 304 or the like (see FIGS. 25 and 28). Although not shown, the center light source unit 442 includes a base substrate having a plurality of LEDs and a diffusing lens that is disposed above the base substrate and diffuses light from the LEDs. In addition, each stage 330, 350, 376, etc. can be light decorated.

  In the back unit 270, as shown in the figure, a stage effect 430, an accessory guide path 436, each light source 380, a center light source unit 442, and the like provided with a sorting mechanism 438 on the upper side are provided in the back box 410 from the front side. It can be mounted on. Further, the effect opening / closing device 398, the effect accessory back sphere path upper member 424, the effect accessory back sphere path lower member 426, the lamp driving board box 440, and the like are attached to the back box 410 from the back side. ing.

[Regarding the production of the acting and distribution mechanism in the back unit]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29 is an anomalous front view shown from the front of the figure in a state in which the effector has a distribution mechanism. FIG. 30 is a rear view of the effect accessory provided with a distribution mechanism. 31 is a plan view of FIG. FIG. 32 is a bottom view of FIG. FIG. 33 is a perspective view from the front in a state in which the effector has a distribution mechanism. FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing the effect accessory for each major configuration as viewed from the front. FIG. 35 is a perspective view showing the accessory rotating body. FIG. 36 is an irregular front view showing the accessory rotating body with the figure as the front. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the figure side of the accessory rotating body. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the decorative member side of the accessory rotating body. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a rotation drive mechanism of the first effect rod in the accessory rotating body. 40 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view for explaining a discharge path of game balls in the effect item.

  As shown in the figure, in the effect accessory 430, the accessory rotator 432 that is rotatable about the axis extending in the vertical direction and the predetermined range in the circumferential direction of the accessory rotator 432 are exposed to the outside. Effect accessory base 446 having an opening 444, a rotation drive unit 448 disposed below the effect accessory base 446 and rotating the accessory rotator 432, and the opening of the effect accessory base 446 It mainly includes a first closing member 450 and a second closing member 452 that are made of a transparent member by closing the portion 444 (see FIG. 34).

  In addition, the effect item 430 is used for irradiating light to a predetermined range (specifically, the right frame 370c) of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 in the center accessory 300 via the transparent second closing member 452. A light source 454 is provided. Similar to the light source 380, the light source 454 includes a plurality of LEDs 456 and a light source substrate 458 to which the LEDs 456 are attached. The light source 454 is substantially the same as the length (vertical length) of the accessory rotating body 432. The LEDs 456 are mounted in a row on the light source substrate 458 having a length (see FIG. 34).

  The accessory rotator 432 in the effect accessory 430 includes an accessory rotator body 460 that holds the figure 434 and the like. The accessory rotating body 460 divides a cylindrical space formed by the disc-shaped top plate portion 462 and the bottom plate portion 464 and the top plate portion 462 and the bottom plate portion 464 in the circumferential direction. Partition walls 466 that form two spaces (a sphere circulation space 460a and a decoration space 460b) (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

  A bearing groove 462a is formed at the center of the top surface of the top plate portion 462 of the accessory rotating body 460, and a long hole 462b that penetrates vertically and allows a game ball to pass therethrough. The long hole 462b is formed so as to communicate with one space (the sphere circulation space 460a) partitioned by the partition wall 466, and the circumferential end of the sphere circulation space 460a (the left end in FIG. 36). It is arranged in the vicinity.

  On the other hand, the bottom plate portion 464 of the accessory rotator main body 460 includes an opening 464a disposed substantially at the center thereof and a plurality of through holes 464b arranged in a circular arc shape disposed on the sphere circulation space 460a side. The opening 464a and the through hole 464b are formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

  Further, the accessory rotating body 432 includes a figure 434 formed by deforming a predetermined character in a three-dimensional shape in a spherical circulation space 460 a partitioned by a partition wall 466, and a long hole toward the approximate center of the figure 434. A ball discharge member 468 that discharges the game ball that has passed through 462b into the accessory rotator 432, and an axis (described later) that is disposed below the ball discharge member 468 and extends in the left-right direction and horizontally in the horizontal center. A first effect rod 470 that is rotatable around the support shaft 474) and a second effect rod 472 disposed below the first effect rod 470 are further provided.

  Each of these ball discharge member 468, first effect rod 470, and second effect rod 472 is made of a transparent member so that the manner in which the game ball rolls can be visually recognized.

  The figure 434 is arranged in such a manner that one hand 434a is pushed forward. Further, a support shaft 474 is supported by the figure 434 directly above the one hand 434a. The support shaft 474 is an axis whose longitudinal direction is the front-rear direction. That is, the one hand 434a and the support shaft 474 are substantially parallel. The first performance rod 470 is fixed to the one hand 434 a so as to be supported by the one hand 434 a of the figure 434 and is supported by the support shaft 474.

  The support shaft 474 is configured integrally with the one hand 434a of the figure 434 and the first performance rod 470, and is configured to be rotatable within a predetermined angle range (details will be described later). The support shaft 474 is pivotally supported by a partition wall 466, and an end opposite to the one hand 434a side extends through the partition wall 466 to the decorative space 460b side (see FIG. 38).

  In addition, the second effect rod 472 disposed below the first effect rod 470 is inclined from one end (right end 472a in the present embodiment) to the other end (left end 472b in the present embodiment). The first effect 樋 470 and the second effect 樋 472 have an arc shape along the circumferential direction of the accessory rotator 432 in plan view, and the outer shape protrudes from the outer periphery of the cylinder of the accessory rotator main body 460. (See FIG. 35, FIG. 42, etc.).

  The accessory rotating body 432 has a first outlet 476 below the support shaft 474 and on the left side in the ball circulation space 460a, and below the support shaft 474 and on the right side. A second effect rod guide port 478 communicating with the second effect rod 472 is formed. When the support shaft 474 rotates counterclockwise to the rotation limit, the left end 470b of the first performance rod 470 is positioned above the first performance port 476. On the other hand, when the support shaft 474 rotates in the clockwise direction to the rotation limit, the right end 470a of the first effect rod 470 is positioned above the second effect rod guide port 478.

  It should be noted that the first effect rod 470 is such that the center portion is positioned below the right end 470a and the left end 470b when the right end 470a and the left end 470b at both ends thereof have the same height (horizontal state). It has a shape. That is, the first performance rod 470 has a shape with a lowered center. As a result, when the game ball released from the ball discharge member 468 is supplied when the first effect rod 470 is in a substantially horizontal state, the first effect rod 470 is caused to move in the horizontal direction. (See FIG. 29).

  The movement of the game ball in the first effect 樋 470 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 29, the game ball supplied to the first effect 樋 470 is a motion vector (predetermined to the right) by the ball discharge member 468. Is applied to the vicinity of the center of the first effect 樋 470, the game ball supplied to the first effect 470 is moved toward the right end 470a of the first effect 470. Will move. At that time, since the left and right both ends 470a and 470b of the first performance rod 470 are higher than the center, the game ball rolling toward the right end 470a is in a state of climbing a hill, and the speed is increased by the action of gravity. When the game ball gradually decelerates and the rolling of the game ball stops, this time, the rolling starts toward the center of the first performance rod 470, and the game ball returns to the center lower than the left and right. In addition, when the motion ball in the right direction is large and the game ball reaches the right end 470a without decelerating, when the first effect 樋 470 is substantially horizontal, the right end 470a of the first effect 樋 470 and the second effect 樋Since the guide port 478 is in a non-communication state, the game ball is not guided to the second effect kite guide port 478 but is reflected by colliding with the partition wall portion 466 and is reflected at the center of the first effect kite 470, that is, the left end 470b. It will roll towards.

  And the game ball which went to the center side from the right end 470a side of the 1st production pole 470 will be in the state which goes down the hill, and since rolling speed becomes fast as it goes to the center, it passes the center of the 1st production basket 470. This time, the hill is climbed toward the left end 470b. When the rolling speed of the game ball from the center toward the left end 470b is gradually reduced due to the action of gravity and stops, this time, the rolling starts from the left end 470b side toward the center side, that is, the right end 470a side. To do. When the first performance rod 470 is in a substantially horizontal state, the left end 470b of the first performance rod 470 and the first performance outlet 476 are in a non-communication state, so that the game ball is in the first performance hall 476. When the game ball rolls at a high speed and does not stop and reaches the left end 470b, the ball collides with the partition wall 466 and is reflected, and rolls toward the center of the first performance rod 470, that is, the right end 470a. To move.

  Thus, by repeating the above-described operation, the game ball rolls so as to swing in the left-right direction on the first effect rod 470, and between the right end 470a and the left end 470b of the first effect rod 470. As the game ball moves back and forth, it is possible to make the player feel excited about which end the game ball falls from, so that the movement can be enhanced.

  In addition, a second performance exit 480 is formed below the left end 472b of the second performance rod 472. That is, the first performance port 476 and the second performance port 480 are formed side by side. The first performance port 476 and the second performance port 480 pass through the partition wall 466 and communicate with the decoration space 460b side, and the received game ball is sent to the decoration space 460b side. Yes. Note that, on the decorative space 460b side of the partition wall portion 466, a first guiding portion that guides the game balls received in the first performance outlet 476 and the second performance outlet 480 to the outer periphery of the cylindrical body of the accessory rotating body 460. 466a and a second guiding portion 466b are formed.

  Here, the first performance port 476 is configured in blue, and the second performance hall guide port 478 and the second performance port 480 are configured in red. As a result, it is possible to determine whether it is a hit or a miss while sorting one game ball by the first stage 樋 470 left and right by accepting the game ball to each performance exit formed side by side. It is like that.

  By the way, in the accessory rotating body main body 460, as shown in FIG. 40, the rear end of the long hole 462b in the top plate portion 462 is disposed at a position where it bites into the decorative space 460b side with respect to the general shape of the partition wall portion 466. In addition, in the predetermined range below the long hole 462b (up to the substantially rotating upper end of the first effect rod 470), the partition wall portion 466 is on the decorative space 460b side so that the long hole 462b communicates only with the ball circulation space 460a. A concave portion 466c that is recessed on the side of the ball circulation space 460a is formed.

  On the other hand, the ball discharge member 468 has a fan-shaped decorative portion 468a disposed below the top plate portion 462, and extends downward from one end portion (left end portion) of the decorative portion 468a. A covering portion 468b that covers the front upper portion of the recessed portion 466c of the partition wall portion 466, and a discharge portion 468c that is substantially continuous with the bottom surface of the recessed portion 466c below the covering portion 468b and extends near the upper portion of the center of the first effect rod 470 .

  When this ball discharge member 468 is attached to the accessory rotating body main body 460, a game ball that has fallen into a drop port 536b of the effect accessory base 446 described later enters from the front side portion in the elongated hole 462b and is covered. It is guided to the recess 466c by the portion 468b. At that time, a long hole 462b is formed so as to follow the movement of the game ball above the covering portion 468b. That is, the upper portion of the covering portion 468b is raised by the long hole 462b. It is guided well to the recess 466c without contacting the back side of the plate portion 462. Then, after the game ball is lowered to the bottom surface of the recess 466c by the covering portion 468b and the recess 466c, it can be supplied from the bottom surface of the recess 466c to the first stage basket 470 via the discharge portion 468c. (See FIG. 40).

  Further, the accessory rotating body 432 is a sphere that is attached to the partition wall portion 466 below the second performance rod 472 in the sphere circulation space 460a and the rotation shaft 482 penetrates the partition wall portion 466 and protrudes toward the decoration space 460b. An allocating unit motor 484 and a motor cover 486 arranged on the front side so as to cover the ball allocating unit motor 484 and having a surface decorated with plating are provided. The motor cover 486 prevents the ball sorter motor 484 from being seen by the player. In this example, the ball sorter motor 484 is a stepping motor.

  Further, on the front side of the motor cover 486, a chandelier-shaped decorative lens 488 made of a transparent member, and a partial cylindrical surface that covers the front surface of the decorative lens 488 and whose outer surface substantially coincides with the outer peripheral surface of the accessory rotating body 460. And a cover lens 490 made of a transparent member. The plated decoration of the motor cover 486 and the transparent decorative lens 488 give a gorgeous and gorgeous impression.

  The cover lens 490 includes a partially cylindrical cover portion 490a extending in the vertical direction, and a plate-like bottom portion 490b extending substantially horizontally from the lower end of the cover portion 490a toward the rotation center of the accessory rotating body main body 460, The cross section is substantially L-shaped (see FIG. 41). Although illustration is omitted, the cover portion 490a of the cover lens 490 is provided with a polished decoration in which characters and the like are designed.

  The cover lens 490 includes a light incident portion 490c disposed below the outer end of the bottom portion 490b of the cover lens 490, and light incident on the bottom portion 490b from the light incident portion 490c, and the cover portion 490a and the bottom portion 490b. The first light guiding part 490d that guides reflection in the direction in which the light comes into contact, and the cover part 490a and the bottom part 490b are arranged in contact with each other, and the light from the first light guiding part 490d is reflected and guided in the direction of the upper end surface of the cover part 490a. A second light guiding portion 490e; and a light emitting portion 490f that is disposed on the upper end surface of the cover portion 490a and emits light from the second light guiding portion 490e toward the inside obliquely upward of the cover lens 490. Yes.

  The first light guiding portion 490d in the cover lens 490 is cut out at the outer end of the bottom portion 490b (the end toward the center of the accessory rotating body main body 460) in a chamfered shape (C chamfer) on the upper side. It is formed by setting it as such a shape. The second light guiding portion 490e is formed by chamfering (C chamfering) the inside and outside of the portion where the cover portion 490a and the bottom portion 490b are in contact. Further, the light emitting portion 490f is formed by chamfering the upper end of the cover portion 490a so that the inner side of the cover lens 490 is lowered and the vertical line thereof faces the direction of the figure 434. Has been.

  According to this cover lens 490, the light incident inside from the light incident portion 490c is guided to the light emitting portion 490f at the upper end of the cover portion 490a, and is emitted from the light emitting portion 490f, and is disposed above the cover lens 490. The figure 434, the first effect 樋 470, and the second effect 樋 472 can be illuminated from below.

  A part of the motor cover 486 whose surface is plated is disposed so as to be in contact with the first light guiding portion 490d of the cover lens 490, and the second light is also reflected by the light reflected by the motor cover 486. The amount of light reflected in the direction of the guiding portion 490e can be relatively increased.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38, in the other space partitioned by the partition wall portion 466 in the accessory rotating body 432, that is, in the decoration space 460b, the first effect rod 470 is rotated within a predetermined angle range. The rotation drive mechanism 492 is provided. The rotation drive mechanism 492 includes a first link member 494 that rotates integrally with the support shaft 474 of the first effect rod 470, and a second link member 496 that rotates integrally with the rotation shaft 482 of the ball sorter motor 484. ing.

  This rotation drive mechanism 492 is inserted into a slit 494a formed on the front end side of the first link member 494 by inserting a pin 496a protruding from the front end of the second link member 496, The second link member 496 is linked to each other so that the rotation of the ball sorter motor 484 is transmitted to the first effect rod 470 (see FIG. 39). More specifically, when the second link member 496 is rotated by driving the ball distribution motor 484, the pin 496a at the tip of the pin 496a moves on the circumference of a predetermined radius around the rotation shaft 482. The moving pin 496a pushes the slit 494a of the first link member 494 from the inside, and the movement of the first link member 494 other than the rotation is restricted by the support shaft 474. Therefore, the pin 496a slides in the slit 494a. As a result, the first link member 494 rotates about the support shaft 474.

  In the rotation drive mechanism 492, the length of the first link member 494 is approximately twice the length of the second link member 496, as shown in the figure. Accordingly, when the second link member 496 is rotated by a predetermined angle by the ball distributing unit motor 484, the support shaft 474 is approximately half the predetermined angle via the second link member 496 and the first link member 494. It is designed to rotate. That is, the rotation angle of the ball sorter motor 484 is approximately halved and transmitted to the support shaft 474 that pivotally supports the first performance rod 470. The rotation error of the effect rod 470 is approximately halved, so that the rotation control of the first effect rod 470 can be controlled more closely, and the first effect rod 470 can be smoothly rotated.

  Note that the rotation drive mechanism 492 extends in a direction different from that of the second link member 496 with respect to the rotation shaft 482 of the ball sorter motor 484, and is integrated with the second link member 496. A piece 498 and a ball sorter motor sensor 500 capable of detecting the detection piece 498 and supported by the partition wall 466 in the vicinity of the rotation shaft 482 of the ball sorter motor 484 are provided.

  The rotation position of the ball sorting motor 484 can be detected by the detection piece 498 and the ball sorting motor sensor 500, and the origin adjustment of the ball sorting motor 484 is performed by the detection, and the first position is adjusted. The stage 470 can be rotated in a good state.

  Further, the accessory rotator 432 is provided with a decoration member 502 that lights and blinks the characters “Legend of the Diva” in the decoration space 460b. The decorative member 502 is sized to cover only the predetermined range, not the entire circumferential direction of the decorative space 460b in the accessory rotating body main body 460. Specifically, the size of the decorative member 502 in the circumferential direction is such that the first guide portion 466a and the second guide portion 466b extending from the partition wall portion 466 toward the outer periphery are exposed to the outside of the accessory rotating body 432. (See FIG. 35).

  The decorative member 502 has a partial cylindrical surface shape substantially matching the cylindrical outer periphery of the accessory rotating body main body 460, and includes a decorative lens 504 made of a translucent member having characters of “Utahime Densetsu”, and a decorative lens. A plate-like diffusing lens 506 disposed on the back side of the 504, and a light source substrate 512 disposed on the back side of the diffusing lens 506 and provided with a plurality of LEDs 510 at predetermined positions of the substrate 508.

  The diffusing lens 506 of the decorative member 502 is arranged on the surface facing the decorative lens 504 at a position corresponding to the decoration of the “diva legend” on the decorative lens 504, and a light emitting portion 506a composed of a plurality of belt-like convex lenses extending in the vertical direction. The light reflecting portion 506b, which is provided on the surface opposite to the light emitting portion 506a and extends in a direction orthogonal to the vertical direction, is perpendicular to the direction in which the V groove of the light reflecting portion 506b extends. And a light incident portion 506c having a flat surface formed at an end located in the direction (vertical direction) (see FIGS. 38 and 41).

  The diffuser lens 506 of this example is formed with an opening 506d having a predetermined width that penetrates through a portion where the light emitting portion 506a is formed in the middle portion in the vertical direction, and the upper surface and the lower surface of the inner periphery of the opening 506d, respectively. The light incident portion 506c is used.

  Further, the light source substrate 512 of the decorative member 502 is disposed at a position as close as the substrate 508 comes into contact with the back surface of the diffusion lens 506 as shown in the figure, and the light from the LED 510 is a light incident portion of the diffusion lens 506. The light emitting portion of the LED 510 is attached to the substrate 508 so that the light emitting portion of the LED 510 faces in the vertical direction so as to irradiate 506c. That is, the LEDs 510 are attached to the substrate 508 so as to face the upper and lower end portions of the diffusion lens 506 and the light incident portion 506c formed in the opening portion 506d.

  In the decorative member 502, light emitted in the vertical direction by the LEDs 510 of the light source substrate 512 is irradiated to the light incident portion 506 c disposed in a direction perpendicular to the surface formed by the light emitting portion 506 a of the diffusion lens 506. Then, the light enters the diffusion lens 506 from the light incident portion 506c. Of the light that has entered the diffusing lens 506, light directed toward the side opposite to the side on which the decorative lens 504 is disposed (the side on which the substrate 508 is disposed) reaches the light reflecting portion 506 b and the plural The V-groove is reflected to the decorative lens 504 side (light emitting portion 506a side) and emitted from the light emitting portion 506a to the decorative lens 504. At this time, since the light emitting portion 506a is provided with a plurality of belt-like convex lenses extending in the vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 506a is emitted so as to diffuse in a direction perpendicular to the vertical direction. The

  According to the decorative member 502, when light is incident from the light incident portion 506c provided at the end of the diffuser lens 506 formed in a plate shape, the plurality of V grooves formed on one surface of the diffuser lens 506 The light reflecting portion 506b is reflected toward the light emitting portion 506a formed on the other surface so that light can be emitted from the entire light emitting portion 506a, and the entire decorative lens 504 can be illuminated in a planar shape. It has become.

  By the way, when the light source is arranged on the back side of the decorative lens, if the distance between the light source and the decorative lens is too close, the light from the light source reaches the decorative lens before it is sufficiently diffused, and there is no light source. By the way, there is a problem that the decorative lens has different light conditions and does not emit light in a planar shape. For this reason, it is conceivable to make the decorative lens emit light in a plane shape by sufficiently diffusing the light by moving the light source away from the decorative lens. In this case, the distance between the decorative lens and the light source becomes long. As a result, the thickness of the entire decorative member increases, and the decorative lens cannot emit light in a planar shape due to space or the like, and there is a problem that effective optical decoration cannot be performed.

  However, according to the decorative member 502, light incident from a direction along the surface of the diffusion lens 506 can be emitted in a planar shape from the surface of the diffusion lens 506. It is not necessary to arrange a light source, the thickness of the decorative member 502 can be made as thin as possible, and the decorative lens 504 can emit light in a planar state in a good state regardless of the installation space of the decorative member, and is effective. Light decoration can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the accessory rotating body 432 of the present example further includes a rotating body upper substrate 514 disposed between the top plate portion 462 and the ball discharge member 468 in the accessory rotating body main body 460. Yes. A plurality of LEDs 516 are attached to the lower surface of the rotating body upper substrate 514, and the LED 516 emits light to raise the figure 434, the first effect 樋 470, the second effect 樋 472, etc. via the ball emitting member 468. It comes to illuminate from.

  The accessory rotating body 432 further includes a rotating body lower substrate 518 disposed below the bottom plate portion 464 of the accessory rotating body main body 460. The rotating body lower substrate 518 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 520 as light sources at positions corresponding to the through holes 464b in the bottom plate portion 464 on the upper surface side, and is provided on the accessory rotating body 432 at the center on the lower surface side. The ball distribution unit motor 484, the ball distribution unit motor sensor 500, the light source substrate 512, the rotating body upper substrate 514, the rotating body lower substrate 518, and the connection connector 522 for electrically connecting the distributing mechanism 438 are provided. A plurality (three in this example) are provided.

  Of the three connection connectors 522, the central connection connector 522 located at the center of rotation of the accessory rotating body main body 460 is a rotating body connected to the ball sorting unit motor 484, the ball sorting unit motor sensor 500, and the like. Even if the connection connector 522 rotates with the rotation of the accessory rotating body 432, the wiring cord extending from the connection plug connected to the connection connector 522 is minimized as much as possible. Therefore, the risk that the wiring cord is disconnected due to twisting can be reduced.

  Further, the accessory rotator 432 is provided with a rotation connecting member 524 that is disposed below the rotator lower substrate 518 and transmits the rotation drive from the rotation drive unit 448 to the accessory rotator 432. By fixing the rotary connecting member 524 to the bottom plate portion 464 of the accessory rotating body main body 460 using a predetermined screw, the rotary lower member substrate 518 is sandwiched and fixed by the rotary connecting member 524 and the bottom plate portion 464. It has become.

  The rotary connecting member 524 is substantially concentric with the axis of the accessory rotating body main body 460, and the plurality of connection connectors 522 attached to the rotating body lower substrate 518 are opened in a circular shape having a size that can be viewed from below. 524a, a cylindrical portion 524b extending downward from the vicinity of the periphery of the opening 524a, and a plurality (two in this example) of protrusions 524c disposed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 524b and extending in the vertical direction (two in this example). (See FIGS. 32 and 34). The size of the opening 524a is such that a connection plug (not shown) connected to the connection connector 522 can pass therethrough so that the accessory rotating body 432 rotating through the opening 524a can be electrically connected. It has become.

  The rotation drive unit 448 in the effect accessory 430 of this example includes a rotation motor 526 for rotating the accessory rotation body 432, a first gear 528 fixed to the rotation shaft of the rotation motor 526, A pedestal gear 530 having a second gear 530a meshing with the first gear 528 and connected to the rotation connecting member 524 of the accessory rotating body 432 and supporting the accessory rotating body 432 from below, and the rotational position of the pedestal gear 530 A rotation unit motor sensor 532 that detects the rotation position of the rotation unit motor 526 by detecting it, and a rotation drive unit that supports the rotation unit motor 526, the first gear 528, the base gear 530, and the rotation unit motor sensor 532 at predetermined positions. And a casing 534 (see FIG. 34).

  The pedestal gear 530 in the rotation drive unit 448 includes a cylindrical pedestal cylindrical portion 530b that is open at the top and bottom and can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 524b of the rotation connecting member 524, and an upper end portion of the pedestal cylindrical portion 530b. A notch 530c into which the projection 524c can be fitted, and a second gear 530a formed on the outer periphery of the lower portion of the pedestal cylindrical portion 530b and meshing with the first gear and having an outer diameter approximately twice the diameter of the first gear 528. And a substantially fan-shaped detection piece 530d which is formed on the lower outer periphery of the second gear and protrudes outward in the radial direction.

  In addition, the rotation drive unit casing 534 of the rotation drive unit 448 has a circular opening 534a that communicates with the inside of the pedestal cylindrical portion 530b of the pedestal gear 530, and a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction outside the opening 534a. And a plurality of (three in this example) support rollers 534b that rotatably support the base gear 530 (see FIG. 32). Since the pedestal gear 530 is placed on the plurality of support rollers 534b, the pedestal gear 530 is rotatably supported.

  The rotational drive unit 448 inserts the base cylindrical part 530b of the base gear 530 into the cylindrical part 524b of the rotary connection member 524, and connects the notch part 530c of the base cylindrical part 530b and the protrusion 524c in the cylindrical part 524b to each other. By fitting, the base gear 530 and the rotation connecting member 524 can be connected so as to be integrally rotatable, and the accessory rotating body 432 can be rotated by driving of the rotating portion motor 526.

  Further, the lower side of the accessory rotating body 432 is rotatably supported by the base gear 530 of the rotation drive unit 448. The rotation drive unit 448 not only rotates the accessory rotating body 432, but also can favorably support the weight of the accessory rotating body 432 by the support roller 534b of the rotation driving unit casing 534 via the base gear 530. It has become.

  With the opening 534a of the rotation drive unit casing 534 and the pedestal cylindrical portion 530b of the pedestal gear 530 in the rotation drive unit 448, the connection connector 522 provided at the lower part of the accessory rotator 432 can be viewed from below, A connection plug (not shown) can be connected to the connection connector 522 through the lower side of the rotation drive unit 448 (see FIG. 32).

  Although a specific configuration is not shown, the connection plug connected to the connection connector 522 at the lower part of the accessory rotating body 432 is below the portion where the effect accessory 430 of the back box 410 is fixedly supported. The rotating body relay board fixing part 410a (see FIG. 25 and FIG. 28) is connected to the formed rotating body relay board (not shown) via a wiring cord having a predetermined slack. . The distance between the connection connector 522 and the rotating body relay board allows the wiring cord to be twisted between the rotating connection connector 522 and the rotating body relay board fixed to the back box 410 without causing any trouble. Since it is a distance, it can be electrically connected in good condition to the rotating accessory rotating body 432, and the risk of disconnection of the wiring cord is as low as possible.

  The effect accessory base 446 in the effect accessory 430 includes a base-shaped base top plate portion 536 arranged on the upper side, a base bottom plate portion 538 arranged on the lower side, a base top plate portion 536, and a base bottom plate portion. The outer peripheral wall 540 is connected mainly to the outer peripheral edge of the pachinko machine 1 and has a base outer peripheral wall part 540 that is open to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 34).

  An upper ball guide path 536a for guiding the game ball supplied from the accessory guide path 436 to the rear side of the effect accessory base 446 on the base top plate portion 536 of the effect accessory base 446, A circular drop port 536b is provided so as to pass through the base top plate portion 536 at a position off the upper ball guide path 536a so that a game ball can pass (see FIG. 31). The upper ball guide path 536a guides the game ball supplied from the left side of the base top plate portion 536 in the figure by the accessory guide path 436 in the circumferential direction with respect to the center of the base top plate portion 536. Then, it is guided to the rear side of the production-use accessory base 446.

  The drop opening 536b in the base top plate 536 is arranged at a position that substantially coincides with the front end of the long hole 462b in the accessory rotator 432 when the accessory rotator 432 is in an effect position where the figure can be visually recognized. Yes. The base top plate portion 536 is provided with a through hole 536c having a diameter slightly larger than the bearing groove 462a of the accessory rotating body main body 460 at the center (see FIG. 34).

  The base bottom plate portion 538 of the effect accessory base 446 is formed with a through hole 538a at the center thereof through which the cylindrical portion 524b of the rotary connecting member 524 protruding downward from the lower side of the accessory rotating body main body 460 can pass. (See FIG. 34).

  When the accessory rotator 432 is positioned at the effect position so that the figure 434 is visible on the base outer peripheral wall 540 of the effect accessory base 446 of the present example, the first induction of the accessory rotator 432 is performed. The first discharge receiving port 540a and the second discharge receiving port 540b are formed at positions corresponding to the portion 466a and the second guiding portion 466b so as to penetrate the base outer peripheral wall portion 540, and the first rotating member 432 of the first accessory rotating body 432 is formed. The game balls received in the first performance outlet 476 or the second performance outlet 480 are guided by the first guiding portion 466a or the second guiding portion 466b and pass through the first discharge receiving port 540a or the second discharge receiving port 540b. It is discharged to the back side of the outer peripheral wall portion 540, that is, to the rear side of the effect accessory 430.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30, the base outer peripheral wall portion 540 includes, on its rear side, a sphere discharge passage 542 that communicates with the upper sphere guide passage 536 a of the base top plate portion 536, a sphere discharge passage 542, Is provided with a production ball discharge flow path 544 that is a separate flow path and communicates with the first discharge reception opening 540a and the second discharge reception opening 540b. The ball discharge flow path 542 and the production ball discharge flow path 544 are formed in a groove shape whose rear side is opened, and when the production accessory 430 is attached to the back box 410, the rear side thereof is the back box 410. The game ball can be circulated well in the ball discharge channel 542 and the effect ball discharge channel 544.

  The sphere discharge channel 542 has a structure that is vertically divided into an upper sphere discharge channel 542a and a lower sphere discharge channel 542b so as to sandwich the effect sphere discharge channel 544, although illustration is omitted. The back box 410 has a through hole through which a game ball can pass at positions corresponding to the lower end of the upper ball discharge flow path 542a and the upper end of the lower ball discharge flow path 542b. The production-use accessory back sphere path upper member 424 arranged in the position returns the game balls discharged from the upper ball discharge flow path 542a to the outside of the back box 410 to the lower ball discharge flow path 542b (see FIG. 43). ). The ball discharge channel 542 is provided with a ball discharge channel sensor 546 for detecting a game ball passing through the channel.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the effect ball discharge channel 544 joins the game balls that have passed through the first discharge receiving port 540a and the second discharge receiving port 540b arranged at different positions in the vertical direction in the flow channel. The first effect ball discharge flow path sensor 548 that can detect only the game balls from the first discharge reception opening 540a, the first discharge reception opening 540a, and the first discharge reception opening 540a. 2 is provided with a second effect ball discharge flow path sensor 550 capable of detecting a game ball from the discharge outlet 540b.

  The first effect ball discharge channel sensor 548 and the second effect ball discharge channel sensor 550 within a predetermined time by the first effect ball discharge channel sensor 548 and the second effect ball discharge channel sensor 550, the game ball. When the passage of the game ball is detected, the game ball is received by the first performance outlet 476 and passes through the first discharge reception port 540a, and the passage of the game ball is detected only by the second performance ball discharge flow path sensor 550. In this case, the game ball is received by the second performance outlet 480 and passed through the second discharge reception port 540b. That is, it can be seen to which side the game balls supplied on the first effect rod 470 in the accessory rotating body 432 are distributed by the rotation of the first effect rod 470.

  The game balls that have circulated through the ball discharge flow path 542 and the effect ball discharge flow path 544 flow down to the effect accessory back ball path lower member 426 disposed on the lower side, and this effect accessory back ball path They merge in the lower member 426 and are discharged from the game board 5 to the outside (see FIG. 43).

  Further, the base outer peripheral wall portion 540 is provided with an attachment step portion 540c for holding the light source 454 on the inner surface of the right end portion thereof. By attaching the light source 454 to the attachment step portion 540c, the LEDs 456 of the light source 454 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction with the light emitting portion facing substantially frontward.

  The first closing member 450 and the second closing member 452 in the effect accessory 430 of this example are formed in a partial cylindrical surface shape so as to be substantially along the outer periphery of the effect accessory base 446. By covering and closing the opened front side of 446, the game balls that have entered the ball circulation space 460a of the accessory rotating body 432 are discharged from other than the first performance outlet 476 and the second performance outlet 480. This is to prevent this.

  The second closing member 452 includes a cylindrical portion 452a having a partially cylindrical surface shape, a flat portion 452b disposed on one end side in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 452a and extending outward in the left-right direction, and a cylindrical portion 452a opposite to the flat portion 452b. And a curved portion 452c that extends outward in the front-rear direction and has a center portion in front view curved outward.

  In addition, the second closing member 452 is a light transmission capable of guiding the light from the light source 454 disposed on the back side of the game board base 266 to the predetermined position on the front surface of the game board 5, which is provided in the effect accessory 430. A function as a member is provided. More specifically, the second closing member 452 is disposed on the rear surface side of the flat part 452b, and enters a light incident part 452d that makes the light from the light source 454 incident inside, and the light incident from the light incident part 452d on the cylindrical part 452a. A first light guiding portion 452e that guides the reflection so as to be guided along the circumferential direction, and a second light guide that guides the reflection of the light guided from the first light guiding portion 452e along the extending direction of the curved portion 452c. Part 452f and a light emitting part 452g for emitting light guided from the second light guiding part 452f to the front side through the curved part 452c (see FIG. 42).

  The second closing member 452 has a light incident portion 452d disposed at a portion where the cylindrical portion 452a and the flat portion 452b are in contact with each other, and a first light guiding portion 452e disposed on the front side of the light incident portion 452d. The first light guiding portion 452e is a flat surface formed in a substantially straight section so that the thickness of the cylindrical portion 452a decreases toward the curved portion 452c. The second light guiding portion 452f is a curved surface in which the rear corner where the cylindrical portion 452a and the curved portion 452c are in contact with each other is formed in a C-chamfer shape having a substantially linear cross section.

  According to the second closing member 452, the light emitted from the light source 454 is guided to the light radiating portion 452g on the front surface of the curved portion 452c through the inside thereof, and is emitted to the front side of the light radiating portion 452g, and the curved portion 452c. The decorative cover 386 (the right frame 370c of the frame-shaped decorative body 370) disposed in front of the frame irradiates and can be optically decorated.

  Further, according to the second closing member 452, the light is guided through the cylindrical portion 452a having a partial cylindrical surface shape along the circumferential direction and emitted from the light emitting portion 452g. The optical axis radiated from the light emitting portion 452g can be shifted or shifted in a predetermined direction, and the decorative cover 386 can be provided even if the light source 454 cannot be arranged immediately after the decorative cover 386 to be light-decorated. The light can be well guided and light decorated.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the distribution mechanism 438 attached to the upper part of the effect accessory base 446 extends and contracts (moves) in the front-rear direction (X direction and Y direction shown in FIG. 47) with respect to the pachinko machine 1. A solenoid 552 having a jar 552a, a game ball holding member 554 capable of holding only one game ball received from the effect opening / closing device 398 (see FIG. 47), and a plunger 552a and a game ball holding member 554 are connected. And a pin 558 for supporting the connecting member 556.

  The game ball holding member 554 in the distribution mechanism 438 includes a U-shaped storage recess 554a that is opened radially outwardly about the pin 558 and can store only one game ball, and a rear end portion of the storage recess 554a. And an extending portion 554b extending rearward in the circumferential direction around the pin 558. The outer periphery of the extending portion 554b in the game ball holding member 554 constitutes a part of the peripheral wall of the upper ball guiding path 536a.

  The distribution mechanism 438 can rotate the game ball holding member 554 around the pin 558 by driving the solenoid 552. Specifically, the accommodation recess 554a of the game ball holding member 554 is guided in the guiding direction of the accessory guide path 436. Can be rotated between an accommodation position that substantially coincides with the fall position where the accommodation recess 554a substantially coincides with the fall opening 536b of the base top plate portion 536. When the game ball holding member 554 is in the storage position, the storage recess 554a and the drop port 536b do not coincide with each other so that the game ball stored in the storage recess 554a does not fall into the drop port 536b. Further, when the game ball holding member 554 is in the fall position, the game ball from the accessory guiding path 436 is not accommodated in the accommodation recess 554a.

  When the game ball holding member 554 is in the storage position and the game ball is supplied from the accessory guide path 436, the distribution mechanism 438 stores only one game ball, and the game ball is stored in the storage recess 554a. Then, the other supplied game balls are guided to be discharged to the rear side of the effect accessory base 446 through the upper ball guide path 536a. Further, when the game ball is stored in the storage recess 554a and the solenoid 552 is driven to rotate the game ball holding member 554 from the storage position to the drop position, the game ball stored in the storage recess 554a is dropped. It can be dropped into 536b.

  The distribution mechanism 438 is provided with a protruding pin 560 that protrudes downward on the lower side thereof. The projecting pin 560 penetrates the through hole 536c formed in the center of the base top plate portion 536 by attaching the distribution mechanism 438 to the base top plate portion 536 of the effect accessory base 446. The projecting pin 560 extends to the lower side of the portion 536, and the accessory rotating body 432 (the accessory rotation) arranged on the lower side of the base top plate portion 536, that is, in the effect accessory base 446. The upper part of the accessory rotating body 432 can be rotatably supported by being inserted into the bearing groove 462a of the body main body 460).

[About the opening / closing device for production in the back unit]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing the effect opening / closing device from the left front. FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing the effect opening / closing device from the right front side. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the effect opening / closing device in an exploded manner.

  The effect opening / closing device 398 includes a lower casing 562 having an effect winning prize opening 398a, and an effect large winning opening opening / closing door 398b which is assembled on the upper side of the lower casing 562 and opens and closes the effect winning prize opening 398a. And an opening / closing drive mechanism 566 that is held by the cooperation of the upper casing 564 and the lower casing 562 and that drives the opening / closing door 398b for effect to open and close.

  The lower casing 562 is configured such that the upper side is opened, and a discharge port 562a for discharging the game ball from the production large winning port 398a is formed at the bottom. The stage winning prize opening / closing door 398b has a support portion 398ba extending rearward and has a T-shape in plan view as a whole, and a connection port 398bb for connecting to the opening / closing drive mechanism 566 is formed in the support portion. ing.

  The opening / closing drive mechanism 566 moves the movement of the production opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568 having a plunger 568a capable of moving back and forth in the vertical direction and the plunger 568a driven in the vertical direction by the production opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568 in the forward / backward direction. And a drive transmission member 570 that converts the movement of the direction into the direction large opening / closing door 398b for production in the front-rear direction. The plunger 568a is disposed so as to advance and retract from the lower side of the effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568.

  More specifically, the drive transmission member 570 is engaged with the distal end of the plunger 568a of the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568 for production and extends substantially in the horizontal direction, and slides in the forward / backward direction of the plunger 568a and the opening / closing door 398b for production. A first piece 570b rotatable around a support shaft 570a orthogonal to any of the directions, and a connecting port 398bb of a large-award winning prize opening / closing door 398b for production that rotates integrally with the first piece 570b and extends substantially upward from the support shaft 570a. And a second piece 570c inserted and engaged therein.

  Also, the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided with an effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 below the discharge port 562a of the lower casing 562, and the effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 causes the effect opening / closing device count port 398a. It is possible to detect game balls that won a prize.

  In this stage opening / closing device 398, only the upper side of the stage big winning opening 398a can be closed by the stage large winning opening opening / closing door 398b, and the front side is always open. A glass plate attached to the window frame 39 of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged immediately before (not shown in the figure), and a game ball does not enter the stage prize winning opening 398a from the opened front side. It is like that.

  Further, the effect opening / closing device 398 can prevent the ball clogging by holding the game ball between the window frame 39 and the glass plate when the effect large prize opening opening / closing door 398b is in the closed position. The opening and closing force is weakened.

[About the flow of game balls from the opening / closing device for production to the distribution mechanism]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the effect opening / closing device, the accessory guide path, the distribution mechanism, and the effect accessory as viewed from the upper left. 48 to 50 are plan views of the accessory guide path, the distribution mechanism, and the effect accessory, and are diagrams illustrating a manner in which game balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism.

  In this example, the game balls received from the effect opening / closing device 398 are behind the game board 5 and the game balls guided to the effect actor 430 by the distribution mechanism 438 provided above the effect actor 430. It will be distributed to game balls to be discharged. In this example, before the game ball can be received by the effect opening / closing device 398, the accessory rotator 432 is rotated to an effect position where the figure 434 inside the effect accessory 430 can be visually recognized by the player. It has become.

  First, when a game ball is received in the effect large winning opening 398a of the effect opening / closing device 398, the game ball is discharged from the discharge port 562a of the lower casing 562 and at the same time is detected by the effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 to confirm the winning. The game ball downstream from here becomes a game ball (so-called dead ball) that is not related to game control that is advantageous to the player, such as payout of the game ball and generation control of advantageous game states such as big hit games.

  The game ball detected by the effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 is supplied to the accessory guide path 436 and is guided in the direction of the effect accessory 430. As shown in the figure, the accessory guide path 436 guides the game ball from the effect opening / closing device 398 to the right side in the left-right direction for a predetermined distance, then guides the game ball to the rear side at a substantially right angle, and The game ball is guided toward the upper part of the effect accessory 430 obliquely from behind by bending the guidance direction of the game ball again.

  As described above, since the accessory guiding path 436 has a plurality of corners, the circulation speed of the game ball is attenuated at each corner, and the speed at which the game ball flows can be prevented from increasing. The game balls that circulate through the accessory guide path 436 can be easily seen, and the movement of the game balls can be enjoyed.

  Then, the game ball guided by the accessory guide path 436 first reaches the distribution mechanism 438. In the distribution mechanism 438, the plunger 552a of the solenoid 552 is located on the X direction side (accommodating position) when in the normal state (that is, the demagnetized state). Then, the game ball that has rolled on the accessory guide path 436 toward the distribution mechanism 438 is accommodated and held in the accommodation recess 554a of the game ball holding member 554 (see FIG. 48).

  When one game ball is held by the game ball holding member 554, the game ball that subsequently rolls on the accessory guiding path 436 cannot be stored and held by the storage recess 554a of the game ball holding member 554. The ball passes through the ball guide path 536a and is discharged to the rear side (Y direction side in the figure) of the game board 5 (see FIG. 49).

  By the way, the game balls are supplied to the upper ball guide path 536a from the oblique rear to the front by the accessory guide path 436, so that the inertial force of the game ball is on the front side of the upper ball guide path 536a, that is, the game ball. The holding member 554 faces the housing recess 554a, so that the game ball can be easily housed in the housing recess 554a.

  When the solenoid 552 is excited in a state where the game ball is accommodated in the accommodation recess 554a, the plunger 552a moves in the Y direction. At this time, the connecting member 556 rotates counterclockwise (α direction in the figure) using the pin 558 as a fulcrum. The game ball holding member 554 rotates counterclockwise as the connecting member 556 rotates counterclockwise. A drop opening 536b through which a game ball can fall is formed on the upper surface of the accessory rotating body 432 of the effect accessory 430. When the solenoid 552 is excited and the game ball holding member 554 rotates counterclockwise with the connecting member 556 as a fulcrum, the game ball housed and held in the housing recess 554a of the game ball holding member 554 is played from the drop port 536b. It falls into the rotating body 432 (see FIG. 50).

  The game ball that has fallen into the drop opening 536b enters the ball circulation space 460a of the accessory rotator 432. At this time, the accessory rotator 432 rotates the figure 434 to a visual effect position. In addition, since the drop opening 536b and the elongated hole 462b of the accessory rotating body 432 coincide with each other, it is possible to enter the accessory rotating body 432 from the dropping opening 536b. Note that the first effect rod 470 is provided after the game ball from the drop port 536b is once sent to the rear side by the elongated hole 462b of the top plate portion 462 of the accessory rotating body 460 and the covering portion 468b of the ball discharge member 468. (See FIG. 40).

  Note that if the solenoid 552 is in a demagnetized state, the game ball held by the game ball holding member 554 is held at a position shifted from the drop opening 536b. It does not fall into the rotating body 432.

  In this way, even if there are a plurality of game balls won in the effect opening / closing device 398, only one game ball is guided into the effect accessory 430 by the distribution mechanism 438. As a result, the effect accessory 430 can produce an effect using one game ball.

[Control structure of main board and peripheral board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the main board. FIG. 52 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly shows the configuration around the peripheral substrate. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  The control of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 600 (shown in FIG. 51) and a group of peripheral boards 660 (shown in FIG. 52). The group of main boards 600 controls gaming operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral boards 660 has stage operations (issue decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display and decoration body). Control).

  As shown in FIG. 51, the main board 600 includes a main control board 131 and a payout control board 197. The main control board 131 includes a CPU 602 as a central processing unit, a ROM 604 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 606 as a readable / writable memory.

  The CPU 602 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 604, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 660 and the payout control board 197.

  The ROM 604 temporarily stores various data generated in various processes executed by the main control board 131 and information such as input signals.

  The main board 600 is connected to the power supply board 195 via the power supply relay terminal plate 199, and operating power is supplied from the power supply board 195.

  The input interface of the main control board 131 includes a first start port sensor 644 that detects a winning state for the first start port 390, a second start port sensor 646 that detects a winning state for the second start port 392, A third start port sensor 648 for detecting a winning state at the 3 start port 394 and an all winning port winning number detection sensor 650 for counting the number of winnings for all the winning ports are connected.

  In addition, the input interface of the main control board 131 indicates that the game ball has won the gate sensor 630 for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 402 and the general winning opening 404 through the panel relay terminal plate 624. A general winning opening sensor 632 to be detected is connected.

  Furthermore, an effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 is connected to the input interface of the main control board 131 via an effect opening / closing device relay terminal plate 626 connected to the panel relay terminal plate 624 and connected to the panel relay terminal plate 624. The jackpot game switchgear count sensor 640 is connected via the jackpot game switchgear relay terminal plate 628.

  Detection signals from the above sensors are input to the main control board 131. Also connected to the input interface of the main control board 131 are an inner frame opening switch 620 for detecting the opening state of the front frame body 11 and a door opening switch 622 for detecting the opening state of the front frame 4.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display board 636 is connected to the output interface of the panel relay terminal board 624 via a symbol limiting resistor board 634, and the normal symbol display 82, the first symbol is displayed from the main control board 131. A drive signal can be output to the special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86.

  In addition, an output opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568 for driving an effect large winning opening / closing door 398b of the effect opening / closing device 398 is connected to the output interface of the effect opening / closing device relay terminal board 626, and the main control board 131 is connected. Therefore, these drive signals are output.

  Further, the jackpot game opening / closing device relay terminal plate 628 has an output interface with a normal electric combination solenoid 638 for driving the pair of movable pieces 396 of the third start port 394 and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400. A big hit game opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 642 for driving the mouth opening / closing door 400b is connected, and these drive signals are outputted from the main control board 131.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 197 includes a CPU 608 as a central processing unit, a ROM 610 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 612 as a readable / writable memory.

  The payout control board 197 processes the command signal input from the main control board 131 and outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 170 and the launch motor 192 connected to the launch control board 616. Thereby, the ball payout device 170 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the firing motor 192 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  Note that bi-directional communication is performed between the main control board 131 and the payout control board 197 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 131 transmits a prize ball command, it responds to this. An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 197 to the main control board 131.

  The payout control board 197 is also connected with a lower tray full tank switch 614 that detects that the game balls stored in the lower tray 31 are full. “Please remove from the dish 31” is notified.

  Further, an external terminal board 618 is connected to the main control board 131 and the payout control board 197, and the winning statuses of the start ports 390, 392, 394 and the opening / closing devices 398, 400, normal symbols / special symbols are displayed. Various information such as the game state based on the fluctuating state and the lottery result is output to a hall computer or the like provided in the game facility.

  On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 660 includes a peripheral control substrate 662 and a display device control substrate 116 as shown in FIG. Note that only one-way communication is performed between the input / output interface and the input interface between the main control board 131 and the peripheral control board 662, and the main control board 131 to the peripheral control board 662. The command is sent to, but the reverse is not done. The power for operation is also supplied from the power supply board 195 to the peripheral board 660 via the power supply relay terminal plate 199.

  The peripheral control board 662 also has electronic components such as a CPU 664, a ROM 666, and a RAM 668, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 662 is provided with a ROM 672 that stores a sound source that is the basis of sound and music, and a sound source IC 670 that outputs sound and music according to the production content based on the sound source stored in the ROM 672. It has been.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 662 and the display device control board 116 with each input / output interface.

  On the other hand, a liquid crystal display (LCD) as an effect display device 115 is connected to the display device control board 116, and the display device control board 116 processes a command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 662, A drive signal is output to the effect display device 115. More specifically, the display device control board 116 includes a CPU 678, a RAM 680, a ROM 682, a VDP 684, and an image ROM 686.

  The CPU 678 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 662 via the input / output interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command to control the VDP 684. The RAM 680 provides a work area for the CPU 678 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 682 holds a program for the CPU 678 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 684 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 115. A register is provided in the VDP 684, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 684, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 678 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode in the effect display device 115 can be changed variously. The image ROM 686 is a nonvolatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  Further, a lamp driving board 688 and a frame decoration relay terminal board 674 are connected to the peripheral control board 662. Further, a center decoration drive unit relay terminal plate 694 is connected to the lamp drive board 688 as a relay terminal plate. Further, a rotating body lower substrate 518 is connected to the center decoration driving unit relay terminal plate 694.

  In the input interface of the rotating body lower substrate 518, the game ball used for the production (that is, the game ball that has rolled the first production basket 470) is either the first performance exit 476 or the second performance exit 480. A ball sorter motor sensor 500 for detecting whether or not it has been received is connected. Also connected to the output interface of the rotating body lower substrate 518 are a ball sorting motor 484 that repeatedly rotates the support shaft 474 clockwise and counterclockwise, and a rotating LED substrate 696 on which LEDs are arranged as electrical decorations. Has been. The rotating part LED substrate 696 is the rotating body upper substrate 514 and the light source substrate 512.

  The output interface of the lamp driving board 688 includes a panel decoration lamp 690, a center decoration lamp 304, a rotation motor 526 for rotating the effect accessory 430, and a rotation unit for detecting the rotation position of the effect accessory 430. A motor sensor 532 is connected. Thereby, the lamp drive board 688 can switch the lighting state of each of these lamps, and can detect the rotation operation and the rotation position of the effect accessory 430. Further, a discharge port detection sensor 692 for detecting a game ball discharged to the rear side of the game board 5 is connected to the input interface of the lamp drive board 688. The discharge port detection sensor 692 includes a ball discharge channel sensor 546, a first effect ball discharge channel sensor 548, and a second effect ball discharge channel sensor 550.

  The frame decoration relay terminal board 674 connected to the peripheral control board 662 is connected to the speakers 18, 57 connected to the front frame 4, the effect selection switch 60, the frame decoration lamp 676, and the like. In 662, the effect mode output to the effect display device 115 is switched based on the operation state of the effect selection switch 60, and a drive signal is output to the speakers 18, 57 and the frame decoration lamp 676.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a functional block diagram schematically showing a functional configuration of the peripheral control board in the main control board and the peripheral board.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the main control board 131 includes first special symbol lottery means 700, first special symbol display control means 802, first special symbol hold display control means 730, and first special symbol hold counter 703. Second special symbol lottery means 710, second special symbol display control means 804, second special symbol hold display control means 732, second special symbol hold counter 713, hold order storage means 790, normal symbol Lottery means 720, jackpot game execution means 748, small hit game execution means 746, opening / closing operation control means 744, probability variation game execution means 740, normal symbol display control means 806, normal symbol hold display control means 734 The normal symbol holding counter 723, the short time game execution means 742, the third start port opening / closing control means 728, and the command transmission means 749 are provided.

  The first special symbol lottery means 700 extracts a random number by the first special symbol determination random number extracting means 702 when a game ball wins the first starting opening 390 and is detected by the first starting opening sensor 644. The extracted random numbers are held up to a first predetermined number (for example, 4) by the holding order storage unit 790. When the hold by the hold order storage unit 790 is released, the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 704 determines whether or not the long win, short win or small win is won. The determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 is the normal symbol normal time determination table stored in the ROM 604 and the random value acquired by the first special symbol determination random number extraction means 702 in the normal gaming state. 706, and in the probability variation gaming state, based on the random number value obtained by the first special symbol per-determination random number extracting means 702 and the special symbol probability variation per-time determination table 708 stored in the ROM 604. Done.

  In the present embodiment, “long hit” is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is executed for 15 rounds by the long hit game executing means 748a, and “short hit” is a short hit game executing means 748b. Is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is executed for two rounds. The “small hit” is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is executed twice by the small hit game execution means 746. Note that the operation mode of the opening / closing device 397 is the same for the short win and the small hit, but when the short win is won, the probability variation game execution means 740 activates the probability variation function (that is, the probability variation game state is However, the probability variation function does not work when winning a small hit.

  By the way, when the winning per winning is won, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is continuously executed for 15 rounds, whereby a long winning game in which a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out is performed. In addition, when winning a short win, a short win game is performed in which the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is continuously executed for two rounds. After the short hit game ends, a probability change game state by the probability change game execution means 740 occurs.

  The second special symbol lottery means 710 receives the second special symbol when the game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 and is detected by the second starting port sensor 646 or the third starting port sensor 648. A random number is extracted by the hit determination random number extraction means 712. The extracted random number is held by the second special symbol holding counter 713 up to a second predetermined number (for example, four). Then, when the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is released, it is determined by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 whether or not the long win, short win or small win is won. The determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a normal symbol normal time determination table stored in the ROM 604 and the random number value acquired by the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712 in the normal gaming state. 706, and in the probability variation gaming state, based on the random number value obtained by the second special symbol per-determination random number extracting means 712 and the special symbol probability variation per-time determination table 708 stored in the ROM 604. Done.

  The order in which the game balls are detected by the first start port sensor 644, the second start port sensor 646, and the third start port sensor 648 is stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, which will be described later, by the holding order storage means 790. Then, the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 perform lottery one by one based on the order stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061. In other words, based on the order stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 determines that the long winning, short winning or small winning is won. It is determined one by one. In addition, the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 is the first special symbol hold counter 703 or the second special symbol when a predetermined release condition is established, for example, a variation condition is established. This is done by releasing the hold by the hold counter 713.

  The determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 is displayed on the first special symbol display 84 by the first special symbol display control unit 802. The number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 88 by the first special symbol hold display control means 730.

  The determination result by the second special symbol determination unit 714 is displayed on the second special symbol display 86 by the second special symbol display control unit 804. Further, the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is displayed on the second special symbol hold display 90 by the second special symbol hold display control means 732.

  The big hit game execution means 748 (the long hit game execution means 748a and the short hit game execution means 748b) and the small hit game execution means 746 are determined based on the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Based on the jackpot game or the jackpot game. Specifically, when it is determined that the long win is won, the long hit game executing means 748a executes the long win game, and when it is determined that the short win is determined, the short win game executing means 748b When it is determined that it is determined that the small hitting game is won, the small hitting game execution means 746 executes the small hitting game. In the present embodiment, “long win and short win” are collectively referred to as “big hit”, and “long win game and short win game” are collectively referred to as “big hit game”.

  In the present embodiment, the long hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 and the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 are performed over a total of 15 rounds. Specifically, after the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 744 for two rounds, the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is continued by the opening / closing operation control means 744 for 12 rounds, and continuously. And then the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed again by the opening / closing operation control means 744 for only one round. The short hit game is a game in which only the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 744 for two rounds, and the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is not performed. The small hit game is a game in which only the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed twice by the opening / closing operation control means 744.

  As described above, when the long hit game is executed, the number of opening / closing operations of the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is executed more than the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398, and the short hit game and the small hit game are executed. The number of opening / closing operations of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed more than the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400.

  The opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed by operating the effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568 by the opening / closing operation control means 744, and the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 744. This is done by operating a jackpot game opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 642.

  Specifically, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a long win, the opening / closing operation control means 744 performs the opening / closing device for effects up to two rounds. The opening / closing solenoid 568 is actuated to open / close the effect large prize opening opening / closing door 398b. From the 3rd round to the 14th round, the opening / closing operation control means 744 operates the jackpot gaming opening / closing solenoid 642 to open / close the jackpot gaming big prize opening / closing door 400b. Further, only for the 15th round, the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568 for the effect is operated by the opening / closing operation control means 744, and the opening / closing door 398b for the effect is opened / closed. On the other hand, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol determination unit 704 and the second special symbol determination unit 714 is short hit, the opening / closing operation control unit 744 operates the effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568, The operation for opening and closing the large winning opening / closing door 398b for performance is performed only for two rounds.

  When a game ball wins the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, the number of winning balls is counted by the effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device count sensor 640. In addition, when a game ball wins the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, the winning game ball is detected by the effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device count sensor 640. In response, a game ball is paid out as a prize ball by the ball payout device 170.

  If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a small hit, the opening / closing operation control means 744 causes the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid for effects to be generated. 568 is operated to open and close the big winning game opening / closing door 400b twice.

  In the present embodiment, opening and closing of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed depending on whether the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is short win or small win. The operation mode is the same. However, in the normal gaming state (that is, any one of the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, and the short-time gaming state), if the short winning game is won, the gaming state after the short winning game is over is a big hit However, in the case of winning a small hit, the gaming state after the small winning game is finished does not change (that is, the normal gaming state remains). Therefore, when the opening / closing operation of the production grand prize opening / closing door 398b is performed two rounds or twice, it is difficult for the player to determine whether it is short win or small hit, The probability of winning a jackpot differs between the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710. Thereby, the player cannot discriminate whether the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state or the normal gaming state, and the interest is enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing operation processing of the effect opening / closing device 398 (specifically, the effect opening / closing device) when the long hit game is executed, when the short hit game is executed, and when the small hit game is executed The number of open / close operations 398) is shared. Thereby, the data amount of the ROM 604 of the main control board 131 can be reduced. In particular, when the short hit game is executed and when the small hit game is executed, the opening / closing time of the effect opening / closing device 398 is also shared, so that the tables of the short hit game and the small hit game are shared. As a result, the data amount of the ROM 604 can be reduced.

  Here, “round” means that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses and a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) of game balls wins when a long winning game and a short winning game are executed. It means a unit in which the opening / closing device for effect 398 or the opening / closing device for jackpot game 400 is opened / closed by satisfying any of the conditions. Therefore, the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 when the small hit game is being executed is not referred to as “round”. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 per round in the short hit game is much longer than the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 and the big hit game opening / closing device 400 per round in the long hit game. It is a short time. Note that the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 per time in the small hit game is substantially the same as the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 per round in the short hit game.

  The probability variation game execution means 740 increases the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 in the game after the long hit game or short hit game is executed. Execute. Specifically, the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol validity determination unit 704 and the second special symbol validity determination unit 714 is performed based on the special symbol probability change time determination table 708, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, “probability change game” means that the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 determine whether or not the special symbol probability change time determination table 708 and special symbol probability change time, respectively. It means a game played based on the hit determination table 708. A gaming state in which a probability variation game is being performed is referred to as a “probability variation gaming state”. Here, the special symbol probability change per hour determination table 708 is set to have a higher probability of winning per long and short than the special symbol normal per hour determination table 706.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the long winning game is executed by the first special symbol determination unit 704 or the second special symbol determination unit 714, for example, after the long winning game is executed, for example, one half. If the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 determines that the short win game is executed, the probability change will occur with a probability of 100%. It becomes a gaming state. On the other hand, when it is determined that a small hit is made by the first special symbol success / failure determining means 704 or the second special symbol appropriate / bad determination means 714, the game state is changed after the small hit game executing means 746 is executed. There is nothing.

  When the game ball passes through the passing gate 402 and is detected by the gate sensor 630, the normal symbol lottery means 720 extracts random numbers by the normal symbol per-determination random number extracting means 722. The extracted random numbers are held up to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4) by the normal symbol hold counter 723. When the normal symbol hold counter 723 releases the hold, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment means 724 determines whether or not the hold is made. The determination by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 is based on the random number value acquired by the random number extraction means for normal symbol determination 722 and the normal symbol normal time determination table 726 stored in the ROM 604 in the normal gaming state. If it is in the short-time gaming state, it is performed based on the random number value obtained by the random number extraction means 722 for determining the normal symbol per symbol and the table 727 for determining the normal symbol per short time stored in the ROM 604.

  The normal symbol display control means 806 displays the determination result by the normal symbol appropriateness determination unit 724 on the normal symbol display unit 82. Further, the number of holds by the normal symbol hold counter 723 is displayed on the normal symbol hold display 92 by the normal symbol hold display control means 734.

  The short time game executing means 742 executes the short time game for shortening the lottery time in the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720. In the probability variation game state, a time-short game by the time-short game execution unit 742 may be performed together with the probability variation game by the probability variation game execution unit 740.

  In the present embodiment, the “short-time gaming state” means a gaming state in which the normal symbol winning / non-winning determination unit 724 determines whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate based on the normal symbol short-time / hit determination table 727. Here, the normal symbol time per hour determination table 727 is set so that the lottery time is shorter than the normal symbol normal time per hour determination table 726. It should be noted that the normal symbol normal hour determination table 726 and the normal symbol short time determination table 727 both have a winning probability set as high as 90%, for example. Accordingly, when the normal symbol determination unit 724 determines whether the normal symbol is appropriate or not based on the normal symbol short-time hit determination table 727, the pair of movable pieces 396 are frequently opened and closed, and the third start port 394 is opened and closed. It becomes easy to win a game ball. When a game ball wins at the third start port 394, the game ball is paid out by the ball payout device 170, so that it is possible to play the game without reducing the game balls as much as possible during the short-time game state.

  Here, the lottery in the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 will be described with reference to Tables 1 and 2. Table 1 is a table showing winning probabilities and random numbers. Table 2 is a table for determining the type of jackpot game when the jackpot is won.

  As shown in Table 1, one of the 631 random numbers from 0 to 630 is extracted by the random number extracting means 702 for determination per first special symbol and the random number extracting means 712 for determination per second special symbol. First, it is determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 based on Table 1 whether or not the extracted random number value is won. Specifically, first, the gaming state is determined. If the gaming state is the normal gaming state, 7 and 317 are random numbers, and if the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, 7, 37, 67, 97, 127, 157. , 187, 217, 247, 277, 307, 337, 367, 397, 427, 457, 487, 517, 547, 577 are jackpot random numbers. Note that the same table is used according to the gaming state in the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the hit determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. That is, when the determination of winning by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 is performed using the special symbol probability change per-time determination table 708, the determination of winning by the second special symbol probability change determination means 714 is also performed at the time of special symbol probability change. When the winning determination table 708 is used and the winning determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 is performed using the first special symbol normal time winning determination table 706, the second special symbol determination determination is made. The determination of winning by means 714 is also performed using the first special symbol normal hour determination table 706.

  Then, if it is determined that the extracted random number is a jackpot random number, the type of jackpot is determined based on Table 2. A jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot is played. The types of jackpots include long hits where the jackpot game is long and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out, and short hits where the jackpot game is short. In the long win, the per jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as "long win game" corresponding to the long win) is a "probable change short short length" in which both the probabilistic gaming state and the short-time gaming state occur, There is a “ordinary long hit” in which only the short-time gaming state occurs (the probability variation gaming state does not occur) after the end of the long hitting game. For short wins, after the jackpot game (hereinafter, the jackpot game corresponding to the short win is referred to as “short win game”), only a probable game state occurs (no short-time game state occurs). In addition, there is “probability short shortening short chance” in which both a probability change gaming state and a time saving gaming state occur after the short winning game ends.

  On the other hand, if the random number extracted by the first special symbol determination random number extraction means 702 and the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712 is not a winning random number, whether or not a small hit is won is displayed. 1 is determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Specifically, regardless of the gaming state, 16, 92, 133, 321, 465, 501, 568, and 610 are small random numbers. When it is determined that the extracted random number is a small hit random number, the small hit game is executed by the small hit game execution means 746. As described above, according to Table 1, the winning probability for jackpot is 2/631, and the winning probability for jackpot is 8/631.

  In this way, even if the jackpot is not won, it can be expected to win the jackpot. In addition, since the probability of winning the jackpot is set higher than the probability of winning the jackpot, every time a player wins the jackpot, the player always feels that he has won the jackpot. It can have, and can suppress the fall of interest. Furthermore, since the player will continue to play the game, it will also benefit the hall where the operating rate of the pachinko machine is improved. In addition, in response to the random numbers extracted by the first special symbol determination random number extracting means 702 or the second special symbol determination random number extracting means 712, the big win winning is determined prior to the small winning winning determination. The In other words, if the winning of the small win is first, the winning determination of the big win will not be performed if the winning of the small win is made, but the determination of the big win is made prior to the determination of the small win winning as in this embodiment. If the winning is determined, the jackpot winning is always performed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the determination of the big win is made only when the big win is not won, the big win and the small win do not overlap. If the big win and the small win are duplicated, it will be necessary to decide which one will be the winner and it will be complicated in terms of control, but the big win was not won as in this embodiment. The control load can be reduced by making a determination of winning a small hit only occasionally. In addition, two lottery opportunities for jackpot determination and small hit determination are given, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the tables used for the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 do not necessarily need to be the same table. The first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 704 Different tables may be used for each of the determination units 714. Even in such a case, if the probability variation gaming state, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 both use the probability variation gaming state table, and the normal gaming state For example, it is preferable that a table for a normal gaming state is used for both the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Thereby, even if the starting opening where a game ball wins is different, the same gaming state is obtained, so that the game is not complicated, and consequently, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the determination result of the first special symbol determination unit 704, the second special symbol determination unit 714, and the normal symbol determination unit 724 does not necessarily include a deviation. For example, if the small hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed for a very short time, if the big hit is not won, all may be won.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot has been won, and when determining whether or not the jackpot is won when the jackpot is not won, a remarkable effect is brought about. In addition, it may be drawn in a lump on whether or not the big win and the small win are won.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is won per short time for the probable change time and when winning for the short time for the probable change time, the short time for the probable change is given. The gaming state after the long winning game and the short winning game with the probability change time is finished becomes the probability changing game state. It can be understood from the display mode on the effect display device 115 that the gaming state at this time is the probability changing game state. On the other hand, when the normal short win is won, the game state after the normal short win game ends becomes the probability change game state, but the display on the effect display device 115 indicates that the game state at this time is the probability change game state. It cannot be grasped from the aspect. That is, a display mode in which the display mode displayed on the effect display device 115 in the probability-changing game state after the normal short hit game ends and the display mode displayed on the effect display device 115 in the normal game state are similar to each other. It becomes. Here, the “similar display mode” may be the same or similar so that the player cannot grasp whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the probability-changing gaming state.

  The third start opening / closing control means 728 operates the normal electric accessory solenoid 638 to open / close the pair of movable pieces 396 when the lottery result determined by the normal symbol determination unit 724 is correct. When the pair of movable pieces 396 opens and closes, it becomes easy for a game ball to win a prize at the third start port 394. When the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the closed state, it is impossible to win a game ball in the third start port 394, or a game ball win in the third start port 394 is the first start. Although it is more difficult than winning a game ball to the mouth 390 and the second starting port 392, when the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the open state, the winning of the game ball to the third starting port 394 is as follows. It becomes easier than winning a game ball to the start port 390 and the second start port 392. In the present embodiment, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 is configured more difficult than the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390.

  The command transmission means 749 transmits the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure judgment means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure judgment means 714 and information related to the lottery result to the peripheral board 660. The “information related to the lottery result” corresponds to an effect time or the like performed in the effect display device 115.

  The peripheral control board 662 includes command receiving means 750, effect lottery means 760, effect accessory operation executing means 762, and effect opening / closing device state display control means 764.

  The command receiving unit 750 receives the lottery result and information related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 131 by the first special symbol acceptability judging unit 704 or the second special symbol acceptability judging unit 714.

  The effect lottery means 760 determines by lottery whether or not the effect by the effect item 430 is performed. As a result of the lottery by the effect lottery means 760, when it is determined that the effect by the effector 430 is to be performed, the ball sorter motor 484 is operated via the lamp drive board 688 and the center decoration drive part relay terminal plate 694. The effect by the effect-use accessory 430 is executed. However, since the effect by the effect item 430 is performed using the game ball won in the effect opening / closing device 398, such an effect is not performed when the game ball is not won in the effect opening / closing device 398. . It should be noted that the effect lottery means 760 determines by lottery whether or not an effect by the emblem accessory 385 is performed. As a result of the lottery by the effect lottery means 760, when it is determined that the effect by the emblem accessory 385 is to be performed, the light source 380 is operated via the lamp driving board 688 and the panel decoration lamp 690, and the effect by the emblem accessory 385 is executed. To do.

  The effect accessory operation executing means 762 controls the effect agent 430 (and the emblem accessory 385) via the lamp driving substrate 688, such as rotational driving of the effect agent 430.

  The effect opening / closing device state display control means 764 controls the display mode of the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 via the lamp driving board 688. Specifically, when the opening / closing operation control means 744 opens and closes the effect big prize opening / closing door 398b by operating the jackpot gaming opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 642, such information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 662 by the command transmission means 749. Sent to. Information transmitted from the command transmission unit 749 to the peripheral control board 662 is received by the command reception unit 750.

  When the command receiving means 750 receives information related to the opening / closing operation of the effect large prize opening opening / closing door 398b, the effect opening / closing apparatus state display control means 764 causes the effect opening / closing apparatus state display lamp 651 via the lamp driving board 688. Control the display mode.

  In the present embodiment, when the command transmission unit 749 transmits information indicating that the effect opening / closing device 398 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the operation of the effect large winning opening / closing door 398b, the peripheral control board 662 transmits the information. Then, the display control is performed so that the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 is displayed in green. When information indicating that the effect opening / closing device 398 has been changed from the open state to the closed state by the operation of the effect grand prize opening / closing door 398b is transmitted to the peripheral control board 662 by the command transmitting means 749, the effect opening / closing is performed. Display control is performed so that the device status display lamp 651 displays red. That is, display control is performed in green if the stage performance prize opening opening / closing door 398b is in the open state and red in the closed state.

  As described above, the effect opening / closing device state display control means 764 causes the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 when the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened by the opening / closing operation control means 744 and when it is closed. Display control is performed in different display modes. Thereby, since the opening / closing state of the effect opening / closing device 398 can be grasped, the player cannot grasp that the effect opening / closing device 398 is open even though the effect opening / closing device 398 is open, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the inability to aim the game ball at the effect opening / closing device 398.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, during the jackpot game, there are cases where the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 opens and closes and the effect opening / closing device 398 opens and closes, and it is understood which game ball should be won. hard. In particular, in the case where a stage opening / closing device 398 is provided in addition to the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 provided conventionally, the player wins a game ball in the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 during the jackpot gaming. Try to let them. Therefore, when the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened instead of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, the player feels confused, cannot know where to win the game ball, and is less interesting. In addition, an opening / closing device for production 398 is provided on the upstream side of the production display device 115 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, and further, the direction in which the production prize winning opening / closing door 398b intersects the board surface of the game board 5 is provided. When it is movable, it is difficult for the player to grasp the operation of the production large prize opening opening / closing door 398b. Therefore, a situation may occur in which a game ball is missed by winning the effect opening / closing device 398 even though the effect opening / closing device 398 is in an open state. Accordingly, the display opening / closing device 398 is opened when the display opening / closing device status display lamp 651 is controlled to be displayed in different display modes when the display opening / closing device 398 is open and when it is closed. In spite of the fact, it is possible to avoid the game opening / closing device 398 from winning a game ball and to prevent a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect opening / closing device status display lamp 651 is provided so as to be displayed in the effect opening / closing device 398, the player only has to hit a game ball aiming at a place emitting green light. Thus, even if the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided in a place where it is difficult to grasp the position, such as above the effect display device 115 as in the present embodiment, the player can aim the game ball at any place. Since it is possible to grasp whether or not it is necessary to enter, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that “the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 is provided so as to be displayed in the effect opening / closing device 398” means that the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 is provided in the effect opening / closing device 398. For example, as in the present embodiment, the back wall in the production opening / closing device 398 is a transparent member, and the inside of the production opening / closing device 398 is lit from behind the transparent member. Also good. That is, it is only necessary that the inside of the effect opening / closing device 398 can be displayed. Further, “within the effect opening / closing device 398” means a region on the downstream side of the effect large prize opening opening / closing door 398b in the flow direction of the game ball.

  Further, since an opening is formed on the front side of the stage winning prize opening 398a when viewed from the player, a game ball received in the stage winning prize opening 398a is placed on a glass plate attached to the window frame 39. Can be visually recognized. Thereby, it can be ascertained that the game ball has been received in the stage prize winning opening 398a. As described above, the combination of the fact that it is possible to grasp that the game ball can be received in the stage winning prize opening 398a and the fact that the game ball can be received in the stage prize winning opening 398a can be used. Even if the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided separately from the device 400 and the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened in place of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the display opening / closing device status display lamp 651 is displayed in green when the display opening / closing device 398 is in the open state, and is displayed in red when the display opening / closing device 398 is in the closed state. However, the mode is not limited as long as it is possible to grasp whether the production opening / closing device 398 is in the open state or the closed state. For example, the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 may be controlled to be turned off when the effect opening / closing device 398 is in a closed state, and may be controlled to be turned on when the effect opening / closing device 398 is in an open state.

[About the operation of the director for the production]
FIG. 54A, which will be described based on FIGS. 52 to 54, is a front view showing the internal configuration of the accessory container of the effect for the effect, and the first effect 樋 is directed toward the first performance exit. It is a figure which shows being inclined below. FIG. 54 (b) is a front view showing the internal structure of the accessory container of the effect accessory, and shows that the first effect 樋 is inclined downward toward the second effect 樋 induction port. FIG.

  First, in the lamp driving board 688, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or reset, it is confirmed whether or not a detection signal of the rotary motor sensor 532 that detects the rotation position of the effect accessory 430 is received. If there is no detection signal from the rotation unit motor sensor 532, the effect accessory 430 is driven to rotate at a position where the inside of the effect rotating body 432 of the effect accessory 430 cannot be visually recognized. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, the “diva legend” appears in front of the production role 430.

  Thereafter, in accordance with the change in the gaming state, a control command for effecting rotational drive control of the effect accessory 430 from the peripheral control board 662 (specifically, the effect accessory action execution means 762) to the lamp drive board 688 is issued. When transmitted, the lamp driving board 688 drives the rotating part motor 526 so that the figure 434 inside the accessory rotating body 432 of the effect accessory 430 can be seen as shown in FIG. The effect accessory 430 is rotated. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the figure 434 arranged inside the accessory rotating body 432 of the effect accessory 430. When the game ball received from the effect opening / closing device 398 is guided to the first effect basket 470, the effect using the game ball can be visually recognized.

  When the control command for effect driving control is sent from the peripheral control board 662 to the lamp driving board 688, the lamp driving board 688 moves the support shaft 474 in the β direction. And reciprocatingly rotate in the γ direction.

  When the support shaft 474 is repeatedly reciprocated in the β direction and the γ direction, the one hand 434 a of the figure 434 rotates around the support shaft 474 with respect to the figure 434 as the support shaft 474 rotates. That is, when the support shaft 474 rotates clockwise (β direction in the figure), the one hand 434a and the first effect rod 470 are rotated in the β direction with respect to the figure 434 around the support shaft 474 as a rotation center. To do. Further, when the support shaft 474 rotates counterclockwise (γ direction in the drawing), the one hand 434a and the first performance rod 470 are moved in the γ direction with respect to the figure 434 around the support shaft 474 as a rotation center. Rotate. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the first effect 樋 470 is inclined downward toward the first performance exit 476 and the first effect 樋 470 is shown in FIG. 54 (b). Are repeatedly inclined downward toward the second effect 樋 induction port 478.

  If the game ball that won the stage opening / closing device 398 is present on the first stage 樋 470, the support shaft 474 is repeatedly reciprocally rotated clockwise and counterclockwise, Roll on the 1 stage 470 in the left-right direction. In other words, the support shaft 474 rotates in the opposite direction different from the previous rotation direction before the game ball of the first performance rod 470 is guided to the first performance port 476 or the second performance rod guide port 478. As a result, the game ball rolls in the left-right direction on the first performance rod 470. When the support shaft 474 rotates to the rotation limit in the γ direction and is held for a certain period of time (if it is held for a certain period of time in the mode of FIG. 54A), the game ball is guided to the first performance port 476. . On the other hand, when the support shaft 474 rotates to the rotation limit in the clockwise direction and is held for a certain period of time (if it is held for a certain period of time in the mode of FIG. 54 (b)), the game ball is in the second stage 樋 induction port 478. Led to.

  When a game ball that rolls on the first performance pole 470 is guided to the first performance exit 476, the game ball is discharged behind the game board 5. On the other hand, when a game ball that rolls on the first effect rod 470 is guided to the second effect rod guide port 478, the game ball falls on the right end 472a of the second effect rod 472, and from the right end 472a to the left end 472b. Roll towards Then, the game ball rolling from the right end 472a toward the left end 472b is guided to the second performance port 480.

  That is, when the support shaft 474 is repeatedly reciprocated in the β direction and the γ direction, the first effect 樋 470 is a game ball that rolls on the first effect 樋 470 as the first effect outlet 476 or the second effect. It swings like a seesaw so as to be guided to one of the ports 480. As a result, only one game ball rolls on the first performance bowl 470 that is swung like a seesaw, so that it is likely to be accepted by the first performance outlet 476 or the second performance outlet 480. Sometimes, the player will feel a sense of thrill, and the excitement will be enhanced.

  Note that the distribution mechanism 438 distributes only one game ball to the effect object 430 even when a plurality of game balls are received from the effect opening / closing device 398. There is only one game ball rolling in a seesaw shape.

  In addition, the effect by the effect using the game ball 430 (that is, the effect of whether the game ball is received at the first performance port 476 or the second performance port 480) is transmitted by the command transmission means 749. Is performed based on the lottery result received by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714.

  Specifically, when performing with the director 430, which one of the first performance outlet 476 and the second performance outlet 480 is to be the winning performance outlet (or an outlier)? Is determined by the effect lottery means 760. On the other hand, the effect display device 115 performs an effect suggesting which one of the first performance exit 476 and the second performance exit 480 is a winning game ball. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp which one of the first performance outlet 476 and the second performance outlet 480 is a winning game ball. Therefore, when an effect by the effect-use accessory 430 is being performed, the player can easily grasp which performance exit is the winning performance exit, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a short win or a small hit, a game ball rolling on the first effect 樋 470 is hit. The stage is directed so that it is led to the stage of the stage and the side of the stage that has been decided. On the other hand, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is out of play, the game ball rolling on the first performance pole 470 is out of play. The performance is performed so as to be guided to the determined exit. In this way, the winning lottery means 760 determines the winning performance point and the off-performing performance port for each performance by the effect material 430. In other words, the winning performance outlet and the extraordinary performance outlet are variable. Thereby, a monotonous game can be avoided, and when a performance is performed by the performance object 430, the player is attracted attention to which performance exit is a hit, and the interest is enhanced.

  In addition, “winning performance exit” means a performance exit indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means may be advantageous to the player, and “out of performance exit” means the lottery means. It is a performance exit that shows that the lottery result by is more unfavorable than the result advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, “the lottery result by the lottery means may be a result advantageous to the player” means “short win or short in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710”. It means “winning the jackpot”. That is, “possibility” means that if the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a short hit, a probable game state is generated, which is advantageous to the player. Can do. In addition, if it is a small hit, it is based on the fact that it cannot be said that the result is advantageous to the player because the normal gaming state continues.

  In addition, the effect using the game ball by the effect object 430 is that the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is short win or small hit, This is performed after a series of opening / closing operations (two opening / closing operations in the present embodiment) of the effect opening / closing device 398 by the opening / closing operation control means 744 is completed. Specifically, after the short win game and the small hit game are executed, the symbols of the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 after the occurrence of the next gaming state are changing (the first special symbol display). This is performed after the lighting / flashing display of the symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is started until the determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 is displayed. In this specification, the time required for symbol variation is referred to as variation time.

  The game balls that have won the effect opening / closing device 398 at the timing when the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened and held are held by the distribution mechanism 438 until the effect by the effecting accessory 430 is performed. It falls to the accessory rotating body 432 from the drop opening 536b at the timing when the production is performed.

  It should be noted that a certain amount of time or more is required to produce an effect using the game ball by the effect object 430. On the other hand, when the determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 is not accompanied by a so-called reach effect, the variation time varies depending on the number of reservations by the first special symbol reservation counter 703, as will be described in detail later. For example, if the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 immediately after the start of fluctuation is 2 or more, the change time is relatively short. If the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 1 or less, the first special symbol is set. The fluctuation time is longer than when the number of holds by the hold counter 703 is 2 or more. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time in the reach production and the fluctuation time in the case where the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is 1 or less are longer than the time required for the production using the game balls by the production actor 430. It has become. On the other hand, the fluctuation time when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 2 or more is shorter than the time required for the play using the game ball by the play accessory 430. When the determination result by the second special symbol determination unit 714 is derived on the second special symbol display 86, the variation time is longer than the time required for the effect using the game ball by the effect agent 430. Always getting longer. Therefore, in the effect using the game ball by the effect agent 430, if the determination result by the first special symbol determination means 704 is derived on the first special symbol display 84, the reach occurs and the first It is executed only when the number of holds by the 1 special symbol hold counter 703 is 1 or less, and is always executed if the determination result by the second special symbol presence / absence determination means 714 is derived to the second special symbol display 86. .

  On the other hand, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is long hit, the effect using the game ball by the effect accessory 430 is 15 rounds or more. To be done. Here, the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed up to two rounds by the opening / closing operation control means 744, and the game that won the effect opening / closing device 398 at the timing when the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 was executed. All the balls are discharged behind the pachinko machine 1 by the sorting mechanism 438. After the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed for two rounds, the opening / closing operation control means 744 continues the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 until the 14th round. Since the opening / closing operation of the device 398 is not performed, a game ball cannot be received in the effect opening / closing device 398. Then, after the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is performed, the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed again by the opening / closing operation control means 744 only for the first round of the 15th round. The game balls received in the effect opening / closing device 398 in the 15th round are held by the distribution mechanism 438 until the effect using the game balls by the effect actor 430 is started. It falls to the accessory rotating body 432 from the drop opening 536b at the timing when the performance is performed.

  Here, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a long win, the timing at which an effect using the game ball by the effect accessory 430 is performed. As described above, it is after the 15th round in the long game. Specifically, it is performed at any timing from when a game ball is won to the effect opening / closing device 398 until a game state that occurs after the end of the long hit game is started. Therefore, if, for example, a probability variation game state occurs after the long hit game, an effect using the game ball by the effect accessory 430 is performed at least before the probability variation game state occurs.

  Further, in the effect display device 115, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination unit 714 is short win or small hit, and after the long hit gaming state occurs Special effects will be performed before the game state occurs. Thereby, when a special effect is performed on the effect display device 115, the player has a higher expectation that a jackpot gaming state will be generated, and the interest will be enhanced.

  As described above, the game ball rolling on the first performance pole 470 is changed to the first performance exit 476 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 according to the determination of the lottery result. The performance is performed so as to be guided to the second performance exit 480. When a special effect is performed on the effect display device 115, the game ball rolling on the first effect 樋 470 is guided to the winning performance exit, and the special effect is not performed on the effect display device 115. You will be guided to the exit. Therefore, when the effect by the effect item 430 is being performed, the player plays the game with a sense of expectation that the game ball will be received at the winning performance exit.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination unit 714 is a short win or a small hit, the game opening / closing device 398 is played with a game ball. If is not accepted, the effect using the game ball is not performed. Accordingly, the player is willing to win a game ball in the effect opening / closing device 398 when the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened. Thereby, it is possible not only to see the unilateral performance from the pachinko machine 1, but also to have an emotion that the player himself participates in the game, and the interest is enhanced. Furthermore, since the accessory guidance path 436, the first effect kite 470, and the second effect kite 472 are all made of a transparent member so that the game balls rolling on them can be seen, the game balls produce the effect. Since it is possible to grasp a series of trends from winning the opening / closing device 398 to being accepted by the first performance exit 476 or the second performance exit 480, the interest is further enhanced.

  Note that the members of the accessory guide path 436, the first effect rod 470, and the second effect rod 472 may be transparent to such an extent that the game balls rolling on them can be visually recognized. That is, a semi-transparent member may be used as long as it can visually recognize the rolling game ball.

[Physical structure and operation of pachinko machines]
Here, the physical configuration and operation of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to the present invention described above will be described.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation;
A receiving port arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media;
A special space which has a distribution space in which the game medium received in the reception port can be distributed, and distributes the game medium to the distribution space without affecting the game control, and discharges it outside the game area;
The distribution space of the special combination is provided with a distribution space haunting means that is visible or invisible to a player according to a game situation that changes when a game medium is driven into the game area. And

  Here, as the “accepting entrance”, it is possible to accept a winning lottery or a winning entrance (for example, an electric tulip) where a predetermined lottery is performed by accepting it or it is difficult to accept. And “a start opening to be used”, “a big winning opening and a bonus winning opening that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern when an advantageous gaming state occurs”, and the like.

  In addition, the “distribution space” includes “a single entrance and a plurality of outlets, and the game medium rolls between the entrance and the outlets so that any one of the outlets can be naturally probable. "Discharged", "Those that have one entrance and multiple exits, and are discharged from one of the exits by the movement of a movable body arranged between the entrance and exit", etc. Is mentioned.

  Also, “game control” means “control relating to payout of game media”, “control relating to lottery by lottery means”, “starting opening, winning opening (including a big winning opening), opening / closing prize winning opening etc. Control regarding the opening and closing of the opening / closing piece of ".

  Furthermore, “special items” include “things that can be rotated around a predetermined axis”, “things that can be moved in the horizontal direction”, “things that can be moved in the vertical direction”, “up and down” The direction, left and right direction, and rotation around a predetermined axis as appropriate ”,“ position fixed ”, and the like can be exemplified.

  In addition, the “gaming situation” includes “when an advantageous gaming state is occurring or just before the occurrence”, “when no game medium is received at a prize opening for a predetermined time”, “starting port so as to satisfy a predetermined condition” And “when a game medium is received at a prize opening”.

  Furthermore, “distribution space haunting means” include “things that slide or rotate special features”, “things that move or make a concealing member that conceals special features”, etc. Can be mentioned.

  According to the present configuration, the entrance (production prize winning opening 398a) arranged in the game area (game area 37) and the game medium (game ball) received in the entrance (production prize winning opening 398a) are provided. A special feature (production effect 430) that has a distribution space (ball distribution space 460a) that can be distributed and that discharges the game medium (game ball) to the outside of the game region (game region 37) without affecting the game control. And circulation space intrusion means (rotation drive unit 448) that makes the circulation space (ball circulation space 460a) of the special bonus item (direction effector 430) visible or invisible according to the game situation. is there.

  As a result, when a predetermined gaming situation is reached, the distribution space of the special feature can be visually recognized. When the game medium is received at the reception port, the game medium moving in the distribution space can be visually recognized. It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained by the movement of the game medium moving inside.

  In addition, conventionally, it was impossible to visually recognize the game medium that is received at the reception port and discharged from the game area. However, according to the present configuration, the game medium received at the reception port can be visually recognized. The game machine can be an unprecedented gaming machine, which can attract the interest of the player and enhance the interest.

  Furthermore, when the predetermined gaming situation is reached, the distribution space of the special feature becomes visible, and the distribution space can be visually recognized, so that the player is interested in the distribution space and wants to distribute the game medium in the distribution space. It is possible to perform a driving operation aiming at the receiving port in order to distribute the game medium in the distribution space, and to prevent the interest from being lowered.

  By the way, for example, when a distribution means is provided in the distribution space and distributed to a plurality of flow paths, the distribution of the game medium by the distribution means in the accessory is a game like the second type gaming machine. When it is related to control, it is necessary to make the variation of the distribution probability by the distribution means within a predetermined significance level, and the structural design of the distribution means and the control of the distribution means are strictly controlled and the game medium There is a problem in that the movement of the system must be defined, and the design and control restrictions increase, and the cost for implementation is increased.

  However, according to the present configuration, the game medium is distributed in the distribution space and discharged out of the game area without affecting the game control. That is, the game medium distributed in the distribution space is used for game control. Since there is no influence, there is no need to strictly define the movement of the game media that circulates in the distribution space, and the degree of design freedom for the distribution (rolling effect) of the game media in the distribution space is increased. It is possible to make the movement of the game medium more enjoyable and to reduce the cost for the realization.

  In addition, the movement of the game medium in the distribution space may be as if it has an influence on the game control. Thus, if the game medium moves in the distribution space, it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to give an illusion that it is possible to increase the interest in the distribution space that has become visible, and the excitement is enhanced by the movement of game media in the distribution space. Can do.

  As a predetermined gaming state, the distribution space is made visible during the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state, and the reception opening is a large winning opening or an accessory winning opening that is opened and closed by the advantageous gaming state generating means. In this case, even if the driving operation aiming at the big prize opening becomes a monotonous game while the advantageous gaming state is occurring, if the game medium is accepted into the big prize opening as the reception hall, the game is distributed through the distribution space. It is possible to visually recognize that it is discharged out of the area, and it is possible to entertain the movement of the game medium that circulates in the distribution space and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
When the special combination is in a state in which the distribution space is visible to the player by the distribution space haunting means, a game medium can be distributed in the distribution space.

  By the way, for example, when the special character is moved by the distribution space haunting means, in order to allow the game medium to always enter the distribution space, the entrance for entering the special character distribution space No matter where it is, the game media must enter, and the mechanism for entering the game media into the entrance of the moving specials becomes complicated, increasing the cost, It may cause malfunction.

  According to this configuration, when the distribution space (ball distribution space 460a) becomes visible, game media (game balls) can be distributed in the distribution space (ball distribution space 460a). As a result, the game medium can be distributed only when the distribution space becomes visible, so that the mechanism for allowing the game medium to enter the distribution space can be simplified, and the increase in costs and problems can be avoided. Generation can be reduced.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
At least the distribution space of the special agent is movable, and the distribution space haunting means moves at least the distribution space.

  According to this configuration, at least the circulation space (sphere circulation space 460a) can be moved, and at least the circulation space (sphere circulation space 460a) is moved by the circulation space in / out means (rotation drive unit 448). That is, by moving at least the distribution space, the distribution space is made visible or invisible to the player.

  As a result, a distribution space of a predetermined size having a flow path for the game medium moves in the game area, so that the distribution space becomes conspicuous and its presence can be strongly appealed to the player. You can be interested in the space and be interested in it. In addition, you may make it move the whole special thing by distribution space haunting means.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The special accessory is rotatable around a predetermined axis, the circulation space is disposed within a predetermined angular range in the circumferential direction of the special accessory, and the circulation space intruding means is the special accessory. Is rotated around a predetermined axis.

  Here, “within a predetermined angle range” is within a range of 30 to 210 degrees, preferably within a range of 120 to 180 degrees. If the range is narrower than this, the distribution space becomes narrow and the movement of the game medium is enjoyed. If the range is wider than this, it is difficult to rotate and make the circulation space invisible.

  By the way, it is possible to make the distribution space visible or invisible by configuring the special combination so that the special combination is slidable and sliding the special combination using the distribution space in / out means. However, in this case, within the slide range of the special character, an exposed portion where the special character can be visually recognized and a concealing portion where the special character cannot be visually recognized are provided, and the exposed portion and the concealed portion are slid. Therefore, the area of the combined exposed portion and concealing portion is required to be at least twice as large as the area occupied by the special feature, and there is a problem that restrictions when preparing for a gaming machine are increased.

  According to this configuration, the circulation space (ball circulation space 460a) is disposed within a predetermined angular range in the circumferential direction of the special accessory (production accessory 430) that can be rotated, and the circulation space intruding means (rotation drive unit 448). Is used to rotate the special combination (the production combination 430).

  As a result, the circulation space can be made easily visible or invisible simply by rotating the special role object by the circulation space in / out means, so that the distribution space is limited only by the area occupied by the special role object. It is possible to make it appear and disappear, and the area related to the installation of the special feature can be made as small as possible, and it can be easily provided in the gaming machine.

  In addition, when the direction in which the rotation axis of the special accessory extends is extended in the vertical direction or the left-right direction with respect to the gaming machine (game board), a shield that rotates with the special accessory on the rear side of the distribution space, etc. If the front side of the shielding part is directed to the player, the circulation space becomes visible, and if the rear side of the shielding part is directed to the player by rotation, the circulation space becomes invisible. Can be made visible or invisible, and almost all the area when the special feature is viewed from the front can be used as a distribution space. The movement can be more enjoyable.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The special core is arranged so that the axis of the special accessory extends in the vertical direction.

  By the way, when it is configured to rotate the special accessory, if the direction in which the rotation axis extends is arranged so as to extend in the left-right direction with respect to the gaming machine, by increasing the diameter of the special accessory in the distribution space Although the height of the top and bottom can be increased, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the special bonus will also increase, so the diameter of the special bonus will be larger than necessary due to island facilities for installing gaming machines in halls, etc. It is difficult to enlarge. Therefore, it is conceivable to widen the distribution space by extending the special accessory in the axial direction. However, since the distribution space becomes longer in the left-right direction, the movement of the game media there is mainly the rolling in the left-right direction, which is different from the rolling of the game media on the stage provided in the conventional gaming machine. It may become difficult and the appealing effect on the player may be reduced.

  In addition, when the direction of the rotation axis of the special combination is arranged so as to extend in the front-rear direction with respect to the gaming machine, the front side of the special combination is compared with the case where the rotation axis is arranged in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. The rear side cannot be switched by rotation, and the entire angle range (that is, 360 degrees) including the circulation space arranged in the predetermined angle range can be visually recognized. For this reason, a predetermined range on the front side of the special accessory is concealed by the concealing member, and the circulation space becomes invisible when the circulation space of the special accessory is located on the rear side of the concealment member, and the circulation space is rotated together with the special accessory. Therefore, it is necessary to make the structure visible when moved to a range without a concealing member. In other words, the space related to the installation of the special feature only needs to be the size of the special feature, but in the front view, approximately half of the special feature must be covered with at least a shielding member, and there is a circulation space that can be viewed. There is a problem of becoming smaller.

  According to this structure, it arrange | positions so that the axial center of the rotating shaft in a special accessory (production effect 430) may be extended in an up-down direction. Accordingly, a shield part or the like that rotates together with the special object is provided on the rear side of the circulation space, and the circulation space can be visually recognized when the front side of the shield part is directed to the player. Since the distribution space becomes invisible when directed toward, the distribution space can be made visible or invisible with a simple configuration, and almost all the area when the special accessory is viewed from the front is defined as the distribution space. It is possible to make the distribution space as large as possible and make the movement of the game medium more enjoyable.

  In addition, since the special feature can be extended in the axial direction, that is, in the vertical direction, the distribution space can be widened, so that the gap of the game medium in the distribution space can be increased, and the game medium in the horizontal direction by the stage can be increased. It is possible to make a vertical movement that is significantly different from the movement, so that it can be differentiated from conventional gaming machines, and the appealing effect to the player can be enhanced.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The receiving port is arranged above the center of the game area.

  By the way, since the game medium is driven above the game area by the player's operation, if a reception opening such as a start opening or a prize opening is arranged above the game area, the game medium is received at the reception opening. Because the game media flowing down the game area will disappear from the game area at an early stage and will be discharged to the outside, the movement of the game medium cannot be seen until the end (down to the bottom of the game area) Depending on the player, there is a risk that the mood may be lost and interest may be reduced.

  In addition, when the “reception entrance” is arranged below the center of the game area, the vertical size of the distribution space in the special feature is probably smaller than half of the game area, and the distribution space is Since it becomes narrower, there is a risk that it will be difficult to make the game medium move so as to enhance the interest of the player in the distribution space.

  According to the present configuration, the reception port (production prize winning opening 398a) is arranged above the center of the game area (game area 37). As a result, even if the game medium that has been put into the game area is received at the reception entrance at an early stage, it can be enjoyed by showing the movement until it is discharged from the distribution space by distributing it through the distribution space of the special accessory. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating as a lost mood.

  In addition, since the receiving port is arranged above the game area, the vertical drop of the distribution space can be increased as much as possible, and the distribution space can be widened. Various movements can be made to the medium, and the player can be entertained and entertaining.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
An acceptance detecting means for detecting a game medium received in the receiving port;
A payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media based on at least the detection of the game media by the acceptance detection means;
The game medium detected by the acceptance detection means circulates in the distribution space of the special bonus item.

  According to this configuration, when it is detected that the game medium (game ball) has been received by the reception detection means (production opening / closing device count sensor 572) at the reception opening (production large winning opening 398a), the payout means (ball A predetermined number of game media (game balls) are paid out by the payout device 170). As a result, when the game medium is received in the reception port, not only the game medium circulating in the distribution space of the special bonus item is visually recognized but the movement of the game medium is enjoyed, and the game medium is paid out. It is possible to enhance the interest by actively performing the game medium driving operation aiming at the game.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A starting port disposed at a position different from the receiving port in the gaming area;
When a game medium is received at the start port, a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, and when the lottery result lottered by the lottery means satisfies a predetermined condition, the entrance can receive a game medium in a predetermined pattern. Further comprising advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state advantageous to the player by repeating the unacceptable state,
As the gaming situation, at least when the advantageous gaming state is generated by the advantageous gaming state generating means, the distribution space of the special accessory can be visually recognized by the distribution space infesting means.

  The “advantageous game state” means a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and can be exemplified by the following various states. In the present embodiment, the long hit state, the short hit state, and the small hit state correspond to the “advantageous game state”.

(1) In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the entrance (winning port) that is driven to open and close is repeatedly opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or continuously opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won. A state in which a large amount of game media (game balls) easily enter the entrance (so-called “hit state”).

(2) In a game machine such as a pachinko, a so-called “probability fluctuation state” in which a winning probability of a lottery for a big hit is set higher than usual and a probability that a big hit state is generated is set higher than usual.

(3) In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery starting device for lottery that makes a lottery to determine whether or not a big hit state is generated by entry (winning) or passing of game media is easier to enter game media than usual. A state in which a lottery lottery is performed more frequently than usual, that is, a so-called “time reduction state”.

(4) In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, a state in which the reels are easily stopped in a mode of paying out medals as game media during a predetermined game, a so-called “bonus game state”.

(5) In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, a state in which the reels can be stopped with a bonus symbol which is a condition for making the next game state a bonus game state, a so-called “bonus establishment state”.

(6) In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, a state that assists the formation of a combination by guiding a reel stop order and symbols for establishing a combination for a predetermined number of games, so-called “assist game state” .

(7) In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, a so-called “probability fluctuation state” in which the probability that a bonus state such as a bonus game state, a bonus establishment state, or an assist game state occurs is higher than usual.

  According to this configuration, when a game medium (game ball) is received in the start ports (the first start port 390, the second start port 392, and the third start port 394) arranged in the game region (the game region 37), When a lottery is performed by the lottery means (the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710) and the lottery result satisfies a predetermined condition such as a big hit, the advantageous game state generating means (the small hit game executing means 746). And the jackpot game execution means 748) generates an advantageous game state in which the entrance (the big prize winning opening 398a for the production) can be received and cannot be received in a predetermined pattern, and when the advantageous game state occurs, the special character (production) The distribution space (sphere distribution space 460a) of the utility item 430) is made visible.

  As a result, when an advantageous gaming state occurs, the entrance repeatedly accepts and cannot accept in a predetermined pattern, that is, because the entrance is used as a big prize opening or an accessory prize opening, the advantageous gaming state occurs. , Even if the game media driving operation is a monotonous operation aiming at the entrance as a big prize opening or an accessory prize opening, etc., the game medium received at the entrance is a distribution space for special objects It is possible to entertain the player by making various movements within the game, and to prevent the game from becoming tired and less interesting.

  In addition, when the advantageous gaming state occurs, the distribution space of the special feature is made visible to the player, so that it is possible to recognize that the advantageous gaming state has occurred by making the distribution space visible. As well as being able to visually recognize the distribution space that was previously invisible, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the distribution space and to enjoy the movement of the game media that circulates in the distribution space. .

  Further, the movement of the game medium in the distribution space may be as if it has an influence on the game control. For example, the game medium moves in a predetermined direction at a certain stage when the advantageous game state is generated. If the game medium is exhausted, the illusion will be as if the advantageous game state has been extended, or if the game medium is discharged in the predetermined direction immediately after the end of the advantageous game state, it will be drawn as if It is possible to make an illusion that the probability that a lottery result satisfying a predetermined condition by means is changed to a high probability, and the interest in the distribution space can be further increased during the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state, and distribution The movement of the game medium in the space can be made exciting and exciting to enhance the excitement.

  In addition, it is provided with effect display means that can display effect images using symbols, characters, etc., and before drawing the lottery result to the player by the effect image, the lottery result is suggested by variably displaying the symbol etc. It is possible to make the player expect the game to be fun, and it is possible to increase the interest by making the player feel excited and excited by fluctuations in the design and the like.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation;
A starting port disposed in the gaming area;
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a game medium is received at the start port;
According to a lottery result by the lottery means, it is possible to accept game media, and a receiving port arranged at a position different from the starting port in the gaming area,
An acceptance detecting means for detecting a game medium received in the receiving port;
According to the lottery result of the lottery means to the distribution space in which the game medium detected by the acceptance detection means can be distributed, a plurality of outlets from which the game medium can be discharged from the distribution space, and any of the outlets A special combination that has at least distribution means for distributing game media, distributes game media without affecting game control, and discharges the game media out of the game area;
A special character moving means for moving the special character so that the distribution space is visible or invisible to a player according to at least the lottery result of the lottery means;
It comprises at least a game granting means for granting a predetermined privilege according to the lottery result of the lottery detection and the lottery detection of the game medium by the acceptance detection means.

  Here, the “starting port” is “a type in which a game medium can be always accepted, and a game medium that is discharged out of the game area without returning the game medium to the game area, or a game medium that has been accepted. “Returning to the game area again (for example, through chucker)”, “Opening and closing piece based on detection of game medium by chucker, etc., allowing reception of game medium”, “Detection of game medium by chucker, etc.” Based on this, the opening probability of the opening / closing piece is changed to change the acceptance probability of the game medium ”.

  In addition, the “distribution means” includes “a game medium that is formed into a roll shape that can roll, and is rotated like a seesaw to release and distribute the game medium from one end (for example, , Production も の) ”,“ things to be distributed by switching the flow path of the branching game media ”,“ having a plurality of grooves or holes in the circumferential direction corresponding to different receiving ports and accommodating or passing the game media. “Consisting of a rotating body”, “Different receiving ports are arranged as appropriate (for example, in a row), and a guide member capable of guiding a game medium is provided in any one of the receiving ports, and the receiving ports and the guide members are arranged. And the like that are moved relative to each other in the direction ".

  Examples of the “special accessory moving means” include “one that slides the special accessory in a predetermined direction”, “one that rotates the special accessory around a predetermined axis”, and the like.

  Further, as the “privilege granting means”, “the one that pays out a predetermined number of game media”, “the reception port from which a predetermined number of game media are paid out are repeated in a predetermined pattern that the game media can be received and cannot be received. Things "," things that increase the probability that a game medium will enter a game medium receiving port from which a predetermined number of game media are paid out, or open the receiving port under predetermined conditions ", etc. .

  According to this configuration, the start port (the first start port 390, the second start port 392, and the third start port 394) disposed in the game area (the game area 37) and the start port (the first start port 390, the first start port 390) A lottery means (a first special symbol lottery means 700 and a second special symbol lottery means 710) and a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery by receiving game media (game balls) in the second start port 392 and the third start port 394). According to the lottery result of (the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710), a reception opening (a large winning port for production 398a) capable of receiving a game medium (game ball), and a reception opening ( A reception detecting means (effect opening / closing device count sensor 572) for detecting a game medium (game ball) received in the effect large winning opening 398a) and an acceptance detection means (effect opening / closing device count sensor 572). A distribution space (ball distribution space 460a) through which the released game medium (game ball) can be distributed, and the game medium (game ball) can be discharged out of the game area (game area 37) without affecting game control. A special feature (direction effect 430) having a plurality of outlets (first performance port 476 and second performance port 480), and a special function (direction effect 430) according to the lottery result Detection and lottery results of special accessory moving means (rotary drive unit 448) that moves the circulation space (sphere circulation space 460a) so as to be visible or invisible, and receiving detection means (effect opening / closing device count sensor 572) Bonus granting means (small hit game execution means 746 and jackpot game execution means 748) for granting a predetermined bonus according to the game, and a special medium (directing role 430) according to the lottery result The distribution means (ball distribution unit motor 484, rotation drive mechanism 492, and first performance rod 470) that distributes (game balls) to any one of the discharge ports (first performance port 476 or second performance port 480). ).

  As a result, when the game medium is received at the start opening and a predetermined lottery result is drawn, the entrance can be received and the special feature can move and the distribution space can be visually recognized. When the medium is received at the receiving port, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means, and the received game medium is supplied into the distribution space of the special accessory, so that the movement of the game medium circulating in the distribution space can be enjoyed. In addition, since the game medium is distributed to a predetermined outlet by the distribution means according to the lottery result, the movement of the game medium circulating in the distribution space can be enjoyed and the distribution means Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being lowered and to reduce the interest of the player.

  In addition, after the game medium supplied to the distribution space of the special bonus item is discharged from the distribution space, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, and the game medium is distributed to different outlets depending on the privilege granted. As a result, when it is distributed to a predetermined discharge port by the distribution means, a privilege according to the discharge port is given, so as if the distribution by the distribution means in the distribution space is a game The illusion can be made as if it is affecting control. As a result, the player's interest is further increased depending on which discharge port the game medium in the distribution space is distributed to by the distribution means, and the movement of the game medium distributed by the distribution means makes it irritating. It can be interesting.

  Further, according to this configuration, the game medium is circulated in the distribution space and discharged out of the game area without affecting the game control. In other words, since the game media distributed in the distribution space does not affect the game control, it is not necessary to strictly define the movement of the game media distributed in the distribution space. The degree of freedom of design of distribution (rolling effect) can be increased, and the movement of the game medium can be more enjoyed, and the cost for realizing it can be suppressed.

  More specifically, the game medium supplied to the distribution space becomes a so-called “dead ball” that is not related to the game control thereafter, so there is no need to distribute the game medium with a strict probability by the distribution means, and the distribution means Can reduce the cost. As a result, even if the distribution is made to an unintended discharge port, it has already been determined that the predetermined privilege is given by the detection by the receiving detection means before being supplied to the distribution space. However, the player is surprised at the player and expected to have an interesting effect by being assigned to an outlet different from the intended purpose and given an unintended privilege.

  In addition, according to the lottery result, an advantageous game state is generated as a privilege by the privilege granting means, and at that time, the special character is moved so that the circulation space can be visually recognized, and the entrance is opened and closed by the advantageous game state generating means. In the case of a winning prize opening or an accessory prize opening that operates, even if the driving operation aiming at the big prize opening becomes a monotonous game during the advantageous gaming state, a game is played in the big winning opening as a reception When the medium is accepted, it can be visually recognized that it is distributed through the distribution space and discharged out of the game area, and it is possible to entertain the movement of the game medium distributed in the distribution space and prevent the interest from deteriorating. Can do. Further, at that time, it is desirable to perform an effect such that “probability change”, “short time”, “big hit”, “small win”, “number of rounds”, etc. are determined by the distribution of the distribution means, More attention can be given to the distribution space and the player can be entertained.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The distribution means has a seesaw-like effect kite on which the supplied game media can roll, tilts the show kite around a predetermined axis, and releases the game media from the end positioned below, A game medium (game ball) is distributed to either the first discharge port or the second discharge port as the discharge port.

  Here, examples of the “production effect” include “what is centered below the both ends when it is substantially horizontal”, “what extends substantially straight”, and the like.

  According to this configuration, the sorting means (the ball sorting unit motor 484, the rotation drive mechanism 492, and the first effect 樋 470) is a seesaw-like effect 樋 (first effect 樋 470). As a result, by alternately tilting the effect rod like a seesaw, the game medium supplied on the effect rod will swing back and forth in the direction in which the effect rod extends. It can be difficult to predict whether the game media will be released, and it can be thrilled and thrilled by which outlet it is distributed to, and the movement of the swinging game media can be enjoyed to enhance the player's interest Can be increased.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The allocating means is characterized in that the center of the performance rod is positioned lower than both ends when substantially horizontal.

  By the way, in the case where the effect 樋 is a straight line extending substantially linearly, even if the effect 樋 is in a horizontal state, the game medium supplied to the effect を has a motion vector in the direction in which the effect 延 び る extends. If so, the game medium supplied to the stage 移動 moves in that direction, and the game medium is released from the end without swinging on the stage 樋, and the movement of the game medium by the stage 樋 can be enjoyed. There is a problem that disappears.

  Therefore, it is conceivable to supply the game medium to the stage so that the motion vector in the direction in which the stage is extended becomes as small as possible. Specifically, for example, it is conceivable to supply the game medium from a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the performance kite extends, but in this case, the game media supplied to the production kit does not move in the extending direction. Until the production basket rotates and tilts, the game medium does not roll, and the continuous movement of the game medium is interrupted, and there is a possibility that some players may be less interested. In addition, since the position where the game medium is supplied to the production stage is limited, there is a problem that the design of the special character is limited and it is difficult to make the design effective.

  However, according to the present configuration, the production rod has a shape with the center lowered from both ends. As a result, even if the game medium supplied to the stage 有 し has a predetermined motion vector in the direction in which the stage 延 び る extends, if the game medium rolls toward the end of the stage 樋, Since it will climb, the moving speed of a game medium will decelerate. Then, by appropriately selecting the initial speed of the game medium supplied to the stage や and the height difference between the center and both ends of the stage 樋, the supplied game medium can be used for the stage て も without tilting the stage 樋. It can be swung in the extending direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game medium supplied to the performance kit from being immediately released, and to fully enjoy the movement of the game media on the production kit. In addition, since the supply position of the game medium with respect to the performance kit is not limited, it is possible to design various special actors, which can be more interesting.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The allocating means is characterized in that the stage effect has a shape substantially along the outer periphery of the special accessory.

  According to the present configuration, the effect 樋 (first effect 樋 470) has a shape along the outer periphery of the special accessory (the effect accessory 430). As a result, the length of the production bowl can be made as long as possible, so that the possible roll distance of the game medium can be lengthened, and the production medium can be rolled on the production bowl for a longer period of time. You can enjoy the movement of the game media on the top.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The special accessory further includes energy attenuating means for attenuating kinetic energy of the game medium supplied to the allocating means.

  Here, examples of the “energy attenuating means” include “attenuating kinetic energy by bouncing”, “attenuating kinetic energy by frictional resistance”, and the like. Any material that attenuates kinetic energy by physical deformation such as plastic deformation or elastic deformation may be used, such as “using a low resilience member”, “made of fiber material, net-like, woven or non-woven fabric. And the like "," a material made of organic, inorganic, metal, etc., which is formed into a fiber shape or a linear shape, and the like is raised ".

  By the way, if the kinetic energy of the game medium supplied to the distribution means is large, the distribution means may be damaged by the kinetic energy, which may cause the game to be interrupted. In addition, in order to improve the design and decoration, when the production fence as a sorting means is made of a transparent material (especially resin), there are limited additives that can be added to the material in order to maintain the transparency. In particular, there is a problem that an additive for improving the strength cannot be added, and the strength is low and the material is easily damaged. This problem is applicable not only to the distribution means but also to a supply portion (for example, a ball discharge section) for supplying game media to the distribution means.

  According to this configuration, the kinetic energy attenuating means for attenuating the kinetic energy of the game medium (game sphere) supplied to the allocating means (the ball allocating unit motor 484, the rotation drive mechanism 492, and the first effect rod 470) is provided. It is a thing. Thereby, since the kinetic energy of the game medium supplied to the distribution means can be reduced, even if the game medium comes into contact with the distribution means, the impact can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to prevent the means from being damaged.

  In addition, since the impact caused by the contact with the game medium can be reduced as much as possible, a low-strength material is used for the distribution means and the supply part (ball discharge part) for supplying the game medium to the distribution means. For example, it is possible to use a transparent material as the material, and it is possible to enhance the design and decoration of the sorting means and the like, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The energy attenuating means attenuates the kinetic energy of the game medium by bouncing.

  According to this configuration, the kinetic energy is attenuated by bouncing the game medium as the energy attenuating means. As a result, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be attenuated, and at the same time, the game medium can be bounced to change the movement of the game medium. In addition to the above-described effects, the game in the energy attenuation means The movement of the medium can be enjoyed, and the entertainment can be enhanced.

  In addition, as for the thing which bounces the game medium, for example, the contact surface with which the falling game medium abuts is formed of a material to which an additive material for improving the strength is added, or the thickness thereof for improving the strength. It is desirable to increase or to use them together. In addition, a low resilience member may be used on the contact surface with the game medium, thereby suppressing the movement of the game medium due to bouncing and guiding the supply of the game medium to the distribution means. Can be made easier.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The privilege granting means is
Payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media based on at least detection of game media by the acceptance detection means;
When the lottery result of the lottery means satisfies a predetermined condition, the advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player by repeating the accepting and non-accepting of the game medium by the receiving port in a predetermined pattern And
According to the lottery result in which the advantageous gaming state is generated by the advantageous gaming state generating means, the special accessory moving means can visually recognize the distribution space of the special accessory, and the distribution means can play the game medium. It distributes to the predetermined said discharge port, It is characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to this configuration, the bonus granting means (small hit game executing means 746 and big hit game executing means 748) are played based on the detection of the game medium (game ball) by at least the receiving detection means (effect opening / closing device count sensor 572). When the lottery results of the payout means (ball payout device 170) for paying out the medium (game ball) and the lottery means (the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710) satisfy a predetermined condition, the entrance (production) The special prize opening 398a) is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous game state (small hit game execution means 746 and big hit game execution means 748), and special when the advantageous game state occurs The distribution space (sphere distribution space 460a) of the accessory (direction accessory 430) is made visible, and the distribution space at that time Spherical flow space 460a) distributing means the supplied game media (game ball) in the (spherical distribution unit motor 484, is obtained as allocating by the rotation drive mechanism 492 and the first effect trough 470).

  Thereby, the movement may be as if it has an influence on the game control by the discharge port that is distributed by the distribution means of the distribution space. For example, at a certain stage during the occurrence of the advantageous game state, the game medium is predetermined. If the game medium is discharged in the direction, the illusion is as if the advantageous game state has been extended, or if the game medium is distributed to a predetermined outlet immediately after the end of the advantageous game state. It is possible to make an illusion that the probability that the lottery result satisfying the predetermined condition by the lottery means is changed to a high probability, and the interest in the distribution space can be increased during the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state. At the same time, the movement of the game medium in the distribution space, in particular, the movement distributed by the distribution means can be made exciting and exciting to enhance the interest.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation;
A starting port disposed in the gaming area;
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a game medium is received at the start port;
According to a lottery result by the lottery means, it is possible to accept game media, and a receiving port arranged at a position different from the starting port in the gaming area,
An acceptance detecting means for detecting a game medium received in the receiving port;
A distribution space in which the game medium detected by the acceptance detection means can flow, a discharge port including at least a first discharge port and a second discharge port from which the game medium can be discharged from the distribution space, and the first discharge in the discharge port. A seesaw-like effect kite where each end is located upstream of the outlet and the second discharge port and the game medium that has entered the distribution space can roll, and one or the other end of the game kit is located below Rotation tilting means for rotating and tilting the effect bowl around a predetermined axis in accordance with the lottery result of the lottery means so that the game medium is distributed from the effect basket to the first discharge port or the second discharge port. And a special accessory that distributes the game medium and discharges it outside the game area without affecting the game control,
A special character moving means for moving the special character so that the distribution space is visible or invisible to a player according to at least the lottery result of the lottery means;
It comprises at least a game granting means for granting a predetermined privilege according to the lottery result of the lottery detection and the lottery detection of the game medium by the acceptance detection means.

  Here, examples of “effects” include “in a plan view extending linearly in a rollable direction”, “in a plan view extending along the circumferential direction of the special accessory”, and the like. Can do. In addition, “in front view, linearly extending in a rollable direction”, “in front view, having a shape with the center lowered with respect to both ends”, and the like can be mentioned. And those in front view may be combined as appropriate.

  The “rotating and tilting means” is “rotating by transmitting driving from a driving means (for example, a motor or a solenoid) via a plurality of rotation transmitting members (for example, a link member or a gear member). "Things to be tilted", "Those that are directly connected to the motor shaft to be rotated and tilted", and the like.

  According to this configuration, the start port (the first start port 390, the second start port 392, and the third start port 394) disposed in the game area (the game area 37) and the start port (the first start port 390, the first start port 390) A lottery means (a first special symbol lottery means 700 and a second special symbol lottery means 710) and a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery by receiving game media (game balls) in the second start port 392 and the third start port 394). According to the lottery result of (the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710), a reception opening (a large winning port for production 398a) capable of receiving a game medium (game ball), and a reception opening ( A reception detecting means (effect opening / closing device count sensor 572) for detecting a game medium (game ball) received in the effect large winning opening 398a) and an acceptance detection means (effect opening / closing device count sensor 572). A distribution space (ball distribution space 460a) through which the released game medium (game ball) can be distributed, and a first outlet (first effect) from which the game medium (game ball) can be discharged from the distribution space (ball distribution space 460a) Outlet 476) and a second outlet (second outlet 480), outlets (first outlet 476 and second outlet 480), outlets (first outlet 476 and second stage) A seesaw-shaped effect lamp (one of which is arranged on the upstream side of the outlet 480) as desired at one end to the first outlet (first outlet 476) and the other outlet to the second outlet (second outlet 480). The first medium (470), the game medium (game ball) supplied to the medium (first stage 470), the first outlet (first outlet 476) or the second outlet ( Stage 樋 (first stage 樋 470) so that it can be distributed to any one of the second stage 480) Rotating and tilting means (ball sorting motor 484 and rotation drive mechanism 492) for rotating and tilting the game medium, the game medium (game ball) is discharged out of the game area (game area 37) without affecting the game control. Special role (production role 430) to be moved and a special space (sphere distribution space 460a) of the special role (direction role 430) according to the lottery result so as to be visible or invisible. Bonus granting means (small hit game executing means 746 and jackpot) for granting a predetermined bonus according to the detection of the accessory moving means (rotary drive unit 448) and the receiving detection means (effect open / close device count sensor 572) or the lottery result. Game execution means 748).

  As a result, when the game medium is received at the start opening and a predetermined lottery result is drawn, the entrance can be received and the special feature can move and the distribution space can be visually recognized. When the medium is received at the receiving port, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting unit, and the received game medium is supplied into the distribution space of the special bonus item. Then, the game medium supplied in the distribution space is supplied to a seesaw-like effect box, and after swinging back and forth on the effect mark, it is sent to any outlet according to the lottery result. Since it is distributed and discharged out of the game area, it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game medium that swings on the stage in the distribution space, and invites interest to which outlet the stage is distributed to by the stage. It can prevent a player's interest from falling.

  In addition, after the game medium supplied to the distribution space of the special bonus item is discharged from the distribution space, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, and the game medium is distributed to different outlets depending on the privilege granted. It is desirable to do this, and when it is distributed to a predetermined discharge port by rotation of the production rod, a privilege according to the discharge port is given, so that the distribution by the production rod in the distribution space is as follows: It is possible to make an illusion as if the game control is affected. As a result, the player's interest is further increased depending on which outlet the game medium in the distribution space is distributed to by the stage 樋, and the game media that is distributed by the stage ハ ラ is excited by the movement of the game medium. Can be enhanced.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The rotational tilting means in the special combination is
A first transmission member that rotates integrally with the effect rod and has an engaging portion at a predetermined distance from the rotation center of the effect rod;
A second transmission member that has an engaged portion that engages with the engagement portion of the first transmission member, and is rotatable about an axis that extends in a direction parallel to the axial center direction of the performance rod;
Rotation drive means for rotating the second transmission member.

  Here, as the “first transmission member” and the “second transmission member”, “a slit or slit in which each of the engaging portions and the engaged portion extends in the anti-radial direction while each has a rod shape extending in the radial direction. And the like (which is a link member), and “a gear in which the engaging portion and the engaged portion are engaged with each other”.

  According to this configuration, the first transmission member (the first transmission member having the engaging portion that rotates integrally with the effect rod (first effect rod 470) on the rotation tilting means (the ball sorting unit motor 484 and the rotation drive mechanism 492). A link member 494), a second transmission member (second link member 496) that has an engaged portion that engages with the engaging portion and is rotatable, and a second transmission member (second link member 496). Rotation drive means (ball distribution unit motor 484) for rotation drive is provided.

  As a result, the rotational drive from the rotational drive means can be transmitted to the production rod through the second transmission member and the first transmission member, and the production rod can be rotated and tilted satisfactorily. In addition, since the rotational driving means such as a motor can be arranged at a position away from the rotation center of the production rod, for example, even when the rotational driving device cannot be arranged behind the production rod due to space limitations, It is possible to transmit the rotational drive to the stage 樋 and rotate it.

  Note that the rotation angle of the rotation driving means and the rotation angle of the effect rod that rotates via the second transmission member and the first transmission member may be the same rotation angle or different rotation angles. For example, if the rotation angle of the production rod is smaller than the rotation angle of the rotation driving means, the rotation by the rotation driving device is reduced and transmitted to the production rod. The rotation control of the kite can be made finer, and the control of the movement of the game medium rolling on the stage can be made more precise.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
In the rotation tilting means, the engaging portion of the first transmission member is a slit extending in the radial direction of the first transmission member, and the engaged portion of the second transmission member is the second transmission member. The pin extends in a direction parallel to the axial direction of the pin and is slidably inserted into the slit.

  By the way, when the engaging portion and the engaged portion of the first transmission member and the second transmission member are gears, it is necessary to provide a gear at least within the range of the rotation angle of each transmission member. However, there is a problem that each transmission member becomes large and the turning range of each transmission member for transmitting the rotation from the rotation driving means becomes large. Therefore, when a gear is used, a large space is required for installing the rotation and tilting means, and there are many restrictions for disposing the special accessory. There is a problem that the rotation angle of the production fence becomes small.

  According to this configuration, as the rotation tilting means (the ball sorter motor 484 and the rotation drive mechanism 492), the slit (slit 494a) extending in the radial direction through the engaging portion of the first transmission member (first link member 494). In addition, the engaged portion of the second transmission member (second link member 496) is a pin (pin 496a) that can slide in the slit (slit 494a).

  Thereby, after inserting a pin in a slit and rotating a 2nd transmission member with a rotation drive means, while being able to transmit a rotational drive from a 2nd transmission member to a 1st transmission member, an engaging part Since the engaged portions are formed as slits and pins, respectively, the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be formed in a bar shape, and the size of these transmission members can be made as small as possible.

  Moreover, since the swivel range of the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be made smaller than that in the case of using a gear, it is possible to reduce the space for installing the rotation and tilting means. The game medium can be arranged well, the rotation angle of the effect rod can be increased as much as possible, and the effect rod can be sufficiently rotated and tilted to increase the swing of the game medium. Can be enjoyed.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
In the rotation tilting means, the length from the rotation center of the first transmission member to the engaging portion is longer than the length from the rotation center of the second transmission member to the engaged portion. And the rotation center of the second transmission member is arranged outside the turning range of the first transmission member.

  According to this configuration, the length of the first transmission member (first link member 494) is longer than the length of the second transmission member (second link member 496). Accordingly, it is necessary to increase the rotation angle of the rotation driving means with respect to the rotation angle of the effect rod. In other words, since the rotation of the rotation driving means is reduced and transmitted to the stage 樋, the rotation of the stage 回 転 can be rotated as desired by making the rotation control of the stage 回 転 more detailed, and the game medium rolls on the stage 樋. The movement can be made more interesting.

  In addition, since the rotation of the rotation driving means is reduced and transmitted to the production fence, even if there is play or rotation error in the rotation driving means, the difference is reduced and transmitted to the production fence. Error or the like can be made difficult to appear in the effect 樋, and the influence of the effect に 対 す る on the rotation control can be reduced.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The rotation tilting means further includes a rotation position detection means for detecting a rotation position of the performance kit.

  Here, as the “rotation position detecting means”, “the first transmission member or the second transmission member is provided with a detection piece, and the rotation position is detected by detecting the detection piece” or “the production line is detected” A piece or a detection unit, which detects the rotation position by detecting the detection piece or the detection unit ”,“ a rotation drive means provided with a detection unit (for example, an encoder) to detect the rotation position ”, Etc.

  According to the present configuration, the rotation position detecting means (the detection piece 498 and the ball distribution) detects the rotation position of the effect 樋 (first effect 470) in the rotation tilting means (the ball distribution unit motor 484 and the rotation drive mechanism 492). Part motor sensor 500). As a result, since the rotation position of the effect kite can be detected, the state of the rotation tilt of the effect kite can be properly grasped, and the game medium can be favorably swung and rolled on the effect kite. It is possible to reliably tilt the performance rod in a desired direction so that the game medium is discharged to the outlet.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The rotational position detecting means in the rotational tilting means,
A detection piece that rotates integrally with the second transmission member and extends in a direction different from the direction in which the second transmission member extends;
And a detection sensor for detecting the detection piece.

  By the way, it is conceivable that a detection piece for detecting the rotational position is provided in the first transmission member and the effect rod so as to detect the rotation position of the effect rod. However, in this case, since the rotational position of the production rod is directly detected, if the rotational position of the production rod is to be strictly controlled, it is necessary to increase the detection accuracy of the rotational position by the rotational position detection means. There is a problem that the cost for the position detecting means increases.

  Further, as the rotational position detecting means, it is conceivable to provide the second transmission member with a detection piece and detect the detection piece so as to detect the rotational position of the performance rod. It is conceivable that they are arranged so as to extend in the opposite direction to the extending direction. However, in this case, there is a problem that the detection piece extends to the opposite side of the first transmission member with respect to the rotation axis of the second transmission member, and the entire rotational tilting means becomes large.

  According to this configuration, the rotation position detection means (the detection piece 498 and the ball sorter motor sensor 500) includes the detection piece (the detection piece 498) extending in a direction different from the direction in which the second transmission member extends, and the detection piece (the detection piece). And a detection sensor (ball sorting motor sensor 500) for detecting the piece 498). As a result, the rotational position of the effect 樋 (first effect 470) can be detected simply by detecting the detection piece (the detection piece 498) with the detection sensor (the ball sorter motor sensor 500). The configuration related to the means can be simplified.

  In addition, since the detection piece is provided in the second transmission member, the second transmission member has a large movement, particularly when the detection piece is applied to a device in which the rotation of the rotation driving means is reduced and transmitted to the stage lamp. Since the rotation position is detected, the detection accuracy of the rotation position with respect to the performance rod is likely to be high, the detection accuracy can be increased with a simple configuration, and the cost for the rotation detection means can be suppressed from increasing. .

  Furthermore, since the detection piece extends in a direction different from the direction in which the second transmission member extends, the amount of the detection piece extending to the opposite side of the first transmission member with respect to the rotation axis of the second transmission member is possible. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation and tilting means from becoming large. In addition, as a direction where a detection piece protrudes, it is desirable to make it extend in a substantially perpendicular direction with respect to the direction where the 2nd transmission member is extended.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The detection piece of the rotational position detecting means is disposed so as to turn on substantially the same plane as the turning surface of the first transmission member, and includes a relief portion for avoiding contact with the first transmission member. It is characterized by being.

  By the way, when the detection piece that rotates integrally with the second transmission member is arranged on substantially the same plane as the swiveling surface of the first transmission member, the detection piece and the first transmission member may be different depending on the length of the detection piece and the extending direction. There is a possibility that the rotation drive cannot be transmitted from the second transmission member to the first transmission member due to the contact, and the performance rod cannot be rotated and tilted satisfactorily.

  According to this configuration, the detection piece (detection piece 498) in the rotational position detection means (the detection piece 498 and the ball sorter motor sensor 500) is substantially flush with the swivel surface of the first transmission member (first link member 494). While arrange | positioning above, the escape part which avoids a contact with a 1st transmission member (1st link member 494) is provided. Thereby, it can avoid that a detection piece and a 1st transmission member contact, a rotational drive can be transmitted from a 2nd transmission member to a 1st transmission member, and a production | generation fence can be rotated and tilted favorably. .

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The special accessory includes a role rotating body main body having a partition wall portion that is rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction and divided in a circumferential direction,
The circulation space is disposed on one side of the accessory rotating body main body that is divided in the circumferential direction by the partition wall, and at least a part of the rotation tilting means is disposed on the opposite side of the circulation space across the partition wall. Is arranged.

  According to this configuration, the accessory rotator main body (partition wall 466) having a partition wall portion (partition wall portion 466) that can be rotated around the axial center extending in the vertical direction and divided in the circumferential direction is provided on the special accessory (direction effect 430). The accessory rotating body 432) is further provided, and one space partitioned by the partition wall (partition wall 466) is used as a distribution space (ball distribution space 460a) through which game media (game balls) circulate, and rotates to the other space. A part of the tilting means (the ball sorter motor 484 and the rotation drive mechanism 492) is arranged.

  As a result, the circulation space can be made visible or invisible easily only by rotating the accessory rotator body by the special accessory moving means, so that only the area occupied by the special accessory is available. It is possible to make the distribution space appear and disappear, the area related to the installation of special objects can be made as narrow as possible, it can be easily provided in the gaming machine, and the rotation tilting means for rotating and tilting the production rod Since a part is arranged on the opposite side across the partition wall part, from the distribution space side, the rotation tilting means is made inconspicuous, and the production fence etc. in the circulation space is relatively conspicuous, to the production bowl Can attract the player's interest.

  In addition, the distribution space is arranged on one side divided by the partition wall portion of the accessory rotating body, and when the opposite side to the side where the distribution space is arranged is directed to the player, the distribution space cannot be visually recognized by the partition wall portion. The distribution space can be made visible or invisible with a simple configuration, and almost all areas when the special feature is viewed from the front can be made the distribution space. It is possible to make the movement of the game medium more enjoyable by increasing as much as possible.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game board having a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation;
A support member fixed to the game board and having a support side connection portion capable of electrical connection at a predetermined position;
An accessory-side connection part disposed at a position facing the support-side connection part of the support member and separated by a predetermined distance, and an electrical component member including a light emitting means and a motor electrically connected to the accessory-side connection part A special accessory that is supported by the support member so as to be rotatable around an axis passing through the support-side connection portion and the accessory-side connection portion of the support member at a position that is visible to the player.
A flexible harness that electrically connects the accessory-side connection portion of the special accessory and the support-side connection portion of the support member;
And a special combination moving means for rotating the special combination electrically connected by the harness in accordance with a game situation that changes when a game medium is driven into the game area. .

  Here, as the “support member”, “a member that is formed in a frame shape so as to cover the outer periphery of the through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction of the game board and is attached and supported on the rear side of the game board (for example, a back box)” , “Those that are formed in a frame shape so as to cover the outer periphery of the through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction of the game board and are attached and supported on the front side of the game board (for example, a center accessory)”.

  Further, examples of the “support side connection portion” and the “object side connection portion” include “wiring connector”, “wiring coupler”, “wiring socket or plug”, and the like.

  Further, examples of the “light emitting means” include “light emitting diode (LED)”, “incandescent lamp”, “fluorescent lamp”, “LCD”, and the like. In addition, as the “electrical member”, those light emitting means are used to make “light emitting decoration (for example, decorative body)” and “light emitting effect or effect display (for example, effect display device)”. Other examples include “sorting means for distributing game media by driving a motor or a solenoid (for example, production effect)”, “opening / closing piece that opens and closes by driving a motor or a solenoid”, and the like.

  The “harness” is an electrical wiring cord for electrical connection, and is composed of a single wire or a plurality of wires.

  In addition, as "special accessory moving means", "the one that rotates around the axis by transmitting the rotation of the motor", "the linear movement of the plunger in the solenoid is converted into a rotational movement, and it moves around the axis And the like ".

  According to this configuration, the support member (back box 410) having a support side connection portion (connector connector) that is fixed to a game board (game board 5) having a game area (game area 37) and can be electrically connected. ), An accessory-side connecting portion (connecting connector) disposed opposite to the support-side connecting portion (connecting connector), and an electrical component (first effect rod 470 or decoration) connected to the accessory-side connecting portion (connecting connector). Special member having at least a member 502 and the like and supported by the support member (back box 410) so as to be rotatable around an axis passing through the support side connection portion (connection connector) and the accessory side connection portion (connection connector). (Production effect 430), a harness (wiring cord) for electrically connecting the accessory side connection portion and the support side connection portion, and special accessory moving means for rotating and moving the special accessory according to the game situation (Rotary drive unit 448) That.

  By the way, when an electrical member such as a light emitting means is provided in a rotating accessory (special accessory), as an electrical connection method for supplying electricity to the electrical member, the center of the rotating shaft is connected to the accessory. In addition to providing a plurality of annular conductors in a concentric circle shape, and providing a conductive brush that contacts each conductor from the outside of the accessory, it was electrically connected to the rotating accessory . However, in this case, since the conductor and the conductive brush are in contact with each other so as to slide with each other, the conductor and the conductive brush are worn by the sliding, and a contact failure may occur or the current may not be supplied. As a result, the electrical member in the accessory may not operate, and the production by the electrical member cannot be performed, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, since the conductor and the conductive brush are worn, the durability is low.

  As a result, the support-side connection portion and the accessory-side connection portion are arranged opposite to each other on the rotation axis, so that the support-side connection portion and the accessory-side connection are connected even if the special accessory having the electrical component is rotated. It is possible to minimize the movement (twisting, etc.) of the harness connecting the parts, preventing the harness from being disconnected or disconnecting the harness from each connection part. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating by reliably operating the electrical components arranged on the object.

  In addition, since the support member and the special accessory are connected by the harness, the connecting portion is not slid and worn, the durability can be improved, and the electrical connection is ensured. The electric member can be operated, and a desired effect by the electric member can be surely performed, thereby preventing the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the movement of the harness can be minimized, it is possible to sufficiently cope with the wiring cord used as the harness without using a highly flexible and expensive one. By using it, the cost concerning a harness can be reduced.

  It should be noted that the rotation angle of the special accessory is preferably within 360 degrees, and the rotation angle is preferably smaller. Thereby, the amount of twisting of the harness can be reduced, and disconnection of the harness and disconnection of the harness can be prevented.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The accessory-side connecting portion connected to the motor as the electrical member in the special accessory, and the support-side connecting portion of the support member are respectively disposed on the rotation axis of the special accessory. It is characterized by that.

  By the way, as the position of the accessory-side connection portion is further away from the rotation axis of the special accessory, the amount of movement of the accessory-side connection portion due to the rotation of the special accessory increases, and the harness is connected to the accessory-side connection portion. There is also a risk that the movement of the harness becomes large and the harness is likely to be disconnected or the connection with the connection portion is easily disconnected.

  According to this configuration, the accessory-side connecting portion (connecting connector) and the support-side connecting portion (connecting connector) connected to the motor (rotating portion motor 526) disposed in the special accessory (directing accessory 430) are provided. These are arranged on the rotation axis of the special bonus item (direction bonus 430). As a result, the movement of the harness connected to the motor can be reduced as much as possible, the risk that the harness is disconnected, etc., can be reduced as much as possible, and problems related to the operation of the motor can occur. Can be suppressed. In other words, for example, when driving a sorting means such as a production rod arranged in a special accessory of a motor, the light-emitting decorative body has little influence on the game even if it does not emit light, The allocating operation by the allocating means is indispensable for the game effect. If the allocating means does not operate, the game may be interrupted and the player's interest may be greatly reduced. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of defects in the game as much as possible and prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The special accessory includes an accessory rotating body main body having a partition wall portion that is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in the vertical direction and is divided in the circumferential direction,
The light emitting means as the electrical component is disposed in at least one space divided in the circumferential direction by the partition wall of the accessory rotating body.

  According to this structure, the rotation axis of the special feature (direction effect 430) is arranged on the special feature (direction effect 430) so as to extend in the vertical direction, and can be rotated around its axis. The accessory rotating body main body (the accessory rotating body 432) having the partition wall portion (partition wall portion 466) divided in the direction is further provided, and the light emitting means (at least one space partitioned by the partition wall portion (partition wall portion 466)) LED, etc.) are arranged.

  Thus, as described above, even if the special accessory is rotated, it can be reliably electrically connected to the light emitting means in the special accessory, so the special accessory moving means rotates the accessory rotating body. Thus, even if the light emitting means (light emitting decorative body) is made visible or invisible, the light emitting means can be surely made to emit light, and the player can make the light visible or impossible to see. It is possible to entertain the lighting effect and prevent the interest from deteriorating. In addition, when different light emitting means (light emitting decorative bodies) are arranged according to the space divided by the partition wall, different light emitting decorations can be made by the rotation of the accessory rotating body, making the player more entertaining , Can be of interest.

  In addition, a distribution space in which a game medium can be distributed may be arranged in one space partitioned by the partition wall portion, so that when the special bonus is rotated, the player can visually recognize the distribution space. In addition, the light emitting means (light emitting decorative body) can be made visible, and the effects of the special actors can be diversified to further enhance the interest of the player.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The circulation space is arranged on one side of the accessory rotating body main body divided in the circumferential direction by the partition wall, and a decorative body having the light emitting means is arranged on the opposite side across the partition wall. It is characterized by.

  According to this configuration, the distribution space (sphere distribution space 460a) is sandwiched between the partition wall portion (partition wall portion 466) of the accessory rotating body main body (the accessory rotation body 432) in the special accessory (direction accessory 430). On the other side, a decorative body (decorative member 502) is arranged. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the player visually recognize the distribution space or to make the decorative body visible by rotating the special character, and to entertain the distribution space and the decorative body depending on the game situation. As described above, since it can be electrically connected to the motor and the light emitting means in a good state, it is possible to reliably actuate the stage lamp in the distribution space and the decorative body. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
At least a part of the rotation tilting means is disposed between the partition wall of the accessory rotating body and the decorative body.

  According to this configuration, the rotation tilting means (the ball distributing unit motor 484 and the rotation) is provided between the partition wall (partition wall 466) and the decorative body (decoration member 502) of the accessory rotating body main body (the accessory rotating body 432). A part of the drive mechanism 492) is arranged. Thereby, since a part of rotation tilting means is arrange | positioned between a partition part and a decoration body, a rotation tilting means can be made not conspicuous from the decoration body side also from a distribution space side, and a distribution space is relatively. It is possible to attract the interest of the production 樋 etc. by making the production 樋 and decorations stand out.

[About the display area of the effect display device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. FIG. 55 and FIG. 56 are views of the effect display device as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 55, the effect display device 115 includes a first determination result display area 115a, a second determination result display area 115b, a common symbol display area 115c, and a hold display area 1150. .

  The first determination result display area 115a corresponds to the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700, more specifically, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first special symbol display unit 84. This is the area where the results are displayed.

  The second determination result display area 115b corresponds to the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710, more specifically, the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the second special symbol display unit 86. This is the area where the results are displayed.

  The first determination result display area 115 a and the second determination result display area 115 b are arranged in the lower left area of the effect display device 115. Each has a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of colors, and a lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 according to the display pattern displayed after performing a predetermined effect. The result is derived. However, the lottery result is not derived at the same time in the first determination result display area 115a and the second determination result display area 115b, and is derived based on the order in which the game balls are won at the respective start ports 390, 392, 394. .

  The common symbol display area 115c is an area for deriving one of the lottery results of the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710. In the common symbol display area 115c, one symbol group composed of a plurality of (for example, three) symbol strings is displayed. After the variation effect of this one symbol group is performed, the combination of symbols that have stopped is displayed. The lottery result is derived. The variation effect time of one symbol group is the same as or substantially the same as the above-described variation time. The common symbol display area 115c occupies at least two-thirds or more of all display areas in the effect display device 115. The first determination result display area 115a, the second determination result display area 115b, and the hold display area 1150 are clearly partitioned. Thus, the player grasps the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 by a combination of one symbol group displayed in the common symbol display area 115c.

  The lottery results derived to the common symbol display area 115c are derived in the order in which the game balls win the respective start openings 390, 392, 394. That is, since the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 are not derived simultaneously, one symbol group includes the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 700. It functions as a common symbol for deriving a lottery result in the symbol lottery means 710. Thereby, even if the lottery is performed by both the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710, it becomes a very clear configuration as seen from the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. .

  Note that one symbol group displayed in the common symbol display area 115c differs between an effect of deriving a lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and an effect of deriving a lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710. Production is performed in a manner.

  Specifically, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, any one of the variable effect patterns is selected and executed. . A variation effect is performed based on the selected variation effect pattern.

  When the selected variation effect pattern is a deviation variation that does not reach, the variation effect pattern is set according to the number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation counter 703. For example, if the number of reserves in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 3 or more, the fluctuation time is relatively long and the fluctuation effect is performed. If the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 2 or less, An off-change effect is performed with a shorter change time than when the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 3 or more. Here, “displacement fluctuation” is a fluctuation in which the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is out and the reach effect is not performed.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, the variation effect is performed based on a predetermined variation effect pattern. In the present embodiment, this specific variation effect pattern is a variation accompanied by a reach effect (hereinafter referred to as “reach variation”). However, when the so-called “short-time gaming state” in which the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720 is advantageous to the player is occurring, another variation effect different from the reach variation is performed.

  Thus, in the case where the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c and the case where the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, The degree of interest that the person is attracted to the common symbol display area 115c will be different. That is, when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, a reach effect is performed. Therefore, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c and when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, Since the variation mode is different, a monotonous game can be avoided and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  The hold display area 1150 is arranged in the lower right area of the effect display device 115, and includes a first hold display area 1151 and a second hold display area 1152. The first hold display area 1151 and the second hold display area 1152 are adjacent to each other.

  The first hold display area 1151 has four hold storage display sections, a first hold storage display section 1151a to a fourth hold storage display section 1151d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The second hold display area 1152 has four hold storage display sections, a fifth hold storage display section 1152a to an eighth hold storage display section 1152d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. That is, the sum of the hold storage display section of the first hold display area 1151 and the hold storage display section of the second hold display area 1152, the upper limit value (first predetermined number) of the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 703, and the first The sum of the upper limit value (second predetermined number) of holding by the 2 special symbol holding counter 713 is the same number. More specifically, the number of the reserved storage display parts in the first hold display area 1151 is equal to the first predetermined number, and the number of the hold display parts in the second hold display area 1152 is equal to the second predetermined number. The number is the same.

  In addition, the first reserved storage display unit 1151a, the second reserved storage display unit 1151b, the third reserved storage display unit 1151c, the fourth reserved storage display unit 1151d, the fifth reserved storage display unit 1152a, the sixth The on-hold storage display unit 1152b, the seventh on-hold storage display unit 1152c, and the eighth on-hold storage display unit 1152d are regularly arranged in this order in the left-right direction, and the derivation to the common symbol display area 115c is as described above. Derived in the order listed. Thereby, the order derived | led-out to the common symbol display area 115c can be grasped | ascertained clearly.

  Each hold storage display unit 1151a to 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 is held by the first special symbol hold counter 713, which is a first display mode indicating that the hold can be held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Is displayed in any one of the second display mode indicating that it is held and the third display mode indicating that it is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703.

  Each of the on-hold storage display portions 1152a to 1152d in the second on-hold display area 1152 can be displayed in any one of the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode. Information regarding the number of holds in the special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 may be hidden.

  Each display mode will be described. In FIG. 55, the display modes of the seventh hold storage display unit 1152c and the eighth hold storage display unit 1152d are the first display mode, the first hold storage display unit 1151a, and the third display mode. The display mode of the hold storage display unit 1151c, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a, and the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is the second display mode, and the second hold storage display unit 1151b and the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d. Is the third display mode.

  In the present embodiment, the first display mode displays a frame (blue in the frame), which means that the first special symbol hold counter 703 can hold the frame. The second display mode means that a character is displayed and held by the second special symbol hold counter 713. The third display mode is displayed in red, which means that it is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Thus, the display mode is different between the display mode meaning that the first special symbol hold counter 703 holds and the display mode which means that the second special symbol hold counter 713 holds. .

  In FIG. 56, all of the first hold storage display unit 1151a to the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d are displayed in the first display mode. In addition, all of the fifth reserved storage display unit 1152a to the eighth reserved storage display unit 1152d are not displayed.

  Note that “non-display” means that none of the first display mode, the third display mode, and the second display mode is displayed. That is, the information regarding the number of holds of the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 is not displayed.

[Functional configuration of display device control board]
FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the display device control board in the peripheral board. As shown in FIG. 57, the display device control board 116 includes a first special symbol image display control means 851, a second special symbol image display control means 852, an effect image display control means 800, and a merge hold display control means 860. And a merged reservation order storage means 870, a first special symbol reservation number storage means 872, a second special symbol reservation number storage means 874, and an effect reservation count means 855. The merge hold display control means 860 further includes a holdable information image display control means 8601, a first hold information image display control means 8602, a second hold information image display control means 8603, an identification code image display control means 8604, and a merge hold order. Image display control means 8605 is included. The display device control board 116 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 131 via the command receiving means 750 of the peripheral control board 662.

  The first special symbol image display control means 851 derives and displays the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 after performing a predetermined effect in the first determination result display area 115a.

  The second special symbol image display control means 852 derives and displays the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 after performing a predetermined effect in the second determination result display area 115b.

  The effect image display control means 800 specifies that the command receiving means 750 has won the first start opening 390 and the second and third start openings 392, 394 from the main control board 131. One of the lottery results of the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived and displayed in the common symbol display area 115c. The effect image display control means 800 also displays various effect images according to the game situation.

  In the common symbol display area 115c, when a predetermined effect for deriving a lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 (that is, a variable display of symbols) is performed, the second special symbol lottery means 710 A predetermined effect for deriving the lottery result is not performed. Further, when the predetermined effect for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is performed, the predetermined effect for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is not performed.

  The merge hold display control means 860 is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703, the derivation order of the lottery results derived by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 derived in the common symbol display area 115c. The hold number information and the hold number information held by the second special symbol hold counter 713 are displayed and controlled so that they can be recognized in the hold display area 1150.

  Further, the merge hold display control means 860 performs display control so that the hold related information relating to the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 can be recognized in the hold display area 1150.

  Here, the “holding related information” is, for example, the holding number information indicating the number held by the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the second special symbol holding counter 713, the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the second Holdable information indicating that the special symbol hold counter 713 can hold, the lottery result based on the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (that is, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700) and the second special symbol A lottery result based on hold by the hold counter 713 (that is, a lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710) corresponds to a hold derivation order indicating the order in which the lottery result is drawn to the common symbol display area 115c.

  Further, the holdable information image display control means 8601 is configured so that each of the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 has a predetermined first value for the holdable information which is one of the hold related information. Despite being able to hold up to an upper limit of a predetermined number (for example, 4) and a second predetermined number (for example, 4), only the holding by the first special symbol holding counter 703 can be held up to the first predetermined number. Is displayed in the hold display area 1150.

  The first hold information image display control means 8602 and the second hold information image display control means 8603 are each a hold number information and a second special symbol applied to the first special symbol hold counter 703 which is one of the hold related information. The number-of-holds information relating to the hold counter 713 is displayed in the hold display area 1150.

  The identification code image display control means 8604 is the number-of-holds information and the second special symbol hold on the first special symbol hold counter 703 displayed by the first hold information image display control means 8602 and the second hold information image display control means 8603. A predetermined identification code is added to the number-of-holds information on the counter 713 and displayed.

  The merge reservation order image display control means 8605 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 are 1 or more. The derivation order is displayed in a recognizable manner.

  The merging hold order storage means 870 stores the derivation order of the lottery results by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 derived to the common symbol display area 115c. More specifically, information for specifying that the command receiving means 750 has won each of the start ports 390, 392, 394 is stored based on the order received from the main control board 131.

  The first special symbol holding number storage means 872 receives a command from the main control board 131 for the command receiving means 750 to specify that “the first starting port 390 has been won”, and is still drawn in the common symbol display area 115c. The number of results that are not derived and displayed is stored. This number corresponds to the number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation counter 703.

  The second special symbol holding number storage means 874 receives a command from the main control board 131 for specifying that the command receiving means 750 “wins the second and third starting openings 392 and 394” and is still a common symbol. The number of lottery results not being derived and displayed is stored in the display area 115c. This number corresponds to the number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation counter 713.

  The production hold count means 855 will be described in detail later, but when the production point P reaches 10 points, the special production until the change based on the hold that triggered the production point P to 10 points is performed. This is a counter for holding display.

[Production in the hold display area]
Next, a specific effect performed in the hold display area 1150 of the effect display device 115 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 63 are all diagrams showing effects in the hold display area.

  FIG. 58A shows the display of the hold display area 1150 when the number of holds held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of holds held by the second special symbol hold counter 713 are both zero. It is a figure which shows an aspect. At this time, the holdable information image display control means 8601 displays a recognizable upper limit value that can be held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Specifically, all of the first hold storage display unit 1151a to the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 are displayed in the first display mode. In the present embodiment, the number of the reserved storage display units displayed in the first display mode corresponds to the number of holds that can be held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. On the other hand, the fifth hold storage display portion 1152a to the eighth hold storage display portion 1152d of the second hold display area 1152 are all hidden (the two-dot chain line in the figure is hidden). Means the same).

  Note that the identification code image display control means 8604 attaches identification codes, for example, by numbers “1” to “8” to the first reserved storage display section 1151a to the eighth reserved storage display section 1152d, respectively. If it is displayed in any one of the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode, this identification code can be recognized (in the case of the second display mode in the figure). However, since the character display and the identification code are displayed alternately, they can be recognized). If it is not displayed, this identification code cannot be recognized.

  In FIG. 58 (b), when a game ball wins at the first start opening 390 and is held by the first special symbol holding counter 703 (specifically, the command receiving means 750 receives “winning at the first start opening 390”). When a command for specifying “what has been done” is received from the main control board 131), the first hold information display unit 1151a, which is the extreme position of the first display mode, displays the first hold information image display control means 8602. Thus, the display is controlled from the first display mode to the third display mode. Thereby, it can be recognized that the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is “1”. When the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is N (N is a natural number greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to the first predetermined number), the position from the extreme end of the first display mode arranged in a line , N third display modes are displayed adjacent to each other.

  In FIG. 58 (c), when a game ball wins a prize at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 (specifically, the command receiving means 750 indicates “to the second start port 392 or the third start port 394”). When a command for specifying “winning” is received from the main control board 131), the second hold storage display unit 1151b is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode by the merged hold order image display control means 8605. The display is controlled. Thereby, it can be grasped that the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is one and the number of holdings by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is one.

  In addition, when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a performs display control from non-display to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 8601. Is done. At this time, it can be felt from the player that the upper limit of holding is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

  The derivation order derived to the common symbol display area 115c is derived in the order of the first reserved storage display unit 1151a to the eighth reserved storage display unit 1152d. That is, the command receiving means 750 is led out to the common symbol display area 115c based on the winning order to the start ports 390, 392, 394 received from the main control board 131. Accordingly, in FIG. 58 (c), the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first reserved memory display unit 1151a and the second special symbol displayed on the second reserved memory display unit 1151b. It is derived in the order of the lottery results by the lottery means 710. Thus, the derivation order derived to the common symbol display area 115c can be grasped for the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710.

  In FIG. 58D, when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the first hold memory display unit 1151a. However, the second hold information image display control means 8603 controls the display from the third display mode to the second display mode. Further, the second hold storage display unit 1151b is controlled to be changed from the second display mode to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 8601. The fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is displayed (maintained) in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 8601. As described above, the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is zero and the number of holdings by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is N (N is a natural number not less than 1 and not more than the first predetermined number). 58, the second display mode is adjacent to the first reserved storage display unit 1151a which is the end position of the first display mode arranged in a line as shown in FIG. Is displayed. In addition, the first display mode is a number corresponding to the first predetermined number (for example, four), and the Nth second display mode from the first reserved storage display unit 1151a which is the extreme end position. The second hold storage display unit 1151b, which is adjacent to the first hold storage display unit 1151a, and the second display mode displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1151a are arranged and displayed in a line.

  In FIG. 58 (e), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the first hold memory display unit 1151a. However, the holdable information image display control means 8601 controls the display from the second display mode to the first display mode. Further, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is controlled to be hidden from the first display mode. Thereby, it is felt from the player that the holding upper limit is variable. Therefore, it becomes interested in when the upper limit of holding increases, and the interest is enhanced.

  FIG. 59A shows the sum of the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 and the number of hold storage display sections in the first hold display area 1151 (four). It is a figure which shows the display mode of each holding | maintenance memory | storage display part 1151a-1152d in the case where is same. However, neither the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 nor the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is zero.

  FIG. 59 (a) shows that the first hold memory display unit 1151a, the second hold memory display unit 1151b, and the fourth hold memory display unit 1151d are displayed in the third display mode by the merged hold order image display control means 8605. It is displayed. The third hold storage display unit 1151c is displayed in the second display mode by the merge hold order image display control means 8605. Further, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is displayed in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 8601. As a result, the number of holds held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of holds held by the second special symbol hold counter 713 can be recognized. Derivation to the common symbol display area 115c is performed in the order of the first hold display unit 1151a, the second hold storage display unit 1151b, the third hold storage display unit 1151c, and the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d. Therefore, the player can also grasp the derivation order to the common symbol display area 115c.

  In addition, since the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is displayed in the first display mode, the first special symbol hold counter 703 can grasp that the number of hold that can be held is one.

  In FIG. 59 (b), when a game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the fifth on-hold storage display unit 1152a is changed from the first display mode by the merged on-hold order image display control means 8605. Display control is performed in two display modes. Further, the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is controlled to be displayed from the non-display state to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 8601.

  In FIG. 59 (c), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold memory display unit. The second display mode and the third display mode are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. The display of the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d is shifted to the display of the third hold storage display unit 1151c, and the display of the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is shifted to the display of the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d. The The fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is display-controlled from the second display mode to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 8601. The sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is maintained in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 8601. At this time, the player does not feel that the upper limit of the hold has changed as viewed from the player.

  In FIG. 59 (d), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1151a is started, as in FIG. 59 (c). The second display mode and the third display mode displayed on each hold storage display unit are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page.

  In FIG. 59 (e), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold memory display unit. The second display mode and the third display mode are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. , Respectively. Then, the sixth reserved storage display unit 1152b is hidden from the first display mode. Further, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is displayed (maintained) in the first display mode by the hold display area 1150. Thereby, the player feels that the upper limit value of the holding is variable.

  FIG. 60A shows a hold display area 1150 when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is four, which is the same as the first predetermined number, and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is zero. The display mode is shown. At this time, the hold storage display units 1151a to 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 are controlled to be displayed in the third display mode by the first hold information image display control means 8602. Also, each of the on-hold storage display portions 1152a to 1152d in the second on-hold display area 1152 is not displayed.

  In FIG. 60 (b), when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is displayed by the merge hold order image display control means 8605 from the non-display to the second display. Display control is performed in the display mode. Thereby, from the viewpoint of the player, it feels as if it has been held beyond the holding upper limit, and the interest is enhanced.

  FIG. 61A shows that the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 reaches the second predetermined number, and all the hold display portions 1151a to 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 The second hold information image display control means 8603 controls the display in the second display mode. In addition, all of the hold display portions 1152a to 1152d in the second hold display area 1152 are controlled to be displayed in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 8601. At this time, from the viewpoint of the player, it seems that the upper limit of holding is increased to 8 which is the sum of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number, and the interest is enhanced. As described above, when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is zero and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is N (N is 1 or more and the first predetermined number or less). Natural number), N second display modes and a number of first display modes corresponding to the first predetermined number are displayed. At this time, N second display modes are displayed adjacent to the first reserved storage display unit 1151a which is the extreme end position of the first display mode arranged in a row, and The number of first display modes corresponding to a predetermined number is a position adjacent to the Nth second display mode from the first reserved storage display unit 1151a which is the end position (for example, N = 4). (The position of the fifth reserved storage display portion 1152a) and the second display mode are arranged in a row. Note that the identification code is the first reserved storage in which the identification code corresponding to 1 to the identification code corresponding to the sum of the first predetermined number and N (8 in FIG. 61A) is the end position. Displayed in order from the display unit 1151a.

  The state as shown in FIG. 61A is likely to occur when, for example, the normal symbol lottery means 720 is in a so-called “short-time gaming state” in which a lottery advantageous to the player is performed. This is because, in the “short-time gaming state”, the pair of movable pieces 396 frequently opens and closes, so that it becomes easy for the game ball to win the third start port 394.

  At this time, when a game ball wins the second starting port 392, the command receiving means 750 receives from the peripheral board 660 a command for specifying "winning the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394". However, a command for specifying the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is also received. That is, when the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is the second predetermined number (upper limit), even if a command for specifying the hold number in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is received, the second predetermined number Therefore, all the displays in the storage storage display units 1151a to 1152d in the first hold display area 1151 and the second hold display area 1152 are maintained by the holdable information image display control means 8601. (See FIG. 61 (b)).

  In FIG. 61 (c), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold storage display unit. The second display mode is shifted to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. The display of the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d is shifted to the display of the third hold storage display unit 1151c. Then, the display of the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d is display-controlled from the second display mode to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 8601. Further, the eighth reserved storage display portion 1152d is not displayed. Further, the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b and the seventh hold storage display unit 1152c are maintained in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 8601.

  FIG. 62A shows a display mode of the hold display area 1150 when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is two and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is three. The first hold storage display unit 1151a and the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d are controlled to be displayed in the third display mode by the merged hold order image display control means 8605. The second hold storage display unit 1151b, the third hold storage display unit 1151c, and the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a are controlled to be displayed in the second display mode by the merged hold order image display control means 8605. The sixth hold storage display unit 1152b and the seventh hold storage display unit 1152c are controlled to be displayed in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 8601.

  In FIG. 62 (b), when a game ball wins the first start opening 390, the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is changed from the first display mode to the third display mode by the merged hold order image display control means 8605. Display controlled. Thereby, it can be confirmed that the player feels that the holding upper limit has been increased first, but it is not a mere production that seems to have increased, although the holding upper limit has not actually increased, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to feel the feeling that the holding upper limit has actually increased.

  In FIG. 62 (c), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold memory display unit. The second display mode and the third display mode are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. The fourth hold storage display unit 1151d displays the third hold storage display unit 1151c, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a displays the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d, The display on hold storage display section 1152b is shifted to the display on fifth hold storage display section 1152a. Then, the display of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is display-controlled from the third display mode to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 8601. The seventh hold storage display unit 1152c is maintained in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 8601.

  In FIG. 62D, when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is moved from the first display mode by the merge hold order image display control means 8605. Display control is performed in the second display mode. The eighth hold storage display unit 1152d is controlled to be displayed from the non-display state to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 8601. The display modes of the first hold storage display unit 1151a, the second hold storage display unit 1151b, the third hold storage display unit 1151c, the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d, and the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a are as follows. Maintained. Thereby, from the viewpoint of the player, it can be felt that the upper limit of holding has increased, and the interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, as the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the hold storage display units 1152a to 1152d in the second hold display area 1152 change from the non-display to the first display mode. Alternatively, display control is performed in the second display mode. In this way, interest is enhanced by the player feeling that the upper limit of the holding is increased.

  In FIG. 62 (e), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold storage display unit. The second display mode and the third display mode are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. The fourth hold storage display unit 1151d displays the third hold storage display unit 1151c, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a displays the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d, The display on hold storage display section 1152b is shifted to the display on fifth hold storage display section 1152a. Then, the display of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is controlled from the second display mode to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 8601. The seventh hold storage display unit 1152c is maintained in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 8601. The eighth reserved storage display unit 1152d is not displayed.

  FIG. 63A shows the display mode of the hold display area 1150 when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 1 and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is 4. The first hold storage display unit 1151a, the second hold storage display unit 1151b, the third hold storage display unit 1151c, and the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d are displayed on the second display by the merged hold order image display control unit 8605. The display is controlled in the form. The fifth hold storage display portion 1152a is controlled to be displayed in the third display mode by the holdable information image display control means 8601. The sixth hold storage display unit 1152b, the seventh hold storage display unit 1152c, and the eighth hold storage display unit 1152d are displayed in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 8601.

  At this time, if a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the command receiving means 750 will specify a command that “has won the second start port 392 or the third start port 394”. Is received from the peripheral board 660, but a command for specifying the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is also received. That is, when the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is the second predetermined number (upper limit), even if a command for specifying the hold number in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is received, the second predetermined number Therefore, all the displays in the storage storage display units 1151a to 1152d in the first hold display area 1151 and the second hold display area 1152 are maintained by the merge hold order image display control means 8605. (See FIG. 63B).

  In FIG. 63 (c), when a game ball wins the first starting port 390, the command receiving means 750 receives a command specifying “winning the first starting port 390” from the peripheral board 660. Along with this, a command for specifying the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is also received. Before the game ball wins the first start port 390 (see FIG. 63B), the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 1, so the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is The display is controlled from the first display mode to the third display mode by the merge pending order image display control means 8605.

  Next, various control processes executed on the main board 600 according to the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

[Main system processing]
First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main system processing executed by the CPU mounted on the main control board of the main board.

  As shown in FIG. 64, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 602 (see FIG. 51) first executes a power-on process (step S10). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 606 (see FIG. 51) is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). If normal, the backup data is stored in the RAM 606. A process for returning to the state at the time of power failure occurrence (recovery process) is executed according to the backup data stored, and if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM 606 is erased and the device setting related to the CPU 602 (normally Initial settings and interrupt timing settings). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM 606 as backup data. If the RAM erase switch for instructing the deletion of the backup data stored in the RAM 606 is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM 606 is cleared and normal initialization is performed. If backup data is not stored in the RAM 606 mounted on the main control board 131 in the power-on process, the RAM 606 is cleared and normal initial setting is performed. In the power-on process, a power-on command indicating that the main control board 131 (see FIG. 51) has been activated can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 662 (see FIG. 52) when normal initial setting is executed. The process of setting to is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 662 that the main control board 131 has been activated. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM 606, and the power supply is started when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again. Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the CPU 602 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board (not shown). That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is supplied to the device. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 131 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when the power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 602 mounted on the main control board 131 in step S20, processing at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S40).

  When the power cut occurs, the operation of the gaming machine is performed before the power failure when the power supply voltage supplied to the power board after the power failure is restored (24V in this embodiment) (hereinafter referred to as “power recovery”). In order to start from the state, the state at the time of occurrence of a power failure is stored in the RAM 606 as backup data. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power failure occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but as a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when a power-off occurs. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the CPU 602 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, the checksum of the RAM 606 is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 606 (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 606 before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 602 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 606 (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 602 prohibits access to the RAM 606 (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”), the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that the process described above cannot return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the CPU 602 of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, even when the power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and the infinite loop of FIG. 65 is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the CPU 602 is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 602 mounted on the main control board 131 of the main board 600 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 602 executes the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process in step S60, the various sensors described above (gate sensor 630, first start port sensor 644, second start port sensor 646, third start port sensor 648, effect opening / closing device count sensor 572, jackpot game) A process of monitoring the detection signal of the switchgear count sensor 640 or the like) is executed.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 197 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 82 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 630 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing the opening / closing control of the movable piece 396 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S100, a series of processing from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the start of the winning game is executed, and the stage winning prize opening 398a and the jackpot gaming prize winning opening 400a (whichever The processing for performing the opening / closing control of FIG.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 131 to the peripheral control board 662 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission processing in step S270, processing for transmitting the command set in the output data setting processing (step S260) to the peripheral control board 662 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 602 mounted on the main control board 131 in the above-described non-winning random number updating process (step S30) and winning random number updating process (step S70) will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, when it is determined to start the jackpot game, the random number for determining whether or not to start the jackpot game, whether to start the jackpot game, Design random number used to determine whether or not to make a promising jackpot, to determine whether or not to reach reach when it is determined not to start a probabilistic jackpot game, non-probabilistic jackpot game and small hit game in jackpot judgment The reach determination random number used, the fluctuation pattern random number used to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86, and the pair of movable pieces 396 are opened. There is a random number for normal symbol determination used for determining whether to control the state (normal symbol determination).

  Note that the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol whose display is controlled by the effect display device 115 may be determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the winning random number update process, whether or not to determine the success / failure determination random number, the design random number, and the pair of movable pieces 396 related to the start of the big hit game or the small hit game are set to an open state in which the game ball can be easily received. The random number for judgment per ordinary symbol related to whether or not is updated. That is, the random numbers used for the start of the jackpot game and the determination regarding whether or not the pair of movable pieces 396 are controlled to be opened are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing so, the probability (probability to determine that the hit game is started, probability to determine that the pair of movable pieces 396 are controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period in each random number can be made constant, and the game It is possible to prevent a person from becoming disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number irrespective of the occurrence of the winning gaming state and the normal symbol display result are updated. The random numbers updated on the main control board 131 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number update processing, when the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not has made one round, the determination is made to start counting next. The initial value determination random number or the like for determining the initial value of the random number is also updated.

  In the present embodiment, as means for obtaining the random number for determination of success / failure, two means, a random number extraction means for determination per first special symbol 702 and a random number extraction means for determination per second special symbol 712, are provided. It is good also as a structure which provides this.

[Special symbol / Special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process. In this special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, first, second, and third start-up prize winning processes (step S110) are performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received in the first start port 390, the second start port 392, and the third start port 394, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first, second, and third start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked (steps S120 to S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

  When the first, second, and third start opening winning processes (step S110) are finished, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If the processing flag is 0 (in step S120). YES) The fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described later in detail, it is determined whether or not to start the big hit game or the small hit game, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 is determined, and the variation pattern is set as the variation pattern. A correspondingly set fluctuation time (the time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation display to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86) is set in the timer. The processing flag is updated to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the process during change (step S180) is executed. In the changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, if it is determined that the big hit is made in the variation start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to “3”. If neither the big win nor the small win is determined, the process selection flag is updated to “0”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the jackpot type (long hit or short hit) is determined, and the opening / closing operation of the stage jackpot 398a and / or jackpot game jackpot 400a is controlled according to the jackpot type. The number of rounds, the opening time and the number of game balls to be awarded are set, and the processing flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). If the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), a small hit game process (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game processing, the number of times of opening and the opening time for controlling the opening operation of the large winning prize opening 398a are set, and the processing flag is updated to “6”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), the process proceeds to step S230.

  In step S230, it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). If the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), a special electric utility jackpot control process (step S240) is executed. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, the stage winning prize opening 398a and the jackpot gaming prize winning opening 400a based on the number of rounds set in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the opening time, and the number of game balls to be awarded. When the jackpot game is finished, it is determined whether or not to operate the probability variation function and the time reduction function, and the process flag is updated to “0”.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 5 in step S230 (NO in step S230), the special electric accessory small hit control process (step S250) is executed. In this special electric accessory small hitting control process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 398a for production is controlled based on the number of opening times, the opening time and the limited number set in the small hitting game process (step S220). When the small hit game ends, processing for updating the processing flag to “0” is performed.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S250 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[Random number storage means for special symbols]
Next, based on FIG. 68, the storage system by the hold order storage means will be described. FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of a storage area related to the hold order. A RAM 606 (see FIG. 51) provided in the CPU 602 of the main control board 131 includes a special symbol random number storage area 6061 and a processing area 6062. Various data (random determination number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644, and the second start port sensor 646 or the third start port sensor 648 The various data acquired based on the fact that the game ball was detected (random number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 by the holding order storage unit 790 in the order in which the game balls are detected. Remembered. The special symbol random number storage area 6061 is divided into eight storage areas from a first storage area 6061a to an eighth storage area 6061h. The first storage area 6061a, the second storage area 6061b, the third storage area 6061c, The fourth storage area 6061d, the fifth storage area 6061e, the sixth storage area 6061f, the seventh storage area 6061g, and the eighth storage area 6061h are stored in this order.

  Each of the eight storage areas from the first storage area 6061a to the eighth storage area 6061h and the processing area 6062 has three storages: a random number storage area for determination of success / failure, a random number storage area for probability variation determination, and a special symbol type storage area. Has an area. The determination random number storage area is an area for storing a determination random number used for determining whether to start a big hit game or a small hit game. In addition, the random number storage area for probability variation determination stores a symbol random number used for determining whether or not the stop symbol pattern of the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is a probability variation symbol in the case of a big hit. It is an area to do. In the special symbol type storage area, whether the success / failure determination random number and the symbol random number are data acquired by detecting the game ball in the first starting port sensor 644, the second starting port sensor 646 or the third This is an area for storing whether the data is acquired by detecting the game ball in the start port sensor 648. In the present embodiment, when the success / failure determination random number and the design random number are extracted by the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644, the first special symbol type is set as the second start port sensor 646 or the second start number sensor 644. If it is extracted by the detection of the game ball by the 3 start sensor 648, the second special symbol type is stored.

  When the first start port sensor 644 detects a game ball, the first special symbol per-determination random number extraction means 702 extracts the winning / failure determination random number and the design random number. The extracted success / failure random numbers and design random numbers are stored in the success / failure determination random number storage area and the probability variation determination random number storage area by the hold order storage unit 790, respectively. Further, the first special symbol type is stored in the special symbol type storage area.

  When a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 646 or the third start port sensor 648, a random number for determination per second special symbol is extracted in the same manner as when a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 644. The means 712 extracts a random number for determination of success / failure and a design random number. The extracted success / failure determination random numbers and symbol random numbers are stored in the determination / non-permission determination random number storage area and the probability variation determination random number storage area, respectively. Further, the second special symbol type is stored in the special symbol type storage area.

  The processing area 6062 is an area that is read when the determination results of various data are derived to the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. In the present embodiment, reading of various data stored in each of the areas 6061a to 6061h of the special symbol random number storage area 6061 is restricted, and various data stored in the processing area 6062 is determined, and the determination result Is led to the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86.

  Note that the processing region 6062 is not necessarily provided. For example, the reading of various data stored in each of the storage areas 6061a to 6061h of the special symbol random number storage area 6061 is normally restricted, and is stored in the first storage area 6061a only when the change of the special symbol is started. Only various data may be read.

  In addition, when the change of the special symbol is started, a shift process of various data stored in each storage area is performed. Details of this shift processing will be described later.

[First, second and third start-up winning prizes]
Next, the first / second / third start opening winning process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the first, second, and third start-up prize winning processes.

  In the first, second, and third starting opening winning process, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not a game ball has won a second starting opening 392 or a third starting opening 394 (step S1101). Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal is output from second start port sensor 646 or third start port sensor 648. At this time, when a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 646, it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 392, and when a detection signal is output from the third start port sensor 648, It is determined that a game ball has won the third start port 394. If no detection signal is output from either the second start port sensor 646 or the third start port sensor 648, no game ball has won a prize in either the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 (step (NO in S1101).

  When it is determined in step S1101 that the game ball has won the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, various data (randomness number for determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) are acquired and provided in the RAM 606. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102). Note that the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means 712 for determination per second special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), the CPU 602 performs a second hold storage process (step S1103). In the second hold storage process, various data (random determination number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 is stored as a special symbol random number. This is a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 while storing it in the area 6061. More specifically, in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the random number storage region for determination of success / failure, the random number storage region for probability variation determination, the random number region for random determination, the special symbol type storage region, the special symbol type, Remember each one.

  Various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 in the second reserved storage process of step S1103 is the smallest among the empty areas of the first storage area 6061a to the nth storage area (n is an integer). After that, the process proceeds to step S1104. For example, if the first storage area 6061a is a free area, it is stored in the first storage area 6061a. If the first storage area 6061a is not a free area and the second storage area 6061b is a free area, it is stored in the second storage area 6061b. If the first storage area 6061a and the second storage area 6061b are not empty areas and the third storage area 6061c is an empty area, the CPU 602 stores various data in the third storage area 6061c, and the process proceeds to step S1104.

  When the CPU 602 determines in step S1101 that no game ball has won any of the second start port 392 and the third start port 394 (NO in step S1101), and in step S1102, the second special symbol hold counter. When it is determined that the counter value 713 has reached the upper limit of 4 (NO in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the CPU 602 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 390 (step S1104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 644, and if a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 644, a game ball wins the first start port 390. (YES in step S1104). If a detection signal is not output from the first start port sensor 644, it is determined that a game ball has not won the first start port 390 (NO in step S1104).

  When it is determined in step S1104 that a game ball has won at the first starting port 390, various random numbers (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) are acquired, and a first special symbol hold counter provided in the RAM 606 is obtained. It is determined whether the counter value of 703 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1105). Note that the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means 702 for determination per first special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1105), the CPU 602 performs a first hold storage process (step S1106). In the first hold storage process, various data (random determination randomness, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball at the first starting port 390 are stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061. In this process, 1 is added to the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703. More specifically, in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the random number storage region for determination of success / failure, the random number storage region for probability variation determination, the random number region for random determination, the special symbol type storage region, the special symbol type, Remember each one.

  Various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 in the first reserved storage process of step S1106 is the area where n is the smallest among the free areas of the first storage area 6061a to the nth storage area (n is an integer). After that, the process proceeds to step S1104. For example, if the first storage area 6061a is a free area, it is stored in the first storage area 6061a. If the first storage area 6061a is not a free area and the second storage area 6061b is a free area, it is stored in the second storage area 6061b. If the first storage area 6061a and the second storage area 6061b are not empty areas and the third storage area 6061c is an empty area, the CPU 602 stores various data in the third storage area 6061c, and ends the processing.

  When the CPU 602 determines in step S1104 that a game ball has not won the first start port 390 (NO in step S1104), and in step S1105, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is an upper limit value of 4. When it is determined that it has reached (NO in step S1105), the process ends.

  The counter value stored in the first special symbol hold counter 703 or the second special symbol hold counter 713 is the number of various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 acquired in step S1104 or step S1101 (that is, , 8 of the storage areas 6061a to 6061h, the number of storage areas in which various data are stored).

  Further, in step S1102 and step S1105, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 713 is the upper limit value, and the first start If the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is the upper limit when a game ball is won in the mouth 390, the various data acquired in step S1101 or step S1104 are discarded.

  When it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, it is not always necessary to acquire various data (random number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) in step S1101. However, it may be performed between step S1101 to step S1103. For example, various data may be acquired after determining that the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 713 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102 without acquiring various data in step S1101, or in step S1103. You may make it acquire by a 2nd pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has won at the first starting port 390, acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1104, and steps S1104 to S1104 are performed. What is necessary is just to perform between step S1106. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1104, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1106 You may make it acquire by a 1st pending | holding memory | storage process.

  As described above, in the first, second, and third start opening prize processing, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start opening 392 or the third start opening 394, and the second special opening is determined. If the count value by the symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit, storage processing of various data acquired by winning a game ball in the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 is performed. After that, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won at the first start opening 390, and if the count value by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit, the game ball has won at the first start opening 390. Thus, the storage processing of the various data acquired is performed, and the series of processing ends. Accordingly, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously (within the same 4 ms interrupt process). Is a special symbol in which various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 is ahead of various data acquired by winning a game ball at the first starting port 390. Stored in the random number storage area 6061. That is, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously, the second special symbol success / failure determination means. The jackpot determination by 714 is performed before the jackpot determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704. As a result, the determination result by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704. First, it is displayed on the second special symbol display 86 and the common symbol display area 115c. In particular, during the short-time game, since the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720 is a lottery advantageous to the player, the pair of movable pieces 396 are frequently opened and closed, and the game ball wins the third starting port 394. It becomes easy. However, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously, the second special symbol success / failure determining means 714 By performing the jackpot determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 prior to the jackpot determination by the first special symbol winning / decision means 704, the game ball is won regardless of whether the game ball is won at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394. It is possible to avoid as much as possible the various data that have been discarded, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 602 executes a series of processes in steps S1104 to 1106 after executing a series of processes in steps S1101 to S1103. Instead, the CPU 602 executes steps S1104 to S1106. After executing the series of processes, the series of processes in steps S1101 to S1103 may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the number of various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 (that is, the sum of the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713). Is referred to as “starting memory number”.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the change start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the start memory number is 0 (step S1301). If the starting storage number is not 0 (NO in step S1301), the special symbol random number storage area 6061 is shifted (step S1302). In this shift process, various data stored in the first storage area 6061a is stored in the processing area 6062, and various data stored in the nth storage area (2 ≦ n ≦ 8) n-1) A process of storing in a storage area (2 ≦ n ≦ 8). When various data are stored only in the first storage area 6061a (when the second storage area 6061b to the eighth storage area 6061h are free areas), the various data stored in the first storage area 6061a. Is stored in the processing area 6062 only. If the start memory is 0 in step S1301 (YES in step S1301), the process is terminated.

  After performing the shift process in step S1302, the CPU 602 determines whether or not the type stored in the special symbol type storage area of the processing area 6062 is the second special symbol type (step S1303). At this time, if it is the second special symbol type (YES in step S1303), the second special symbol flag is turned ON (step S1303) and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is decremented by 1 ( Step S1305) and the process proceeds to Step S1308. If the type stored in the special symbol type storage area of the processing area 6062 determined in step S1303 is the first special symbol type (NO in step S1303), the first special symbol flag is turned on (step S1303). Along with S1306), the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is decremented by 1 (step S1307), and the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1308, the CPU 602 determines whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is being executed by the probability variation game execution means 740 (step S1308). If the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S1308), the special symbol probability change time determination table 708 is selected (step S1309), and if the probability variation function is not activated (NO in step S1308), special The symbol normal hour determination table 706 is selected (step S1310). Then, the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the processing area 6062 (step S1311).

  The jackpot determination in step S1311 is performed by the first special symbol determination unit 704 if the first special symbol flag is ON, and the second special symbol determination unit if the second special symbol flag is ON. 714.

  If the CPU 602 determines that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit in step S1311 (YES in step S1311), the jackpot flag is turned ON (step S1311), and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is long (step S1313). ). Specifically, it is determined by referring to the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the random number for determination of success or failure whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is long hit. If it is determined that it is a long hit (YES in step S1313), the long hit flag is turned ON (step S1314), then the processing flag is updated to “1” (step S1318), and the process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1313 that it is not long hit (NO in step S1313), the short hit flag is turned ON (step S1315), and then the processing flag is updated to “1” (step S1318). finish. If it is determined that the big hit determination in step S1311 is not a big hit (NO in step S1311), the small hit determination is performed based on Table 1 (step S1316). If it is determined that the small hit is determined in the small hit determination (YES in step S1316), the small hit flag is turned on (step S1317), the process proceeds to step S1318, the processing flag is updated to “1”, and the process is terminated. . If it is determined that the small hit is not a small hit (NO in step S1316), the process proceeds to step S1318, the processing flag is updated to “1”, and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, after the special symbol random number storage area 6061 is shifted in step S1302, the determination table selected in step S1310 (the special symbol normal hour determination table 706 or the special symbol probability variation determination per unit time). The jackpot determination is performed with reference to the determination table 708) and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the processing area 6062 (step S1311), but is not limited thereto. For example, the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the determination table (special symbol normal time determination table 706 or special symbol probability change time determination table 708) and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the first storage area 6061a, Thereafter, the special symbol random number storage area 6061 may be shifted. At this time, the validity determination random number stored in the first storage area 6061a can be referred to only when the change starts.

  Details of the jackpot determination and the small hit determination are as described above with reference to Table 1 and Table 2.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the hour variation pattern table setting process per first special symbol length. FIG. 73 is a table showing variation patterns selected in the first special symbol length per hour pattern table setting process. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 75 is a list chart showing the variation patterns selected in the second special symbol length hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a short hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 78 is a table showing the variation patterns selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process and the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 80 is a flowchart continued from A of FIG. FIG. 81 is a list chart showing a variation pattern selected when reach is determined in the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the second special symbol deviation time fluctuation pattern table setting process. FIG. 83 is a flowchart continued from C in FIG. FIG. 84 is a list chart showing variation patterns selected when it is determined that the second special symbol out-of-variation variation pattern table is set to reach. FIG. 85 is a list chart showing variation patterns selected when reach is not determined in the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process and the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 73, 75, 78, 81, 84, and 85, a command, a lottery result, a variation time, a variation name (variation content), and the variation number are associated with the variation number. The probability that the variation content of is selected is stored. The “variation content” is the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device 115 and the sound effect or music output from the speakers 18 and 57 in correspondence with the effect content.

  In the variation pattern setting process of FIG. 71, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1510). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is derived based on the variation of the special symbol this time. If it is determined that the big hit flag is ON (YES in step S1510), it is next determined whether or not the long hit flag is ON (step S1520). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determined in step S1510 is a long hit. If it is determined that the long winning flag is ON (YES in step S1520), it is then determined whether or not the first special symbol flag is ON (step S1530). That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation is based on a winning / not-determining random number extracted based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644. If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is ON (YES in step S1530), a first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1540) is performed. In the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1540), it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is being operated (that is, whether or not the time reduction game is being executed by the time reduction game execution means 742), and the probability variation function. Depending on whether it is in operation (that is, whether or not a probability variation game is being executed by the probability variation game execution means 740) and whether or not it is a length per symbol variation symbol, the first special symbol length per Select the time variation pattern table.

  If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is not ON (NO in step S1530), the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1550) is performed. In the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1550), whether or not the time reduction function is operating, whether or not the probability variation function is operating, and whether or not the probability variation per length Depending on whether or not, the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol length is selected.

  If it is determined in step S1520 that the long hit flag is not ON (ie, short hit) (NO in step S1520), short hit variation pattern table setting processing (step S1560) is performed. In the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, it is determined whether or not the short time function is operating and whether the probability variation function is in operation, and the short hit time variation pattern table is selected according to each gaming state. To do.

  If it is determined in step S1520 that there is no long hit (that is, a short hit), it is not determined whether or not the current variation is based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644. Accordingly, when a short win occurs in response to the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 390, and in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the short hit is generated. In any case, the same variation pattern table is selected.

  If it is determined in step S1510 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1510), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1570). If it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S1570), a small hit hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1580) is performed. In the small hit hour variation pattern setting process, it is determined whether or not the short time function is in operation and whether the probability variation function is in operation, and a variation pattern table at the small hit time corresponding to each gaming state is selected. .

  Note that if it is determined in step S1570 that it is a small hit, similarly to the case where it is determined that it is not a long hit in step S1520, the current variation is based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644. It is not judged whether it is a thing. Accordingly, when a small hit is generated in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 390, and in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the small hit is made. In any case, the same variation pattern table is selected.

  If it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1570), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol flag is ON (step S1590). If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is ON (YES in step S1590), the first special symbol outlier variation pattern table setting process (step S1600) is performed. In the first special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the short-time function is activated and whether or not the probability variation function is activated, and then whether or not reach variation is performed is determined by lottery ( Hereinafter, this lottery is referred to as “reach lottery”. In the reach lottery, a reach determination random number is acquired, the acquired reach determination random number is stored in the RAM 606, and the determination value set in a predetermined reach determination table matches the acquired reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not reach variation is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the short time function is activated, whether or not the probability variation function is activated, whether or not reach variation is performed, and the counter value by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (see FIG. 53). Based on this, the variation pattern table at the time of the first special symbol deviation is selected.

  If it is determined in step S1590 that the first special symbol flag is not ON (NO in step S1590), the second special symbol out-of-shift pattern table setting process (step S1610) is performed. In the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, it is determined whether or not the time-shortening function is operating and whether or not the probability variation function is operating. When the time reduction function is not activated, the reach variation pattern table in which the reach variation is always performed is selected. If the operation is short-time, the reach determination random number is acquired and stored in the RAM 606, and the acquired reach determination random number is matched with a determination value set in a predetermined reach determination table. Then, it is determined whether or not reach fluctuation is to be made. Then, it is determined whether or not the short-time function is activated, whether or not the probability variation function is activated, whether or not reach variation is performed, the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 713 (see FIG. 53), Accordingly, the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol deviation is selected.

  When each variation pattern table is set, the process advances to step S1620 to determine the variation pattern. In determining the variation pattern, first, a variation display random number is acquired. Based on the obtained variation display random number, any one of the variation patterns set in the variation pattern table set in step S1540, step S1550, step S1560, step S1580, step S1600 or step S1610 is selected. A variation pattern is determined (step S1620).

  Each variation pattern is set with a variation time and a command. When the variation pattern is determined (step S1620), the determined variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1630). Then, a command corresponding to the variation pattern set as the selection value is set as an effect command transmitted to the peripheral control board 662. When the variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1630), the variation time corresponding to the set variation pattern is set in the timer (step S1640). That is, the variation time of the special symbol is set in a timer provided in the RAM 606 mounted on the main control board 131. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1650), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIG. 72 and FIG. In the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 72, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742. Is determined (step S 15401). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S 15401), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type of symbol per long when the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S 15402). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short-length with probability variation or a symbol per regular length. Table 1 is selected, and if the symbol is a normal length, table 2 is selected (see FIG. 73).

  If it is determined in step S 15401 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S 15401), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 740. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S15403). If it is determined that the probability variation function has not been activated (YES in step S15403), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type per long when the short-time function is activated and when the probability is low is selected (step S15404). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short-length with probability variation or a symbol per regular length. Select table 3 and select table 4 if the symbol per normal length.

  If it is determined in step S15403 that the probability variation function is not inoperative, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S15403), the variation pattern table corresponding to the type per long when the time-short function is activated and at high probability is selected. (Step S15405). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short-length with probability variation or a symbol per regular length. Select the table 5 and select the table 6 when the symbol per normal length.

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S15402, step S15404, and step S15405, the first special symbol length per variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When table 1 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the variation number 13 per normal length of variation number 10 is obtained. Per song reach A normal length, per song reach A long length of variation number 15, per song reach B length of variation number 17 (via song reach A), per length of song reach C (via song reach A) of variation number 19, Variation per song reach D length (variation number 21) per song reach D, per song reach B first half length, variation number 28 per song reach B second length, variation number 33 per song reach C first half length Per song reach C second half length of number 35, per first half length of song reach D of variation number 40, per second half length of song reach D of variation number 42, and variation number 4 Of the chances (per probable length of change), change one of the fluctuation patterns to 500/4000, 3500/6000, 5000/4000, 8000/4000, 10,000 / 4000, and 10,000 / 4000, respectively. , 4000/4000, 4000/4000, 4000/4000, 4000/4000, 4000/4000, 4000/64000, and 3000/6000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the normal pattern is selected with a probability of 500/60004 as the variation pattern, the command 0AH corresponding to the variation pattern per normal length is set as the effect command, and 21500 ms is set as the variation time value in the timer. When the normal length per unit is selected, reach variation is executed after the start of variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10), and then the stop symbol is long-performed without executing the super reach effect. Display to be an aspect. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is used as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 2 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as table 1 is selected with the same probability. However, the probability that the variation numbers 26, 28, 33, 35, 40, and 42 are selected is 4000/64000 in the table 1 and 4500/64000 in the table 2. The probability that the variation number 45 is selected is 3000/64000 in the table 1, but not selected in the table 2. Then, similarly to the case where the table 1 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 3 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on this acquired variation pattern random number, variation per song reach B first half length of variation number 26 Number 28 per song reach B second half length, number 33 first song reach C per first half length, number 35 song reach C per second half length, number 40 song reach D first half length, and number 42 song reach One of the fluctuation patterns per second half of reach D has a probability of 10500/64000, 10500/64000, 10500/64000, 10500/64000, 11000/64000, and 11000/64000, respectively. Select with. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the song reach B first half length is selected with a probability of 10500 of 64000 as the variation pattern, the command 1AH corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B first half length is set as an effect command and the variation time value is 41100 ms. Is set to the timer. When this song reach B first half per length is selected, after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10), the reach variation is executed, and the character moves on the stage with the performance of the song (B). The super-reach effect of the singing mode is performed, and then the stop symbol is displayed so as to be the long hit mode.

  When the table 4 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as the table 3 is selected with the same probability. As in the case where the table 3 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 5 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, per song singing reach B completion of the variation number 51 (common) , Variation number 52 per song revive B door first revival length, variation number 53 singing reach B door second revival length, variation number 54 singing reach B door third revival length, variation number 60 Per song reach C completion (probable change), per song revive length of the first song reach C door with variation number 61, per second revival length of song reach C door with variation number 62, and song reach C door 3 with variation number 63 Per revive length of song, per reach of song reach D of variation number 69 (probability variation), per revival length of song reach D door of variation number 70, per revival length of song reach D door of variation number 71, and , One of the fluctuation patterns among the third revival length of the song reach D door of the movement number 72 is 30000/60000, 500/4000/000, 500/64000, 1000/64000, and 10,000 / 4000, respectively. , 250/6000, 250/6000, 5500/6000, 10,000 / 6000, 250/6000, 250/6000, and 5500/4000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when song reach B per run length with a probability of 30000/60000 is selected as a variation pattern, command 33H corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B finish length is set as a production command and a variation time value is 55000 ms. Is set to the timer. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 6 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern per song reach B completion of the variation number 51 is always selected without obtaining the variation pattern random number. Then, the command 33H corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B completion length is set as an effect command, and 55000 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer. In this song reach B completion, the super reach of the mode in which the character is singing on the stage with the song (B) is displayed after the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10) starts to change. Then, although the stage door closes, the performance that the performance and the character display are not interrupted is repeated three times, and after the song (B) has been played, the stop symbol is displayed in a long-hit manner.

  Thus, the content of the variation pattern when the table 6 is selected is different from the content of the variation pattern when the table 5 is selected. That is, per song reach B door revival length, per song revival door B revival length, song reach B door third revival length, and song reach C completion Per song revival length, singing reach C door second revival length, singing reach C door third revival length, singing reach D door revival length, per song reach D completion, per revival length Since neither the song reach D door second revival length nor the song reach D door third revival length is selected on the table 6, these variation patterns are displayed on the effect display device 115. If this is done, the per unit length of probability change is fixed.

  Next, the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIG. 74 and FIG. In the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 74, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742. Is determined (step S15501). If it is determined that the time-shortening function is not activated (YES in step S15501), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type of symbol per long when the time-shortening function is not activated is selected (step S15502). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short length with probability change or a symbol per regular length. When the table 7 is selected and the symbol per normal length is selected, the table 8 is selected (see FIG. 75).

  If it is determined in step S15501 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S15501), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 740. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S15503). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15503), the variation pattern table corresponding to the type per long when the short-time function is activated and when the probability is low is selected (step S15504). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short length with probability change or a symbol per regular length. Select the table 9 and select the table 10 when the symbol per normal length.

  If it is determined in step S15503 that the probability variation function is not inactive, that is, the probability variation gaming state is selected (NO in step S15503), the variation pattern table corresponding to the type per length at the time of the short-time function activation and at the high probability is selected. (Step S15505). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short length with probability change or a symbol per regular length. Select the table 11 and select the table 12 if the symbol is a pattern per normal length.

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S15502, step S15504, and step S15505, the second special symbol length per variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When the table 7 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the variation number 75 per normal length of the variation number 78 is obtained. Per song reach A normal length, per song reach A long length of variable number 80, per length of song reach B of variable number 82 (via song reach A), per length of song reach C (via song reach A) of variable number 84, One of the variation patterns among the length of song reach D (via song reach A) of variation number 86 is 900/64000, 3800/64000, 6000/64000, 12000/64000, 64000, respectively. Select with a probability of 20000 / minute and 21300/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the normal pattern is selected with a probability of 900/60004 as the variation pattern, the command 51H corresponding to the variation pattern per normal length is set as the effect command, and the variation time value is set to 15400 ms in the timer. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 8 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as the table 7 is selected with the same probability. However, the probability that the variation number 82 is selected is 12000/14000 in the table 7, but 15000/64000 in the table 8. In addition, the probability that the variation number 86 is selected is 21300/64000 in the table 7, but 18300/64000 in the table 8. As in the case where the table 7 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 9 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on this obtained variation pattern random number, variation per song reach B first half length of variation number 26 Per song reach B in the second half of number 28, per song in the first half of song reach C in variation number 33, per song in the second half of song reach C in variation number 35, song reach D in the first half length of variation number 40, and song of variation number 42 Each of the fluctuation patterns per second half of reach D has a probability of 13750/64000, 13750/64000, 10,000 / 64000, 10,000 / 64000, 8250/64000, and 8250/64000, respectively. Select with. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when per song reach B length is selected with a probability of 13750/64000 as a variation pattern, command 1AH corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B length is set as a production command and 41100 ms as a variation time value is timer Set to.

  When the table 10 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as the table 9 is selected with the same probability. As in the case where the table 9 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 11 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the song reach B of the variation number 51 per completion (common) , Variation number 52 per song revive B door first revival length, variation number 53 singing reach B door second revival length, variation number 54 singing reach B door third revival length, variation number 60 Per song reach C completion (probable change), song reach C door with change number 61, first resurrection length, song reach C door with variable number 62, second resurrection length, song reach C door with change number 63 third Per revive length, per revival of 69 song reach D with change number 69 (probable change), per revival length of song reach D door with change number 70, per revival length of song reach D door with change number 71, and per change Number One of the fluctuation patterns of 72 song reach D doors per third reviving length is 26500/64000, 500/64000, 500/64000, 1000/64000, 15000/64000, 64000, respectively. Select with probabilities of 250/500, 6/4000/2000, 6/4000/5000, 15000/4000, 250/4000, 500/6000, and 2000/4000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, per song reach B completion length is selected with a probability of 26500/64000, command 33H corresponding to the selected variation pattern per song reach B completion length is set as a production command, and 55000 ms is set as a timer for the variation time value. Set to. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 12 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern per song reach B completion length of the variation number 51 is always selected without acquiring the variation pattern random number. Then, the command 33H corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B completion length is set as an effect command, and 55000 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer.

  Thus, the content of the variation pattern when the table 12 is selected is different from the content of the variation pattern when the table 11 is selected. In other words, per song reach B door revival length, per song revival door B revival length, song reach B door third revival length, and song reach C completion Per song revival length, singing reach C door second revival length, singing reach C door third revival length, per revival length of song reach C door, per song reach D completion, per revival length Since neither the song reach D door second revival length nor the song reach D door third revival length is selected on the table 12, these variation patterns are displayed on the effect display device 115. If this is done, the per unit length of probability change is fixed.

  Next, the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78. FIG. In the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 76, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, whether or not the time-short game is being executed by the time-short game execution means 742 ( Step S15601). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S15601), a variation pattern table in the case where the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S15602). That is, when the time-short game is not executed by the time-short game execution means 742, the table 13 is selected regardless of whether or not the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 740 (see FIG. 78).

  If it is determined in step S15601 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S15601), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 740. It is determined whether or not the state is not performed (step S15603). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15603), a variation pattern table is selected when the time reduction function is activated and the probability variation function is not activated (step S15604). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 742 and the probability change game is not executed by the probability change game execution means 740, the table 14 is selected (see FIG. 78).

  If it is determined in step S15601 that the time reduction function is not inactive (NO in step S15603), a variation pattern table at the time of the time reduction function activation and the probability variation function activation is selected (step S15605). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 742 and the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 740, the table 15 is selected (see FIG. 78).

  When the table 13 is selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern with the chance of variation number 43 is selected with a probability of 100% (that is, always). Then, the command 2BH is set as an effect command, and 24600 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer. At the chance (short win), after the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the effect display device 115, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a short hit manner different from the long win without the reach effect. As described above, in the normal gaming state in which the short-time function is not activated and the probability changing function is not activated, only one type of short win display mode is stored in the display mode storage unit 830 (see FIG. 96) described later. Yes.

  When the table 14 is selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the song reach B intro of the variation number 23 and the song reach of the variation number 30 are obtained. Any variation pattern is selected with a probability of 24000/64000, 20000/64000, and 20000/64000, respectively, out of C intro and out of song reach D intro with variation number 37. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when song reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 24000/64000, command 17H corresponding to the variation pattern of song reach B intro is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time value in a timer. . If this song reach B intro is selected, the decorative design is displayed on the production display device 115 variably, and then the intro of the song (B) is played with the reach production. And stop display in a different short hit mode. Similarly, the variation pattern of the song reach C intro and the song reach D intro is also selected with a probability of 20000/60000, and the commands 1EH and 25H of the selected variation pattern are set as production commands, and the variation time value Set 24100 ms in the timer.

  When the table 15 is selected in the short hit variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the first song reach B door short number of variation number 47, variation number 48 song reach B door per 3rd short, variable number 56 song reach C per 1 door short, variable number 57 song reach C door 3rd per short, number 65 song reach D door 1 per door One of the variation patterns among the per unit short and the third per unit of the song reach D door of variation number 66 is 14000/64000, 4000/64000, 19000/64000, and 4000/4000, respectively. , 19000/64000, and 4000/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the song reach B door first short per is selected with a probability of 14000/64000, the command 2FH corresponding to the fluctuation pattern per song reach B door first short is set as a production command and the fluctuation time A value of 21800 ms is set in the timer. When this song reach B door first short hit is selected, the decorative display is variably displayed on the effect display device 115, and then the song (B) is played and the super reach of the character singing on the stage is displayed. Then, the door of the stage is closed, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a short hit manner different from the long hit. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, and a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a corresponding variation time value is set in the timer.

  Next, the small hitting variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. In the small hitting time variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 77, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742 ( Step S15801). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S15801), a variation pattern table in the case where the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S15802). That is, when the time-short game is not executed by the time-short game execution means 742, the table 16 is selected regardless of whether or not the probability-change game is executed by the probability-change game execution means 740 (see FIG. 78).

  If it is determined in step S15801 that the time reduction function is not inactive (NO in step S15801), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is not executed by the probability variation game execution means 740. Is determined (step S15803). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15803), a variation pattern table is selected when the time reduction function is activated and the probability variation function is not activated (step S15804). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 742 and the probability change game is not executed by the probability change game execution means 740, the table 17 is selected (see FIG. 78).

  If it is determined in step S15801 that the time-shortening function is not activated (NO in step S15803), a variation pattern table at the time-shortening function activation and probability variation function activation is selected (step S15805). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 742 and the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 740, the table 18 is selected (see FIG. 78).

  When the table 16 is selected in the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern having the chance of variation number 44 is selected with a probability of 100% (that is, always). Then, command 2CH is set as an effect command, and 24600 ms is set as a variable time value in the timer. In this embodiment, the variation pattern of the chance number of the variation number 44 is the same as the variation pattern of the chance number of the variation number 43. As described above, in the normal gaming state where the time-shortening function is not activated and the probability changing function is not activated, only one kind of small hit display mode is stored in the display mode storage unit 830 (see FIG. 96) described later. Yes.

  When the table 17 is selected in the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the song reach B intro of the variation number 24 and the song reach of the variation number 31 are acquired. Any variation pattern is selected with a probability of 40000/64000, 12000/64000, and 12000/64000, respectively, out of C intro and song reach D intro with variation number 38. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the song reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 40000/60000, the command 18H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the selected song reach B intro miss is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time value as a timer. set. In this embodiment, the singing reach B intro of the variation number 24, the singing reach C intro of the variation number 31, and the singing reach D intro of the variation number 38 are respectively separated from the singing reach B intro of the variation number 23. It is the same mode as the variation pattern of the out of the song reach C intro of the variation number 30 and the out of the song reach D intro of the variation number 37.

  When the table 18 is selected in the short hit variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the first song reach B door of the variation number 49, the variation number 50 song reach B door per small, variable number 58 song reach C door first small hit, variable number 59 song reach C door second small hit, variable number 67 song reach D door first One variation pattern among the small hits and the second small hit of the song reach D door of the variation number 68 is 17000/64000, 14500/64000, 5000/64000, 11250/64000, Select with a probability of 5000/64000 and 11250/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the song reach B door first small hit is selected with a probability of 17000 of 64000, the command 31H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern per song reach B door first small is set as a production command and the fluctuation time A value of 21800 ms is set in the timer. In addition, in this embodiment, the song reach B door 1 small hit per variation number 49, the song reach B door small per 50 variation number, the song reach C door 1 small per variation number 58, variation number The variation patterns of the 59 song reach C door second small hit, the variation number 67 song reach D door first small hit, and the variation number 68 song reach D door second small hit are the variation numbers, respectively. 47 song reach B doors per short short, variable number 48 song reach B doors per 3 shorts, variable number 56 song reach C doors per short, variable number 57 song reach C doors per 3 shorts The variation pattern is the same as the variation pattern per short of the song reach, the short reach of the song reach D door of the variation number 65, and the short variation of the song reach D door of the variation number 66.

  Next, the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 79, 80, 81, and 85. FIG. In the first special out-of-symbol variation pattern table setting process of FIGS. 79 and 80, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether the time-shortening game is executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742. It is determined whether or not (step S16001). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S 16001), then the number of first special symbols held immediately after the start of fluctuation (that is, the counter value by the first special symbol holding counter 703 (see FIG. 53)). It is determined whether it is 0 (step S 16002). If it is determined that the number of reserved first symbol symbols is zero (YES in step S 16002), it is determined whether or not reach variation is to be executed (step S 16003). Specifically, one reach random number is acquired from the reach random numbers from 0 to 240, and the acquired reach random number corresponds to a predetermined reach determination value (from 0 to 25 in the present embodiment). A so-called reach lottery is performed to determine whether or not. If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16003), and the table 19 (see FIG. 81) is selected (step S16004).

  Note that “the number of reserved first special symbols” means the number of reserved lotteries by the first special symbol lottery means 700 in the present embodiment. That is, in this embodiment, although the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means for determination of first special symbol 702, the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol determination / rejection determination means 704 is suspended. The number of holdings for determination of success / failure by the determination unit 704 corresponds to the number of reservations for the first special symbol. Instead of this, when a game ball wins the first starting port 390, the acquisition of the random number for success / failure determination by the random number extracting means for determination 702 for the first special symbol may be suspended. In this case, the number of suspensions of acquisition of random numbers for success / failure determination by the random number extraction means for determination per first special symbol 702 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the first special symbol. Further, when the game ball wins the first start opening 390, the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means for determination of first special symbol 702, and the random number for determination of success / failure acquired by the first special symbol determination of success / failure determination means 704 is obtained. However, it may be suspended to display the determination result on the first special symbol display 84. In this case, the number of suspensions of display on the first special symbol display 84 of the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the first special symbol.

  When it is determined in step S16003 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16003), the table 25 (see FIG. 85) is selected (step S16005).

  If it is determined in step S 16002 that the number of reserved first symbol symbols is not zero (NO in step S 16002), it is determined whether the number of reserved first symbol symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is 1 (step S 16006). . Here, if it is determined that the number of holds of the first special symbol is 1 (YES in step S16006), it is determined whether or not reach variation is executed, as in the case where the number of holds of the first special symbol is 1. (Step S16007). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16007), and the table 19 (see FIG. 81) is selected (step S16008). However, since the reach determination value when the number of holds of the first special symbol is 1 is from 0 to 23, in the reach lottery as compared with the case where the number of hold of the first special symbol is 0 (reach determination value is 0 to 25) The winning probability is low.

  When it is determined in step S16007 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16007), the table 25 (see FIG. 85) is selected (step S16009).

  If it is determined in step S16006 that the number of retained first special symbols is not 1 (NO in step S16006), it is determined whether the number of retained first special symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is 2 (step S16010). . Here, if it is determined that the number of holds of the first special symbol is 2 (YES in step S16010), whether or not the reach variation is executed is determined as in the case where the number of holds of the first special symbol is 0 and 1. Judgment is made (step S16011). If the reach lottery is won, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16011), and the table 19 (see FIG. 81) is selected (step S16012). However, since the reach determination value is 0 to 21 when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is 2, the winning probability in the reach lottery is lower than when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is 0 and 1.

  When it is determined in step S16011 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16011), the table 26 (see FIG. 85) is selected (step S16013).

  If it is determined in step S16010 that the number of first special symbol hold is not 2 (NO in step S16014), it is determined that the number of first special symbol hold immediately after the start of fluctuation is 3, and the first special symbol hold is determined. As in the case where the numbers are 0, 1, and 2, it is determined whether or not reach variation is executed (step S16014). If the reach lottery is won, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16014), and the table 19 (see FIG. 81) is selected (step S16015). However, since the reach determination value is 0 to 15 when the number of holds of the first special symbol is 3, the winning probability in the reach lottery is lower than when the number of holds of the first special symbol is 0, 1, and 2.

  When it is determined in step S16014 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16014), the table 27 (see FIG. 85) is selected (step S16013).

  In this way, when the time-shortening function is not activated, the reach lottery between the number of the first special symbol hold and the winning probability in the reach lottery is more likely to win the reach lottery as the number of the first special symbol hold is smaller. There is a correlation that the more the number of reserved special symbols is, the more difficult it is to win a reach lottery. As a result, when the reach variation is executed when the number of reserved first symbol symbols is 3, for example, the expectation of winning per long hit, short hit or small win increases, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest .

  If it is determined in step S 16001 that the time saving function is not inactive, that is, the time saving gaming state is set (NO in step S 16001), the processing shown in FIG. 80 is performed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is not activated, that is, whether or not the probability variation game by the probability variation game execution means 740 is not being executed (step S16017). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S16017), it is determined whether or not reach variation is performed (step S16018). The determination as to whether or not to execute the reach variation is performed in the same way as the determination of whether or not to execute the reach variation when the time reduction function is not activated (step S16003, step S16007, step S16011, step S16014). Depending on the result. If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16018), and the table 20 (see FIG. 81) is selected (step S16019).

  When it is determined in step S16018 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16018), the table 28 (see FIG. 85) is selected (step S16020).

  If it is determined in step S16017 that the probability variation function is not inactive, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S16017), it is determined whether or not the reach variation is to be executed as in the case where the time reduction function is not activated. (Step S16021). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16021), and the table 21 (see FIG. 81) is selected (step S16022). However, when the time reduction function is activated and the probability variation mechanism is not activated, that is, when the time variation function is not the probability variation gaming state, the reach judgment value is only 0 and 1. Therefore, the reach variation is smaller than when the time reduction function is not activated. The probability of being executed is very low. As a result, when the reach variation is executed when the short-time function is activated and the probability variation mechanism is not activated, the expectation of winning the long hit, short hit or small hit increases, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When it is determined in step S16021 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16021), the table 29 (see FIG. 85) is selected (step S16023).

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S16004, step S16005, step S16008, step S16009, step S16012, step S16013, step S16015, step S16016, step S16019, step S16020, step S16022, and step S16023, the first special symbol is lost. The time variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When the table 19 (see FIG. 81) is selected in the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the variation number 8 is out of normal (1 Pre-design), variation number 9 out of normal (after one design), variation number 11 song reach A out (before encore), variation number 12 out of song reach A (after encore), variation number 14 song reach A long Deviating, singing reach B of variation number 16 (via singing reach A), detaching singing reach C of variation number 18 (via singing reach A), losing singing reach D of variation number 20 (via singing reach A), variation number 22 Singing reach B intro of change number 25, singing reach out of the first half of variation number 25, singing reach out of the second half of variation number 27, singing reach C intro of variation number 29, variation number 32 Out of the first half of the song reach C, out of the second half of the song reach C of the variation number 34, out of the song reach D in the variation number 36, out of the first half of the song reach D of the variation number 39, and out of the second half of the song reach D of the variation number 41 One of the fluctuation patterns is changed to 19000/14000, 14000/64000, 4000/64000, 4000/64000, 4000/44000, 64000/300, 64000/300, 64000/300, 64000, respectively. Select with a probability of 7000 / min, 2100/64000, 2100/64000, 3000/64000, 225/4000, 225/4000, 3000/6000, 225/4000, and 225/4000. . Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when normal deviation of variation number 8 (one symbol before) is selected with a probability of 19000 of 64000, command 08H corresponding to the variation pattern of normal deviation (one symbol before) is set as an effect command and variation time A value of 15600 ms is set in the timer. When the variation pattern of this normal deviation (one symbol before) is selected, the reach variation is executed after the decorative symbol variation displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10) is started, and then the long hit, short hit and small The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol which is not a win, and is one symbol before the reach symbol (for example, symbol 6 when symbol 7 is reach). Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 20 (see FIG. 81) is selected in the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the song reach B intro of the variation number 22 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. Out of the first half of the song reach B of the variation number 25, Out of the second half of the song reach B of the variation number 27, Out of the song reach C of the variation number 29, Out of the first half of the song reach C of the variation number 32, The second half of the song reach C of the variation number 34 One of the variation patterns of the singing reach D in the singing reach D of the variation number 36, the singing reach out of the first half of the singing reach D of the variation number 41, and the losing of the second half of the singing reach D of the variation number 41, respectively. 25,000 / min, 25000/64000, 50/64000, 3450/64000, 345/64000 , 3450 of 50,64000 minutes of 64000 minutes, and, to select with a probability of 3450 of 64000 minutes. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when singing reach B out-of-track is selected as a variation pattern with a probability of 100/64000, the command 16H corresponding to the variation pattern of singing reach B out-of-tro is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time timer. Set to. If this song reach B intro is selected, the intro of the song (B) will be performed with the reach effect after the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10) starts changing, but before the singing starts. The decorative design is stopped and displayed in a so-called unreachable manner that is different from both the big hit and the small win. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, and the command of the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and the variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 21 (see FIG. 81) is selected in the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the song reach B door of variation number 46 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. The variation patterns of the first one, the first song reach C door with the variation number 55, and the first variation of the song reach D door with the variation number 64 are 40000/60000 and 64,000 minutes, respectively. Select with a probability of 12000 and 12000 of 14000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the first pattern of song reach B door is selected as a variation pattern with a probability of 40000/64000, command 2EH corresponding to the variation pattern of song reach B door first image is set as a production command and the variation A time value of 21800 ms is set in the timer. When this song reach B door 1 off is selected, after the decoration pattern displayed on the production display device 115 (see FIG. 10) starts to change, the song (B) is played and the character is singing on the stage. After that, the stage door is closed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a so-called reach-removed manner in which the long win, short hit and small hit are different. Similarly, the variation pattern of the first singing reach C door and the first singing reach D door is also selected with a probability of 12000 of 14000, and the commands 37H and 40H of the selected variation pattern are set as production commands. At the same time, 18600 ms is set in the timer as the fluctuation time value.

  In the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, when the table 25 (see FIG. 85) is selected, the variation pattern of the normal variation with the variation number 1 is always selected, and the table 26 (see FIG. 85) is selected. When the table 27 (see FIG. 85) is selected, the variation pattern of the shortened variation 2 with the variation number 3 is always selected and the table 28 (see FIG. 85) is always selected. Is always selected, the variation pattern of the short shortening variation 2 of the variation number 7 is selected, and when the table 29 (see FIG. 85) is selected, the variation pattern of the short shortening variation 1 of the variation number 5 is always selected.

  That is, in the first special symbol detachment variation pattern table setting process, if the time reduction function is not activated, the variation pattern according to the number of retained first special symbols (that is, the counter value by the first special symbol retention counter 703). Will be selected. Therefore, if the number of holds of the first special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 0 or 1, the normal change of the change number 1 is selected, the command 01H is set as an effect command, and the change time value is set to 11800 ms as a timer. set. When the first special symbol hold number immediately after the start of the change is 2, select the change pattern of the change 1 of the short change of the change number 2, set the command 02H as the production command, and set the change time value to 6000 ms as the timer set. If the number of the first special symbol hold immediately after the start of the change is 3, select the change pattern of the shortened change 2 of the change number 3, set the command 03H as the effect command, and set 2900ms as the change time value to the timer set. In the normal variation, the shortening variation 1 and the shortening variation 2, after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115, the decorative symbol is different from the long hit, short hit and small hit without the reach effect. To stop display.

  In the first special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, if the operation is short-time, whether or not the probability variation function is activated regardless of the number of first special symbols held, that is, probability variation game execution means. According to 740, the variation pattern is selected according to whether or not the probability variation game is being executed. Accordingly, when the probability variation function is not activated, the time shortening variation 2 of the variation number 7 is selected, the command 07H is set as the effect command, and 2300 ms is set as the variation time value in the timer. When the probability variation function is in operation, the short shortening variation 1 of the variation number 5 is selected, the command 05H is set as an effect command, and 2200 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer.

  Next, the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 82, 83, 84 and 85. FIG. 82 and 83, in the second special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether the time-shortening game is executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742. It is determined whether or not (step S16101). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S16101), the table 22 is selected (step S16102). Although details will be described later, since a deviation variation pattern without a reach effect is not set in the table 22, a reach effect is always performed when the table 22 is selected.

  If it is determined in step S16101 that the time-saving function is not inoperative, that is, the time-saving game is being executed by the time-saving game execution means 742 (NO in step S16101), the processing shown in FIG. 83 is performed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is not activated, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is being executed by the probability variation game execution means 740 (step S16103). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S16103), it is determined whether or not reach variation is executed (step S16104). Specifically, in the same manner as the reach lottery in the second special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, a reach random number from zero to 240 is acquired, and the acquired reach random number is a predetermined reach determination value (this embodiment) In the embodiment, reach lottery is performed to determine whether or not 0 and 1). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16104), and the table 23 (see FIG. 84) is selected (step S16105).

  When it is determined in step S16104 that the reach change is not performed, that is, when the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16104), the number of second special symbols held immediately after the start of the change (ie, the second special symbol hold counter 713). It is determined whether or not the counter value (see FIG. 53) is 0 (step S16106). If it is determined that the second special symbol hold number immediately after the start of fluctuation is 0 (YES in step S16106), table 30 is selected (step S16107), and if the second special symbol hold number is not zero (step S16106) The table 31 is selected (NO in S16106) (step S16108).

  In the present embodiment, “the number of second special symbol reservations” means the number of lottery reservations by the second special symbol lottery means 710. That is, in this embodiment, although the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained by the random number extraction means for determination of second special symbol 712, the determination of success / failure by the second special symbol determination / rejection determination means 714 is suspended. The number of reservations for determination of success / failure by the determination unit 714 corresponds to the number of reservations for the second special symbol. Instead of this, the acquisition of random numbers for determination of success / failure by the second special symbol determination random number extracting means 712 may be suspended when a game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394. . In this case, the number of suspensions of acquisition of random numbers for success / failure determination by the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the second special symbol. Further, when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the second special symbol hit determination random number extracting means 712 acquires the pass / fail determination random number and the second special symbol pass / fail determination means 714 Although it is determined whether or not the obtained random number for determining whether or not is correct, displaying the determination result on the second special symbol display 86 may be suspended. In this case, the number of suspensions of display on the second special symbol display 86 of the determination result by the second special symbol determination unit 714 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S16103 that the probability variation function is not inoperative, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S16103), it is determined whether or not to execute reach variation as in the case where the probability variation function is not activated. Judgment is made (step S16109). If the reach lottery is won, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16109), and the table 24 (see FIG. 84) is selected. However, the reach determination value is 0 only when the short time function is activated and the probability variation function is activated in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process.

  When it is determined in step S16109 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16109), the number of second special symbols held immediately after the start of the variation (that is, the second special symbol hold counter 713 ( It is determined whether or not the counter value (see FIG. 53) is 0 (step S16111). When it is determined that the number of reserved special symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is zero (YES in step S16111), table 32 is selected (step S16112), and when the number of reserved special symbols is not zero (step S16112). The table 33 is selected (NO in S16111) (step S16113).

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S16102, step S16105, step S16107, step S16108, step S16110, step S16112, and step S16113, the second special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When the time-saving function is not activated, that is, when the time-saving game is not being executed by the time-saving game executing means 742, as shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. In the table setting process, a reach lottery is performed (step S16003), and the table 19 in which only the reach effect is set as a variation pattern is selected in response to the winning of the reach lottery (step S16004). In the special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, the table 22 in which only the reach effect is set as the variation pattern is selected without performing the reach lottery (step S16102). Accordingly, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 when the time reduction function is not activated, the reach variation is always executed. Thereby, when the time-shortening function is not activated, the second start port 392 and the third start port 394 become more prestigious than the first start port 390, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When the table 22 (see FIG. 84) is selected in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, a normal deviation (1) of the variation number 73 is obtained. Pre-design), variation number 74 out of normal (after one design), variation number 76 song reach A out (before encore), variation number 77 out of song reach A (after encore), variation number 79 song reach A long Out of the song reach B of the variation number 81 (via song reach A), out of the song reach C of the variation number 83 (via song reach A), or the song reach D of the variation number 85 (via song reach A) These fluctuation patterns are 27500 / 64,000, 27500/64000, 2000/64000, 2000/44000, 64000, respectively. 100 of the 400,64000 minutes of 4400,64000 minutes, and, selected in 100 probability of 64000 minutes. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when normal out (one symbol before) is selected with a probability of 27500 of 64000, the command 49H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of normal out (one symbol before) is set as a production command, and the variation time value is 9500 ms. Set to timer. When the variation pattern of this normal deviation (one symbol before) is selected, the reach variation is executed after the decoration symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 starts to be varied. It is an aspect, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol immediately before the reach symbol (for example, symbol 6 when symbol 7 is reached). Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 23 (see FIG. 84) is selected in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the song reach B intro of the variation number 22 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. Out of the first half of the song reach B of the variation number 25, out of the second half of the song reach B of the variation number 27, out of the song reach C of the variation number 29, out of the first half of the song reach C of the variation number 32, second half of the song reach C of the variation number One of the fluctuation patterns of 100, 64000, 64000, and 65,000, respectively, out of the song reach D intro of variation number 36, out of the first half of song reach D of variation number 39, and out of the second half of song reach D of variation number 41. 25,000 / min, 25000/64000, 50/64000, 3450/64000, 345/64000 , 3450 of 50,64000 minutes of 64000 minutes, and, to select with a probability of 3450 of 64000 minutes. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when song reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 100/64000, command 16H corresponding to the variation pattern of song reach B intro is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time value in a timer. . When this variation pattern of the song reach B intro is selected, the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 is displayed in a variable manner, and then the intro of the song (B) is performed with the reach effect, but before the singing starts. The decorative design is stopped and displayed in a different manner from the long hit, short hit and small hit. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 24 (see FIG. 84) is selected in the second special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the song reach B door of variation number 46 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. The variation pattern of the first one, the first of the song reach C door with the variation number 55, and the first variation of the song reach D door with the variation number 64 is 40000 for 64000 and 64,000 for the 64,000 minute, respectively. Select with a probability of 12000 and 12000 of 14000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the first pattern of the song reach B door is selected with a probability of 40000/64000 as the variation pattern, the command 2EH corresponding to the variation pattern of the first song reach B door out of the first set is set as a production command. Then, 21800 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value. When this song reach B door 1 is selected, the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 is displayed in a variable manner, and then the song (B) is played and the character is singing on the stage. After that, the stage door is closed, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the long hit, short hit and small hit. Similarly, the variation pattern of the first singing reach C door and the first singing reach D door is selected with a probability of 12000/64000, and the commands 37H and 40H corresponding to the variation pattern are set as production commands. At the same time, 18600 ms is set in the timer as the fluctuation time value.

  In the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, when the table 30 (see FIG. 85) is selected, the variation pattern of the short time normal variation 2 of the variation number 6 is always selected, and the table 31 (see FIG. 85) is selected. When this is done, the fluctuation pattern of the short time fluctuation 2 of the fluctuation number 7 is always selected, and when the table 32 (see FIG. 85) is selected, the fluctuation pattern of the short time normal fluctuation 1 of the fluctuation number 4 is always selected and the table 33 ( 85 is selected, the fluctuation pattern of the short shortening fluctuation 1 of the fluctuation number 5 is always selected. When the table 33 (see FIG. 85) is selected, the fluctuation pattern of the short time normal fluctuation 2 of the fluctuation number 6 is always selected. select.

  That is, in the variation pattern table setting process at the time of the second special symbol outage, if the time is short-time operation, the variation pattern is selected according to the number of second special symbols held (that is, the counter value by the second special symbol holding counter 713). Will be. Therefore, if the number of holdings of the second special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 0 and the probability change function is not activated, the short normal change 2 of the change number 6 is selected, and the command 06H is set as an effect command. At the same time, 5200 ms is set in the timer as the fluctuation time value.

  Also, if the number of reserved special symbols immediately after the start of variation is 0 and the probability variation function is activated, the short normal variation 1 of variation number 4 is selected, and command 04H is set as an effect command. At the same time, 4800 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value. On the other hand, if the number of holdings of the second special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 1, 2 or 3, and the probability change function is not activated, the time shortening change 2 of the change number 7 is selected, and the command 07H is used as an effect command. At the same time, 2300 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value. Also, if the number of reserved 2nd special symbols immediately after the start of the change is 1, 2 or 3, and the probability change function is activated, select the short shortening change 1 of the change number 5 and set the command 05H as an effect command. In addition, 2200 ms is set in the timer as the fluctuation time value.

  Thus, when the probability variation function is not activated, when the variation number 6 is selected, the variation time is longer than when the variation number 7 is selected, and when the probability variation function is activated, the variation number 4 is When selected, the variation time becomes longer than when variation number 5 is selected. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the probability variation function is activated, if the time reduction function is activated, the variation time is zero when the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is 1, 2 or 3. become longer. As a result, if the time reduction function is activated, the variation time will be longer when the number of second special symbols held is 0 than when 1, 2, or 3, so that the decorative symbols will not change. It can suppress the decrease of interest by. That is, during the short-time operation, the pair of movable pieces 396 are opened and closed, so that the game balls that are driven toward the game area 37 are more likely to win the third starting port 394 than the first starting port 390. When the short-time function is activated, it is common that the number of second special symbols to be retained is greater than the number of first special symbols to be retained. Therefore, if the number of second special symbols is zero, the first special symbol is to be retained. The number is also likely to be zero. Therefore, the fall of interest can be suppressed by lengthening the fluctuation time when the number of reserved special symbols is zero. In all of the variation numbers 4, 5, 6, and 7, after the start of the variation of the decorative design displayed on the effect display device 115, the reach design is not accompanied by the reach effect, and the decorative design is per- And stop display in a manner different from any of the small hits and small hits.

  As described above, when the variation pattern setting process described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 85 is summarized, the processes performed by the first display mode determination unit 810 and the second display mode determination unit 820 (see FIG. 96) described below are respectively performed. It is as follows.

  In the lottery performed by the first special symbol lottery means 700, when the jackpot is won and the winning jackpot is a long win, the first display mode determining means 810 uses the first special symbol image display control means 851 to display the common symbol display area 115c. The table (one of Tables 1 to 6) determined based on the game state when winning per long and the type per long (per short length or normal length per probability change) A predetermined per-length display mode is selected and determined from the long-per-row display modes stored in the table (step S1540). Each of the tables 1 to 6 stores a plurality of per-length display modes.

  When the jackpot is won in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, and the winning jackpot is short hit, the first display mode determining means 810 uses the first special symbol image display control means 851 to display the common symbol display area 115c. The display mode to be displayed on the table is determined based on the gaming state when the short win is won (one of the tables 13 to 15) stored in the short win display mode stored in the predetermined short win The display mode is selected and determined (step S1560). Each of the tables 13 to 15 stores a plurality of short hit display modes.

  In the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, when the big win is lost and the small win is won, the first display mode determining means 810 displays the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control means 851. The display mode is changed to a predetermined small hit display mode from among the small hit display modes stored in the table (any one of the tables 16 to 18) determined based on the gaming state when winning the small hit. The selection is determined (step S1580). Each of the tables 16 to 18 stores a plurality of small hit display modes.

  In the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, when the big win is lost, and even when the jackpot is also lost, the first special symbol image display control means 851 displays a display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c. Outgoing display mode or reach miss stored in a table (table 19 or any one of tables 25 to 27) determined based on the gaming state when played (that is, when the lottery result is missed) A predetermined out-of-display mode or reach out-of-reach display mode is determined from the display modes (step S1600). Specifically, in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, when a big win is lost and even a small win is lost, a lottery for determining whether or not a reach effect is performed (step S16003, step S16007, step S16011, step S16014). ) And is out of the reach lottery, one of the tables 25 to 27 is selected based on the counter value of the first special symbol holding counter 703 (step S16005, step S16009, step S16013, step S16016) When the reach lottery is won, the table 19 is selected (step S16004, step S16008, step S16012, step S16015). That is, when the lottery is lost, one of the tables 25 to 27 is selected on the basis of the number of holds, and the off display mode stored in the selected table is displayed. When the reach lottery is won, the predetermined reach out display mode is selected from the plurality of reach out display modes stored in the table 19.

  When the jackpot is won in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710, and the winning jackpot is a long win, the second display mode determining means 820 is made the common symbol display area 115c by the second special symbol image display control means 852. The table (one of tables 7 to 12) determined based on the gaming state when winning per long and the type per long (per short length or normal length per probability change) A special display mode per length is selected and determined from the special display modes per length stored in the table (step S1550). Each of the tables 7 to 12 stores a plurality of special display modes per length.

  In the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710, when the big win is lost, and even when the jackpot is also lost, the second special symbol image display control means 852 displays the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the lottery. Reach out special display stored in a table (one of tables 22 to 24 and tables 30 to 33) determined based on the gaming state when it is performed (ie, when the lottery result is out) A predetermined reach out special display mode or out special display mode is determined from the modes or out special display modes (step S1600). Specifically, if the time reduction function is not activated when a lottery with a lottery result being out is performed, the table 22 is selected, and a predetermined one of the plurality of reach-off special display modes stored in the table 22 is selected. Is determined to be a special display mode out of reach. On the other hand, if the time reduction function is activated when the lottery with the lottery result being out is performed, the reach lottery is performed. If the reach lottery is won, the table 23 or the table 24 is selected based on the gaming state. (Step S16105, Step S16110). In addition, if the draw is lost in the reach lottery, any of the tables 30 to 33 is determined based on the gaming state and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 (steps S16107, 16108, step S16112, step S16113).

  In the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710, when the jackpot is won and the winning jackpot is short hit, the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the second special symbol image display control means 852, Similarly to the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control means 851 when the lottery result by the one special symbol lottery means 700 is short-winning, the gaming state when the short-winning is won Is determined to be any one of the tables 13 to 15, and a predetermined short hit display mode is selected and determined from the determined tables (step S1560).

  The first special symbol is displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the second special symbol image display control means 852 when the big bonus is lost in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 and the small bonus is won. Similar to the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control means 851 when the lottery result by the lottery means 700 is a small hit, it is based on the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit. Any one of the tables 16 to 18 is determined, and a predetermined small hit display mode is selected and determined from the determined tables (step S1580).

  Note that the short win display mode and the small win display mode are not limited to the same display mode in the case of being based on the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and in the case of being based on the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710. However, the display modes may be very similar to each other, for example, the variation times are slightly different.

  In the present embodiment, “immediately after the start of variation” means immediately after the first special symbol counter or the second special symbol counter is subtracted in the variation start process (step S130).

[In-flight processing]
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). That is, it is determined whether either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is changing. If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1801), the changing process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is changing (YES in step S1801), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the variable time has ended. That is, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S1802), the changing process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S1802), the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S1803). That is, the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 (both see FIG. 53) in the changing one of the first special symbol indicator 84 or the second special symbol indicator 86. A result is derived and displayed, and a change stop command is output to the peripheral control board 662.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1803), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1804). That is, as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is started. If it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1805), and the changing process is terminated. If it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1804), it is next determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1806). That is, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is started as a result of the current fluctuation being stopped and the lottery result being derived. If it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S1807), and the changing process is terminated. If it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, an example of the jackpot game start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process. In this jackpot game start process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S2001). Specifically, whether or not the probability variation game execution means 740 controls the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714, that is, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 704. It is determined whether or not the determination of success / failure by the symbol success / failure determination means 714 (both refer to FIG. 53) is made based on the special symbol probability change time determination table 708. If it is determined that the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S2001), the operation of the probability variation function is stopped (step S2002), and the process proceeds to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation function is not in operation (NO in step S2001), the process directly proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is operating. Specifically, whether or not the short-time game execution means 742 controls the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 (see FIG. 53), that is, whether or not the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 determines whether or not the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 It is determined whether or not to make a determination based on the determination table. If it is determined that the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S2003), the operation of the time reduction function is stopped (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving function is not operating (NO in step S2003), the process directly proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, it is determined whether or not it is a long hit. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the long hit flag is ON, and if it is ON, it is determined that the long hit flag is ON. If it is determined that it is per long (YES in step S2005), the number of rounds per long, the opening time per round, the limit number are set, and the opening / closing device to be opened is set. Specifically, the number of rounds is set to 15 rounds, for example, the opening time per round is set to 30 seconds, the limited number is set to 9 pieces, and the opening / closing device to be opened is for production in the first round and the second round, for example. The opening / closing device 398 is set, the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is set for the 3rd to 14th rounds, and the effect opening / closing device 398 (see FIG. 10) is set for the 15th round. If it is determined that it is not long hit, the number of short hit rounds, the opening time per round, the limit number are set, and the opening / closing device to be opened is set. Specifically, the number of rounds is set to, for example, 2 rounds, the opening time per round is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds, the limited number is set to, for example, 9 and the opening / closing device to be opened is set to, for example, the effect opening / closing device 398 .

  When the number of rounds, the opening time per round, the limit number, and the opening / closing device to be opened are set in either step S2006 or step S2007, the processing flag is updated to “5” (step S2008), and the jackpot game starts The process ends.

[Small hit game start processing]
Next, based on FIG. 88, an example of a small hit game start process will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process. In the small hit game starting process, first, the number of small hits released, the opening time per time, the limit number, and the opening device to be opened are set (step S2201). Specifically, for example, the number of times of opening is set to 2, for example, the opening time per time is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds, the limited number is set to, for example, 9, and the opening device to be opened is set in the effect opening / closing device 398. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6” and the small hit game start process is terminated.

[Special electric utility jackpot control processing]
Next, an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. First, in the special electric utility jackpot control process, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing device 397 is open (step S2401). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is open. If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is open (YES in step S2401), then whether or not the opening time of the predetermined opening / closing device 397 (the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400) has elapsed. Is determined (step S2402). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time set in the jackpot game start process has been reached. If it is determined that the opening time of the switchgear 397 has elapsed (YES in step S2402), the switchgear 397 is closed (step S2404), and the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2402 that the opening time of the opening / closing device 397 has not elapsed (NO in step S2402), it is determined whether a predetermined limited number of game balls have been received by the opening / closing device 397 (step S2403). . Specifically, the limited number of game balls set in the jackpot game start process are the opening / closing device 397 in which the opening operation is executed (when the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed, the opening / closing device for the effect) 398, when the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is being executed, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 has been accepted. If it is determined that a limited number of game balls have been received by the opening / closing device 397 that is performing the opening operation (YES in step S2403), the opening / closing device 397 is closed (step S2404), and the special electric accessory big hit control process is performed. finish. If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 has not received a limited number of game balls (NO in step S2403), the special electric utility big hit control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the opening / closing device 397 is not open (NO in step S2401), it is determined whether a predetermined number of rounds has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds set in the jackpot game start process has been reached. If it is determined that the predetermined number of rounds has not been reached (NO in step S2405), a predetermined opening device among the effect opening / closing device 398 and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is opened (step S2406). The special electric utility jackpot control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2405 that the predetermined number of rounds has been reached (YES in step S2405), the jackpot flag is turned off (step S2407), and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is accompanied by a probability fluctuation ( Step S2408). Specifically, when it is determined that the result determined using the design random number is a probability variation, it is determined that the probability variation is accompanied. If it is determined that the jackpot is accompanied by a probability fluctuation (YES in step S2408), the probability fluctuation function is activated (step S2409), and then it is determined whether the jackpot is a long hit. Specifically, if the long hit flag is ON, it is determined that the long hit is reached. If it is determined that it is a long hit (YES in step S2410), the long hit flag is turned OFF (step S2411), then the time reduction function is activated (step S2412), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that it is not long hit (NO in step S2410), the short hit flag is turned off (step S2413), and then it is determined whether or not the winning operation is in the short-time function operation (step S2414). That is, when the short hit is made, the short hit flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S2414 to determine whether or not the short time function is in operation. If it is determined that the winning function is in operation (YES in step S2414), the operation of the shortening function is started (step S2412), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  Returning to step S2408, if it is determined that the jackpot is not accompanied by probability fluctuation (NO in step S2408), the long hit flag is turned off (step S2415), the operation of the time reduction function is started (step S2416), and the time reduction function is activated. A prescribed number of operations (for example, 100) is set (step S2417), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  In step S2418, the processing flag is updated to “0”, and the special symbol electric accessory big hit control process is terminated. The special electric accessory is a concept including an effect opening / closing device 398, a jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, an effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568, and a jackpot gaming opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 642.

[Special electric accessory small hit control processing]
Next, an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process. In this special electric accessory small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined limited number of game balls have been received by the opening / closing device 397 (step S2501). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the limit number (for example, 9) of game balls set in the small hit game start process has been received by the opening / closing device 397. If it is determined that a limited number of game balls are not received by the opening / closing device 397 (NO in step S2501), it is determined whether the opening / closing device 397 is open (step S2502). If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is not open (NO in step S2502), a predetermined opening / closing device (for example, the opening / closing device for effect 398) is opened (step S2503) among the effect opening / closing device 398 and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400. ), The special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2502 that the opening / closing device 397 is open (YES in step S2502), it is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time of the opening / closing device (for example, the effect opening / closing device 398) has elapsed (step S2504). . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time (for example, 0.3 seconds) set in the small hit game start process has elapsed. If it is determined that the opening time of the predetermined opening / closing device 397 has not elapsed (NO in step S2504), the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S2504 that the predetermined opening time of the opening / closing device 397 has elapsed (YES in step S2504), the opening / closing device 397 is closed (step S2505), and it is determined whether a predetermined number of times of opening has been reached. (Step S2506). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of times of opening / closing the opening / closing device 397 has reached the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) set in the small hit game start procedure. At this time, if it is determined that the predetermined number of releases has not been reached (NO in step S2506), the electric accessory small hit control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of times of opening / closing device 397 has reached a predetermined number of times of opening (YES in step S2506), the process proceeds to step S2509.

  Returning to step S2501, if it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 has received a limited number of game balls (YES in step S2501), it is determined whether the opening / closing device 397 is being opened (step S2507). If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is open (YES in step S2507), the opening / closing device 397 is closed (step S2508), and the process proceeds to step S2509. Returning to step S2507, if it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is not open (NO in step S2507), the process directly proceeds to step S2509.

  In step S2509, the processing flag is updated to “0”, and the special electric accessory small hitting control process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the opening time of the switchgear is set to 0.3 seconds, for example. In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) has been won in the opening / closing device. The hit game ends. However, since the opening time of the switchgear in the small hit game is set so that it is extremely difficult to win the maximum number of winnings, in most cases the predetermined number of opening without winning the maximum winnings The opening / closing device is opened (for example, twice).

[About fluctuation time]
Next, based on FIG. 91, an example of the fluctuation time concerning the deviation fluctuation pattern when the time-shortening function is not operated will be described. FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing the variation time required for the unsuccessful variation pattern without the reach effect when the short-time function is not activated. FIG. 91A shows the variation time of the first special symbol when the number of reserved first symbol symbols is 0 or 1 (that is, the variation time in the case of normal variation of variation number 1). The variation time in this case is 11800 ms. FIG. 91 (B) shows the variation time of the first special symbol when the number of reserved first symbol symbols is 2 (that is, the variation time for the short variation 1 of variation number 2). The variation time in this case is 6000 ms. FIG. 91 (C) shows the variation time of the first special symbol when the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is three (that is, the variation time in the case of the short variation 2 of the variation number 3). The variation time in this case is 2900 ms. From the above, in the case of a detachment that does not involve a reach effect when the time-shortening function is not activated, the variation time of the first special symbol becomes longer as the number of retained first special symbols is smaller. When the time-shortening function is not activated, it is more difficult for a game ball that is driven toward the game area 37 to win the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 than to win the first start port 390. When the number of reservations for the first special symbol becomes zero, the possibility that the number of reservations for the second special symbol is also zero is high. If both the hold of the first special symbol and the hold of the second special symbol become 0, neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the interest is lowered. Therefore, in the case of a detachment that does not involve a reach effect when the time-shortening function is not activated, a decrease in interest can be suppressed by increasing the variation time of the first special symbol as the number of first special symbol reservations decreases.

  FIGS. 91D and 91E show the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the variation time in the case of the variation number 73 and the variation number 74). When the time-shortening function is not activated and the determination result by the second special symbol success / failure determining means 714 is out of place, any one of FIGS. It will be the fluctuation time. Therefore, there is no correlation between the number of reserved special symbols and the variation time of the second special symbol, and the variation time of the second special symbol is determined regardless of the number of retained special symbols. In addition, when the determination result by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is out of the range (not long hit, short hit or small hit), the variation number 73 or the variation number 74 is selected. Is executed. In addition, since the pair of movable pieces 396 are closed when the time-shortening function is not activated, it is almost impossible for the game ball that has been driven toward the game area 37 to win the third starting port 394. In addition, since it is more difficult for a game ball to win the second start port 392 than to win a game ball to the first start port 390, the game ball that has been driven toward the game area 37 enters the second start port 392. By always changing the reach when winning, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the winning to the second starting port 392 and to suppress a decrease in interest. Note that the variation time in the case of FIG. 91D is 9500 ms, and the variation time in the case of FIG. 91E is 11300 ms.

  Next, based on FIG. 92, a description will be given of the variation time required for the variation pattern of detachment not accompanied by the reach effect at the time-shortening function operation. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing the variation time required for the unsuccessful variation pattern without the reach effect when the short-time function is activated. FIG. 92 (A) shows the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when the probability changing function is activated (that is, the time shortening fluctuation 1 of the fluctuation number 5). The variation time in this case is 2200 ms. FIG. 92 (B) shows the variation time of the second special symbol when the probability variation function is not activated (that is, the time shortening variation 2 of the variation number 7). The variation time in this case is 2300 ms. Therefore, although the variation time of the first special symbol varies depending on whether the probability variation function is not activated or activated, there is a correlation between the number of reserved first symbol symbols and the variation time of the first special symbol. Instead, it is determined regardless of the number of reserved first symbols.

  FIG. 92C shows the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the short time normal variation 1 of the variation number 4) when the probability variation function is activated and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is zero. . The variation time in this case is 4800 ms. FIG. 92 (D) shows the variation time of the second special symbol when the probability variation function is activated and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 1 or more (that is, the time shortening variation 1 of the variation number 5). Yes. The variation time in this case is 2200 ms. FIG. 92 (E) shows the variation time of the second special symbol when the probability variation function is not activated and the number of reserved second symbol symbols is 0 (that is, the short time normal variation 2 of the variation number 6). Yes. The variation time in this case is 5200 ms. FIG. 92 (F) shows the variation time of the second special symbol when the probability variation function is not activated and the number of reserved second symbol symbols is 1 or more (that is, the short-time variation 2 of variation number 7). ing. The variation time in this case is 2300 ms. From the above, in the case of a departure without a reach effect at the time-shortening function operation, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes longer as the number of second special symbols held is smaller. More specifically, when the number of reservations of the second special symbol is 0, the number of reservations of the second special symbol is longer than that when it is 1 or more. Since the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 396 is executed at the time-shortening function operation, the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37 is much easier than winning the first start port 390. It becomes possible to win 394. Therefore, when the number of reservations of the second special symbol becomes zero, there is a high possibility that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is also zero. If both the hold of the first special symbol and the hold of the second special symbol become 0, neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the interest is lowered. Therefore, in the case of detachment without a reach effect at the time-shortening function operation, the variation time of the second special symbol when the second special symbol hold number is 0, and the second special symbol hold number is one or more By making it longer than the variation time of the second special symbol in, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93 to FIG. 97, a variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 will be described. The decorative symbols are composed of a plurality of symbol sequences. In this embodiment, the left symbol sequence 1153a displayed on the left side as viewed from the player, the middle symbol sequence 1153b displayed in the middle as viewed from the player, And, it is composed of three symbol rows of right symbol row 1153c displayed on the right side as viewed from the player.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a decorative symbol when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means is derived to the effect display device. That is, FIG. 93 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative symbol 1153 before the start of variation, FIG. 93 (B) is a diagram illustrating a variation of the decorative symbol 1153, and FIG. 93 (C) is a decorative symbol. FIG. 93D is a diagram showing an aspect after the fluctuation stop of 1153, FIG. 93D is a figure showing an aspect for deriving that it is a reach, and FIG. 93E is a figure showing an aspect during fluctuation of the decorative symbol 1153 after the reach. FIG. As shown in FIG. 93 (B), the decorative symbol 1153 changes in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c in the vertical direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). This is a scroll fluctuation that scrolls in the direction of heading. And it stops in order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), the fluctuation in which the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c stop at different symbols that are completely unrelated is the “reach” in this embodiment. "Fluctuation of deviation without production". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), when the stop symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol in the right symbol row 1153c are the same, reach is derived, and as shown in FIG. 93 (E). Only the middle symbol row 1153b scrolls. As a result, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 when only the stop symbol of the middle symbol row 1153b is different is the “displacement variation with reach effect” in the present embodiment, and the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b. The variation of the decorative symbol 1153 when all the symbol sequences 1153b stop at the same symbol is the “big hit variation” in the present embodiment.

  In addition, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115, the decoration mode of the decorative symbol 1153 is a scroll that scrolls in the vertical direction regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated. It is a fluctuation.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the decorative symbol when the lottery result is derived to the effect display device when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means is off when the time-shortening function is not activated. That is, FIG. 94 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 before the start of change, FIG. 94 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 during change, and FIG. 94 (C) is a reach. FIG. 94 (D) is a diagram showing an aspect for deriving a certain state, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 94B, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is such that the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are substantially at the same position as the stop position (the position shown in FIG. 94A) before the change starts. While rotating, the front and back surfaces are alternately displayed while staying, and the middle symbol row 1153b is scrolling scrolling in the vertical direction as in the mode shown in FIG. 93 (B). Then, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c stop rotating almost simultaneously, and then the middle symbol row 1153b stops.

  In this case, the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are always the same symbol, and reach is derived as shown in FIG. 94 (C), and further as shown in FIG. 94 (D). In addition, only the middle symbol row 1153b scrolls. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), when only the stop symbol of the middle symbol row 1153b is different, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect” in the present embodiment. If the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b all stop at the same symbol due to the scroll variation shown in FIG. 94 (D), the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit” in this embodiment. Fluctuation ".

  Here, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the effect display device 115 when the time-shortening function is activated is the effect of the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 being the effect display. This is almost the same as the variation pattern of the decorative design 1153 when the device 115 is derived. That is, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is a scroll variation in which all of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are scrolled in the vertical direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). It is. And it stops in order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b.

  Thus, if the time-shortening function is not activated, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115, and the second special symbol lottery means 710. The variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result is derived to the effect display device 115 is different. On the other hand, if the time reduction function is activated, the variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710. Is the same as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the symbol is derived to the effect display device 115.

  In addition, the information indicating that the second special symbol hold counter 713 is held when the time-shortening function is not operated is displayed in the second display mode (the mode in which the character is displayed) in the hold display area 1150 as described above. The On the other hand, the information indicating that the second special symbol hold counter 713 is on hold at the time-shortening function operation is the third mode indicating that the second special symbol hold counter 703 is on hold (that is, the character display disappears). Display in the same mode as the above mode).

  As described above, if the time reduction function is not activated, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is displayed on the effect display device 115. The variation pattern of the decorative design 1153 differs depending on the derived case. Also, a display mode of information indicating that the information is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 displayed in the hold display area 1150 and a second special symbol hold counter 713 displayed in the hold display area 1150 It is also different from the display mode of information indicating that there is. On the other hand, when the time-short function is activated, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the effect display device 115. The display mode of information indicating that the decoration pattern 1153 is changed and the special symbol hold counters 703 and 713 displayed in the hold display area 1150 indicate that they are held are almost the same.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the decorative symbol when the lottery result by each special symbol lottery means is short hit or small hit and the lottery result is derived to the effect display device. That is, when the lottery result is a short hit or a small hit, both the same lots are drawn from the same table 13 regardless of whether the lottery is by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710. Since it is selected, the same variation mode is performed.

  FIG. 95 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect before the start of variation of the decorative design 1153, FIGS. 95 (B) to (G) are diagrams showing a mode of the decorative design 1153 during variation, and FIG. 95 (H) is It is a figure which shows the aspect after the fluctuation | variation stop of the decoration design 1153. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (B), the decorative symbol 1153 changes in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c in the vertical direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). This is a scroll fluctuation that scrolls in the direction of heading. As shown in FIG. 95D, after the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are displayed larger than the display of the middle symbol row 1153b, the wife runs on the left symbol row 1153a and stops (see FIG. 95). 95 (E)), and then the wife runs on the right symbol row 1153c (see FIG. 95 (F)) and stops (FIG. 95 (G)). As shown in FIG. 95 (G), the “song” symbol is stopped on the left symbol row 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped on the right symbol row 1153c, and only the middle symbol row 1153b is scrolled vertically. The aspect to do is reach variation that may be won per short, small or probable length. As shown in FIG. 95 (H), when the “legend” symbol stops in the middle symbol row 1153b, the occurrence of the short hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state, or the long hit gaming state is determined.

  Next, based on FIG. 96 and FIG. 97, the fluctuation | variation aspect of the decoration design 1153 is demonstrated. FIG. 96 is a functional block diagram mainly showing a function related to display mode determination among the functional configuration of the main control board. FIG. 97 is a time chart showing the display modes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 96, when a game ball wins the first start port 390 and is detected by the first start port sensor 644, the first special symbol lottery means 700 performs the lottery as described above. Specifically, when the game ball wins the first start opening 390, the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the first special symbol determination determination random number extraction means 702, and the acquired random number value and the determination table for the determination of success / failure (special symbol normal) Based on the hourly determination table 706 or the special symbol probability changing time determination table 708), the first special symbol determination unit 704 determines whether or not the first special symbol is correct.

  The main control board 131 includes first display mode determination means 810 and second display mode determination means 820. The first display mode determining means 810 has a plurality of types (two or more) stored in the display mode storage means 830 as display modes derived to the effect display device 115 by the first special symbol image display control means 851 (see FIG. 57). ) Is selected and determined from the display modes. The second display mode determining means 820 has a plurality of types (two or more types) stored in the display mode storage means 830 of display modes derived to the effect display device 115 by the second special symbol image display control means 852 (see FIG. 57). ) Is selected and determined from the display modes.

  And based on the result determination by the first special symbol determination unit 704 or the second special symbol determination unit 714, one of the plurality of display modes stored in the display mode storage unit 830 is displayed. The selection is determined, and the command transmission means 749 transmits a command to the peripheral control board 662. The peripheral control board 662 that has received such a command controls display of the display mode selected and determined by the effect image display control means 800 on the effect display device 115.

  Specifically, the 1st display mode determination means 810 judges whether the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means 700 is winning. On the other hand, the 2nd display mode determination means 820 judges whether the lottery by the 2nd special symbol lottery means 710 is winning.

  The first display mode determination means 810 includes a first display mode determination selection means 811, a reach out display mode selection determination means 812, a win display mode selection determination means 813, a out display display mode determination means 814, and an advantageous gaming state out-of-display display mode determination means. 815.

  In the normal gaming state, the off display mode determining means 814 is a off display mode only when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 0 or 1 and the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is off. When the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is 2, it is determined as a shortening variation 1, and when the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is 3 at the maximum, it is determined as a shortening variation 2. .

  The advantageous game state out-of-game display mode determining means 815 changes the time-shortening only when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is out of the short-time gaming state, regardless of the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Set to 1 (when the probability changing function is activated) or 2 to shorten the time reduction (when the probability varying function is not activated).

  The first display mode determination / selection unit 811 selects which one of the outlier display mode determination unit 814 and the advantageous gaming state outlier display mode determination unit 815 determines the display mode derived to the common symbol display area 115c. The first display mode determination / selection unit 811 selects the advantageous game state out-of-play display mode determination unit 815 in the advantageous game state, and the advantageous game state in accordance with the transition from the advantageous game state to the normal game state. Instead of the outlier display mode determining means 815, the outlier display mode determining means 814 is selected.

  Reach out-of-reach display mode selection deciding means 812 performs display in the out-of-reach display mode in a lottery that is different from the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and that the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is off. Only when one of them is selected and determined, one of the two or more reach out-of-reach display modes is further selected and determined. The winning display mode selection determining means 813 selects and determines one long winning display mode from two or more long winning display modes when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is winning. To do.

  The second display mode determination means 820 includes a second display mode determination selection means 821, a reach out special display mode selection determination means 822, a hit special display mode selection determination means 823, a special out display display determination means 824, and an advantageous gaming state reduction off. Display mode determining means 825 is provided.

  The reach out special display mode selection determining unit 822 selects and determines one of the reach out special display modes from among two or more types of reach out special modes when the second special symbol lottery unit 710 is out of the lottery. To do.

  When the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a win, the hit special display mode selection determining unit 823 selects and determines one of the hit special display modes from two or more hit special display modes.

  The special display mode determination means 824 for short reach is a special display for short reach out only when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is out, regardless of the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 in the normal gaming state. The mode or the long reach off special display mode is determined.

  Advantageous gaming state shortening out display mode determining means 825 is only in the case of the short-time gaming state, when the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is 0, only when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is out. Time short normal fluctuation 1 (when probability fluctuation is activated) or time short normal fluctuation 2 (when probability fluctuation is not in operation) is determined, and when the number of holdings by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is any one of 1 to 3, the time is shortened. Change 1 (when probability fluctuation is activated) or shortened time fluctuation 2 (when probability fluctuation is not activated).

  The second display mode determination / selection unit 821 selects which of the special display mode determination unit 824 and the advantageous gaming state shortening / exclusion display mode determination unit 825 determines the display mode to be derived to the common symbol display area 115c. . The second display mode determination / selection means 821 selects the advantageous game state shortening / outgoing display mode determination means 825 when the game is in the advantageous game state, and in accordance with the transition from the advantageous game state to the normal game state, In place of the state shortening out-of-display mode determining means 825, the out-of-range special display mode determining means 824 is selected.

  On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is performed as described above. Specifically, when the game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means for determination 712 for the second special symbol, and the acquired random number value and the determination of success / failure are obtained. Based on the table (special symbol normal time determination table 706 or special symbol probability change time determination table 708), the second special symbol determination unit 714 determines whether or not the second special symbol is correct. Based on the determination result of the second special symbol determination unit 714, the display mode storage unit 830 selects and determines one of the display modes, and the command transmission unit 749 A command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 662. The peripheral control board 662 that has received such a command controls display of the display mode selected and determined by the effect image display control means 800 on the effect display device 115.

  The lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived by the first special symbol image display control means 851 to the common symbol display area 115c (see FIG. 55). The lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c by the second special symbol image display control means 852. Note that the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 are all of the tables 1 to 33 stored in the display mode storage means 830 in the common symbol display area 115c. It is derived after the decorative design 1153 is displayed in a variable manner based on one of the tables.

  There are two or more types of per-long display modes and a long reach off display in the display mode of the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 (hereinafter referred to as “the variation of the first special symbol”) for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol. There are a mode, a short reach out display mode, a short hit display mode, a small hit display mode, and a out display mode. Each of these display modes has a plurality of patterns, all of which are stored in any of the tables 1 to 33 of the display mode storage unit 830.

  The long win display mode is a display mode that is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is a big win and the big win is a long win. Tables 1 to 6 (see FIG. 73) As shown, six patterns (six types) of display modes are stored. As shown in FIG. 97, the long win display mode is composed of a symbol variation period and a long reach variation period.

  In the variation of the first special symbol, the variation is started for all of the three decorative symbols 1153, and is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The symbol variation period means a period from the start of variation for all three decorative symbols 1153 to when the right symbol stops (that is, until the variation of only the middle symbol that is the final stop symbol). The long reach fluctuation period is a long reach (generally referred to as super reach) that gives the player the expectation of winning a long win when reaching reach after the end of the symbol change period. It means the time until the middle symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Note that the number of decorative symbols 1153 is not limited to three. For example, if the number of decorative symbols 1153 is plural, the variable display of N symbols (N is 2 or more) among the plural decorative symbols 1153 is started. The symbol variation period is the period until (N-1) symbols out of N symbols are stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 97, “Left” means stop display of the left symbol, “Right” means stop display of the right symbol, and “Middle” means stop display of the middle symbol.

  The long reach miss display mode is a mode in which selection is determined when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is missed, and a plurality of display patterns are displayed as shown in Tables 19 to 21 (see FIG. 81). It is stored in the mode storage means 830. Each of these display patterns corresponds to the display pattern in the long win display mode. For example, in the table 1 (see FIG. 73) in which the display mode per long is selected and determined, the variation number 19 “Song reach C (via song reach A) length” is stored, and the long reach out of display mode is selected. In the determined table 19 (see FIG. 81), “song reach C (via song reach A) off” of the variation number 18 corresponding to the variation number 19 is stored. When a plurality of symbols (three symbols in this embodiment) are stopped, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner in which all of the plurality of symbols match. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain that he won per long.

  Further, the long reach out-of-range display mode is a display mode that closely resembles the corresponding long hit display mode over time. Specifically, it has a symbol variation period that is substantially the same as the long-permission display mode and a long reach variation period that is substantially the same as the long-permission display mode. Accordingly, the long reach out-of-range display mode is very similar to the long hit display mode over time. As described above, the long reach out-of-display mode is made to be a display mode that closely resembles the long win display mode over time, so that the player can draw lots by the first special symbol lottery means 700 until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that it may have been won, and to suppress the decline of interest.

  Note that “similarly over time” means that not only the variation mode displayed on the effect display device 115 but also the temporal display mode is very similar. That is, it means that the display mode after x seconds has passed is almost the same. “Extremely similar” means that the players are similar to the extent that they cannot recognize the difference from the viewpoint of the player, and the concept includes “same”.

  The short reach out display mode is a mode that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is out, and a display mode that is very similar to a part of the long reach out display mode over time. Have. Specifically, the short reach out display mode includes a symbol variation period that is substantially the same as the symbol variation period that is a part of the long reach display mode and the long reach display mode, and a long reach variation period that is a part of the long reach display mode. And a long reach variation period that is very similar over time. Only the final stop symbol (middle symbol) that is finally stopped and displayed at a timing different from that of other symbols among the plurality of symbols is stopped and displayed in a reach manner different from the other symbols (left symbol and right symbol).

  The out-of-display mode is a display mode that closely resembles the symbol variation period that is a part of the short reach out-of-display mode over time. Note that at least one of the plurality of symbols (in this embodiment, the right symbol or the left symbol) is different from the other symbols and is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the reach manner.

  The short win display mode is a display mode that is selected and determined when a big win is won in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, and the winning big hit is a short win, and is a part of the long win display mode. A symbol variation period that is very similar to the symbol variation period over time is included as part of the variation mode. Specifically, the short hit display mode has a symbol change short period and a short hit reach change period that are very similar to those of the long hit display mode over time. Since the short hit reach variation period has a shorter variation time than the long reach variation period, the variation time of the entire short hit variation mode is shorter than the variation time of the entire long hit display mode. Note that at least one of the plurality of symbols (in this embodiment, the right symbol or the left symbol) is different from the other symbols and is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the reach manner. As a result, even if the game value given to the player is won in the short win, which is smaller than the case where the player is won per long, the player is not given unnecessary expectation, and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  The small win display mode is a display mode that is selected and determined when a big win is lost in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and a small win is won. It is similar. Specifically, the small hit display mode has a symbol variation short period and a small hit reach variation period that are very similar to the symbol variation period of the long hit display mode over time. The small hit reach fluctuation period is very similar to the short hit reach fluctuation period over time. As a result, the entire small hit display mode closely resembles the entire short hit display mode over time. Further, since the small hit reach fluctuation period is substantially the same as the short hit reach fluctuation period, the fluctuation time is shorter than the long reach fluctuation period. Thereby, the variation time of the entire small hit variation mode is shorter than the variation time of the entire long hit display mode. Similar to the short win display mode, at least one of the multiple symbols (in this embodiment, the right symbol or the left symbol) is different from the other symbols and is stopped and displayed in a mode different from the reach mode. As a result, even if the game value given to the player is won in a small win smaller than the case where the player is won per long, the player is not given unnecessary expectation and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the display mode of the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “the variation of the second special symbol”) includes a special display mode per long and a special display out of long reach. There are modes, short reach off special display modes, short hit display modes, and small hit display modes. Each of these display modes has a plurality of patterns, all of which are stored in any of the tables 1 to 33 of the display mode storage unit 830.

  Here, both the short win display mode and the small hit display mode are display modes in which the display mode in the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode in the variation of the second special symbol are the same. Note that the short hit display mode and the small hit display mode are not necessarily the same display mode, and both modes may be similar to each other.

  The long win special display mode is a display mode that is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is win, and as shown in Tables 7 to 12 (see FIG. 75), The display mode is stored. Moreover, the special display mode per long consists of a symbol variation short period and a long reach variation period. When a plurality of symbols (three symbols in this embodiment) are stopped, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner in which all of the plurality of symbols match. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain that he won per long.

  In the variation of the second special symbol, among the three decorative symbols 1153, the left symbol and the right symbol perform a rotation variation different from the scroll variation in the first special symbol, and the middle symbol performs a scroll variation. Then, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed almost simultaneously, and then the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The symbol variation short period is a period from the start of variation for all three decorative symbols 1153 until the left symbol and the right symbol stop (that is, until the variation of only the middle symbol that is the final stop symbol). means. This symbol variation short period is a variation in which the variation time is shorter than the symbol variation period in the variation of the first special symbol. The long reach variation period is a variation period that is very similar to the long reach variation period in the variation of the first special symbol. The effect during the long reach variation period is memorable for the player because the player has a sense of expectation that a jackpot game may occur. As a result, the special display mode for long hits is a display mode that is very similar to the long hit display mode for the first special symbol for the player. Note that the change time of the special display mode per long time is approximately the same as the long reach change period in the change period of the special display mode per long time and the long reach change period in the display mode per long time. However, since it is shorter than the time in the symbol variation period, it becomes shorter than the variation time of the long-range display mode.

  The long reach off special display mode is a mode that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is off, and there are a plurality of display patterns as shown in Tables 22 to 24 (see FIG. 84). It is stored in the display mode storage unit 830. Each of these display patterns corresponds to the display pattern in the special display mode per long. For example, in the table 7 (see FIG. 75) in which the special display mode per long is selected and determined, the variable number 82 “Song reach B (via song reach A) long” is stored, and the special display mode out of long reach is stored. Is stored in the table 22 in which the change number 81 corresponding to the change number 82 is “disconnected by song reach B (via song reach A)”. Only the final stop symbol (middle symbol) that is finally stopped and displayed at a timing different from that of other symbols among the plurality of symbols is stopped and displayed in a reach manner different from the other symbols (left symbol and right symbol).

  Moreover, the long reach off special display mode is composed of a display mode that closely resembles the corresponding special per-long display mode over time. Specifically, the long reach off special display mode has a symbol variation short period substantially the same as the long perk special display mode and a long reach variation period substantially the same as the long perk special display mode. Thereby, the long reach off special display mode is very similar to the long hit special display mode over time. In this way, by setting the long reach off special display mode to be a display mode that closely resembles the long display special display mode over time, the first special symbol lottery means 700 is displayed to the player until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that a lottery will be won, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that “similarly over time” means that not only the variation mode displayed on the effect display device 115 but also the temporal display mode is very similar. That is, it means that the display mode after x seconds has passed is almost the same. “Extremely similar” means that the players are similar to the extent that they cannot recognize the difference from the viewpoint of the player, and the concept includes “same”.

  The short reach off special display mode is a mode that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is off, and there are a plurality of display patterns as shown in Tables 22 to 24 (see FIG. 84). It is stored in the display mode storage unit 830. Each of these display patterns corresponds to a special display mode per long. For example, in the table 7 (see FIG. 75) in which the special display mode per long is selected and determined, the variation number 75 “per normal length” is stored, and the table 22 (in which the special display mode out of short reach is selected and determined) In FIG. 84), “normal deviation (one symbol before)” of variation number 73 corresponding to variation number 75 and “normal deviation (after one symbol)” of variation number 74 are stored.

  Moreover, the short reach off special display mode has a display mode that is very similar to a part of the special display mode per long time. Specifically, it has a symbol variation short period of the special display mode per long and a short reach variation period of the short reach off variation period of the first special symbol. In addition, the variation time of the short reach out special display mode is substantially the same as the variation time of the first special symbol out display mode. Thereby, reach can be generated without lengthening the fluctuation time. That is, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, reach is always generated if the time-shortening function is not activated. Normally, when a reach occurs, it will be longer than the fluctuation time when the reach does not occur. Therefore, when reach is generated each time the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 when the time is not activated, the fluctuation time becomes long, the progress of the game is slowed, and the interest is lowered. Therefore, when the short reach out special display mode is displayed as the second special symbol display mode when the time is not activated, the display time of the first special symbol is set to the same variation time as the variation time of the out display mode. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to slow progress of the game.

  In addition, the short reach variation period of the short reach out-of-display mode of the first special symbol and the short reach variation period of the short reach out of the special display mode are substantially the same with time. The variation time of the short reach variation display mode of the first special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol variation variation display mode by the time required for the short reach variation period. Therefore, the variation time of the entire short reach off special display mode is shorter than the variation time of the short reach off display mode of the first special symbol by the time required for the short reach variation period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 in the short time special display mode of the second special symbol is the variation pattern of the first special symbol in that the left symbol and the right symbol are rotationally varied. This is clearly different from the variation of the decorative pattern 1153 in the display. Therefore, in the case of the short reach off special display mode, the player can grasp that the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 starts and at the same time the variation of the second special symbol. Thus, in the case of the out-of-display mode, the short reach out-of-display mode, and the long reach out-of-display mode, it cannot be grasped that the mode is out during the fluctuation, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  That is, the occurrence of reach can also be achieved by setting the variation time in a display mode in which reach occurs (for example, short reach out-of-display mode) and the variation time in a display mode in which reach does not occur (eg, out-of-display mode) to substantially the same time. It can suppress that the progress of the game by becomes slow. However, in such a case, in the display mode in which the reach occurs, if the reach does not occur even after the time that the reach should occur, the reach no longer occurs (that is, a big hit). It will be understood during the change, and the interest will be reduced. Therefore, in addition to the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 performed by winning the first starting opening 390, a lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 that always generates a reach at a predetermined time is provided. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the fact that the reach will not occur during the fluctuation. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the manner of variation in the symbol variation period of the first special symbol and the manner of variation in the symbol variation short period of the second special symbol are clearly different, so that no reach will occur. It is possible to suppress remarkably during the fluctuation.

  It should be noted that the display mode related to the fluctuation when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is short hit or small hit is related to the fluctuation when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is short hit or small hit. The variation mode is the same as the display mode.

[About sub-main processing]
Next, processing executed by the CPU 664 mounted on the peripheral control board 662 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing.

  As shown in FIG. 98, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control board 662 performs an initial setting process (step S310). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM 668 mounted on the peripheral control board 662 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during the initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S310) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S312).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 664 generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady treatment. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 ms elapses, 16 ms While the progress flag T is set, the 16 ms progress flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S312 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S314), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S316).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the effect display device 115 and the panel decoration lamp 690 and the like via the display device control board 116 and the lamp driving board 688 is executed based on the command received from the main control board 131, respectively. Is done. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S312 again, and each time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set (that is, every 16 ms), the above-described steps S314 and S316 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S312 (when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the CPU 664 executes the processes of steps S320 to S420. In the command analysis process in step S320, the command received from the main control board 131 is analyzed. In the effect control process in step S340, a control process related to the effect display device 115 is executed based on the effect command relating to the variation pattern received by the command receiving means 750.

  In the sound control process in step 360, a control process related to the speakers 18 and 57 for generating a sound effect (for example, BGM or sound) is executed. In this sound control process, a process of changing the BGM according to the gaming state or the mode of the effect displayed on the effect display device 115 is performed.

In the lamp control processing in step S380, control processing related to the panel decoration lamp 690 and the center decoration lamp 304 is performed. In the information output process in step S400, a command related to the variation pattern, a command related to the start winning to each start port 390, 392, 394 and other display commands are transmitted to the display device control board 116, and each lamp is turned on / off. A turn-off command is transmitted to the lamp driving board 688. In the random number update process of step S420, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S340) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S320-step S420 in a 16 ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if 16 ms or more is required from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process starts immediately after the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command in step S320). Do not execute from analysis processing. That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S312 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S330) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the CPU 664 first determines whether a command has been received from the main control board 131 (step S321). In this embodiment, when a command is received from the main control board 131, other processes such as a 16 ms steady process are interrupted to generate a command reception interrupt, and the received command is received by the RAM 668 mounted on the peripheral control board 662. Save in the receive command storage area. The received command storage area is stored in each area corresponding to the order in which the commands are received. Then, the contents of the reception command storage area are confirmed, and if the reception command is stored, the reception command having the reception order in the reception command storage area is read (step S322).

  It is determined whether or not the read received command is a start opening prize command (step S323), and if the read reception command is a start opening winning command (YES in step S323), it is determined whether or not it is a first start opening effective prize. (Step S324). If it is the first start opening effective winning (YES in step S324), the first starting opening effective winning flag is turned ON (step S325). Then, the command analysis process ends.

  If it is determined in step S324 that the first start opening is not valid (NO in step S324), it is determined whether or not the second / third start opening is valid (step S326). If there is (YES in step S326), the second and third starting opening valid winning flags are turned ON (step S327). Then, the command analysis process ends.

  Whether or not the first start opening valid winning is determined is whether or not the start opening winning command (see step S323) received from the main control board 131 is a command indicating that the first starting opening 390 has been won. When the start opening prize command received from the main control board 131 is a command indicating that the first start opening 390 has been won, it is stored by the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 (see FIG. 57). This is when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is less than the upper limit first predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment). That is, when a game ball is received at the first starting port 390, the command receiving means 750 determines whether or not the command receiving means 750 has been counted by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (that is, the count number by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is the first count). Regardless of whether or not the predetermined number has been reached, a command indicating that a game ball has been received (winned) is received at the first start port 390 transmitted from the main control board 131 (command transmission means 749). To do. At this time, if the number of first special symbol reservations stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 is less than the first predetermined number, the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 stores the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872. 1 is added to the number of reserved special symbols, and the first start opening is awarded. On the other hand, if the number of first special symbol reservations stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 reaches the first predetermined number, the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 stores the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872. Maintain the number of reserved special symbols (ie, do not add). At this time, even if a command indicating that the game ball has been received at the first start opening 390 is received, the first start opening effective winning is not achieved. Thus, the peripheral control board 662 (command receiving means 750) receives a command indicating that a game ball has won a prize at the first start opening 390 regardless of whether or not the first start opening is a valid winning. When the number of reserved special symbols stored in the first special symbol reserved number storage means 872 is less than the first predetermined number (that is, when 1 is added), the first start opening effective winning is achieved. When the number of reserved special symbols stored in the special symbol holding number storage means 872 has reached the first predetermined number (that is, if it is not added), there is no effective winning. Further, the counter value by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the hold number by the first special symbol hold number storage means 872 are the same value.

  Similarly, the second and third starting opening valid winnings are the same as the first starting opening effective winnings, in which the starting opening winning command received from the main control board 131 (see step S323) is the second starting opening 392 or the third starting opening prize. This is a command indicating that a winning has been made at the start port 394, and means that the number of second special symbol reservations stored by the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 (see FIG. 57) is added. That is, when a game ball is received at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the command receiving means 750 determines whether or not the command receiving means 750 has been counted by the second special symbol hold counter 713 (that is, the second special symbol hold counter 713). The second start port 392 or the third start port transmitted from the main control board 131 (command transmission means 749) regardless of whether the count number by the second control number reaches the second predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment). In 394, a command indicating that the game ball has been accepted (winned) is received. At this time, if the number of second special symbol reservations stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 is less than the second predetermined number, the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 stores the second number. 1 is added to the number of reserved special symbols, and a second start opening effective winning is obtained. On the other hand, if the number of second special symbol reservations stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 reaches the second predetermined number, the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 stores the second number. Maintain the number of reserved special symbols (ie, do not add). At this time, even if a command indicating that the game ball has been received by the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 is received, the second start port effective winning is not achieved. As described above, the peripheral control board 662 (command receiving means 750) indicates that the game ball has won the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 regardless of whether or not the second start port is effective. Receives the indicated command. Then, when the number of reserved special symbols stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage means 874 is less than the second predetermined number (that is, when 1 is added), the second start opening effective winning is achieved, and the second When the number of reserved special symbols stored in the special symbol reserved number storage means 874 reaches the second predetermined number (that is, when the number is not added), the prize is not valid. The counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 713 and the hold number by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874 are the same value.

  In step S323, if the received command is not a start opening prize command (NO in step S323), it is determined whether or not the command received in step S321 is an effect command (step S328). If the command received in step S321 is an effect command (YES in step S328), the fluctuation pattern reception flag is turned on (step S329), and the command analysis process is terminated. On the other hand, if the command received in step S321 is not an effect command (NO in step S328), the flag corresponding to the received command is turned on (step S330), and the command analysis process is terminated.

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process, the CPU 664 executes processes in steps S342 to S348.

  In the first, second, and third start opening effective winning memory processing of step S342, the first special symbol reservation number is stored based on the presence or absence of the effective winning at the first starting opening 390, and the second start opening 392 or the second start opening 392 is stored. Based on the presence / absence of an effective winning at the 3 start opening 394, the second special symbol holding number is stored and an effect process related to the 2nd and 3rd starting opening effective winning is executed. Details will be described later.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process in step S344, setting is performed to start the decorative symbol variation display if an effect command is received. Specifically, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol and the stop symbol are determined according to the effect command. Details will be described later.

  In the decorative symbol variation stop process of step S346, when a variation confirmation command is received from the main control board 131, a control command is transmitted to the display device control substrate 116 to confirm the decorative symbol variation display on the effect display device 115. I do.

  In the jackpot display process of step S348, in response to the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 131, a display indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state or a display during the jackpot gaming state (for example, round display or the like) on the effect display device 115. Control is performed.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the first, second, and third starting opening valid winning memory processing. In the first, second, and third starting opening valid winning storage processing of FIG. 102, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not the first starting opening effective winning flag is ON (step S3421). That is, in step S325, if the first start opening valid winning flag is ON, it is determined that the first starting opening effective winning flag is ON. If the first start opening valid winning flag is ON (YES in step S3421), the first special symbol hold number is incremented by one (step S3422), and the first special symbol hold number display command, that is, the first special symbol is displayed. The number of reservations of the first special symbol stored in the number-of-holds storage unit 872 (see FIG. 29) is set (step S3423). Then, the first start port effective winning flag is turned OFF (step S3424).

  After turning off the first start opening effective winning flag in step S3424 or if the first starting opening effective winning flag is OFF in step S3421 (OFF in step S3421), then the second and third starting openings It is determined whether or not the winning flag is ON (step S3425). That is, in step S327, if the second and third start opening effective winning flags are ON, it is determined that the second and third starting opening effective winning flags are ON. If the second and third starting opening valid winning flags are ON (YES in step S3425), the second special symbol reservation number is incremented by one (step S3426), and the second special symbol reservation number display command, ie, the first The number of second special symbols stored in the second special symbol storage number storage means 874 (see FIG. 57) is set (step S3427). Then, after performing the second and third starting port effective winning effect processing (step S3428), the second and third starting port effective winning flags are turned OFF (step S3429), and the first, second and third starting operations are performed. The mouth valid winning memory process is terminated. In step S3425, the first, second, and third start-port effective winning storage processes are also ended when the second / third start-port effective winning flag is OFF (NO in step S3425).

  Here, the second and third starting opening valid winning effect processing in step S3428 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the second and third start opening effective winning effect processing.

  In the second and third start opening effective winning effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a short-time gaming state (step S34281). If the current gaming state is not the short-time gaming state (YES in step S34281), it is determined whether or not the production point P is less than the upper limit of 10 points (step S34282). At this time, if the effect point P is less than 10 points (YES in step S34282), one point is further stored in the current effect point P (that is, one point is added or accumulated) (step S34283), The display of the production point P is set (step S34284). In the present embodiment, the gaming state that is not the short-time gaming state corresponds to a normal gaming state and a gaming state in which only the probability changing function is activated and the short-time function is not activated (for example, a gaming state after the end of the short game).

  By the way, as described above, in the gaming state that is not the short-time gaming state, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting port 390 than the second starting port 392 and the third starting port 394, while in the short-time gaming state, It becomes easier for the game ball to win the third start port 394 than the first start port 390. If the current gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the effect point P is not stored even if a game ball wins the second starting port 392 and the third starting port 394 (NO in step S34281). . This is a privilege for winning at a starting opening where it is difficult for a game ball to win as will be described later, if the stage point P is to be given until winning at the second starting opening 392 and the third starting opening 394 in such a short gaming state. This is because the meaning of the production point P is lost.

  The production point P is a point stored in response to the winning of a game ball at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. In the present embodiment, 1 point is stored each time one game ball wins in the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. That is, the production point P is a quantitative representation of the expected value for displaying the special production. In other words, every time a game ball wins in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the effect point P is incremented by one, and the effect point P after storage is a predetermined upper limit value (this implementation) In the form, it is possible to store up to 10 points).

  Here, the special effect is composed of a special first effect and a special second effect, and corresponds to the special effect game mode in the present invention. The special first effect is an effect that is displayed on the effect display device 115 when the effect point P reaches 10 points, and the special second effect is the basis for storing 10 points of the effect points P (in other words, This is an effect that is displayed at the timing when the variation display of the second and third start opening effective winnings is performed. In other words, the special second effect is special at the timing when the variation pattern based on the second and third start opening effective winnings is displayed when the effect point P becomes 10 points due to the second and third starting opening effective winnings. This is to produce a production. Therefore, when the second and third start opening valid winnings are made, the number of holds by the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 or the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 is 1 or more and the production point P is 10 points. The special first effect is displayed immediately when the effect point P reaches 10 points, while the special second effect is held when the second and third start opening valid winnings are made. It is displayed after the change display that has been performed ends. As a result, when the effect command received in step S3201 is stored in the received command storage area at the time when 10 effect points P are stored, it is received earlier. While the variable display related to the effect command is being performed, the special first effect is continuously performed.

  After setting the display of the production point P in step S34284, it is determined whether or not 10 production points P have been stored (step S34285). Here, if 10 points of effect points P are stored (YES in step S34285), the second special symbol hold number is set in the effect hold counter (step S34286), and the special first effect flag is turned ON (step S34286). Step S34287), the second and third start opening effective winning effect processing is terminated.

  In step S34286, the second special symbol holding number is set in the production hold counter when the second and third starting opening effective winnings are displayed in a variable manner based on which 10 production points P are stored. This is to perform the special second effect.

  Further, when it is determined in step S34281 that the game is in the short-time gaming state (NO in step S34281), when it is determined in step S34282 that the effect point P is 10 (NO in step S34282), the effect point P in step S34285. When it is determined that the value is not 10 (NO in step S34285), the second and third starting opening effective winning effect processing is ended.

[Decoration pattern change start processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 116, a decorative symbol variation start process and a process executed in the process will be described.

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the decorative symbol variation start process. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing in the decorative symbol variation start processing. In the present embodiment, processing for setting an almighty symbol (A symbol) as a part of the decorative symbol 1153 is performed based on a variation pattern that stops and displays the chance eye. Here, setting the almighty symbol (A symbol) means replacing a part of the decorative symbol 1153 with the almighty symbol (A symbol). Processing related to this almighty symbol (A symbol) is A mode setting processing. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of a small hitting A symbol usage count setting process in the variation pattern determination and A mode setting process. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the A symbol usage count setting process per 2R in the variation pattern determination and A mode setting process. FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the A symbol usage count setting process per 15R in the variation pattern determination and A mode setting process. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing an example of the A symbol consumption process in the variation pattern determination and A mode setting process. FIG. 110 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the chance A symbol consumption process. FIG. 111 and FIG. 112 are diagrams showing an example of a table for determining the number of A symbols set when the chance eye is stopped. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of a table for determining the number of consumptions of the A symbol. FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram illustrating setting of an almighty symbol (A symbol) for a part of the decorative symbol 1153.

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an example of the special effect lottery process in the decorative symbol variation start process. FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the effect point storage process. In the present embodiment, in addition to an aspect (see step S34283 in FIG. 103) in which one effect point P is added in response to the fact that the second and third start opening valid winning flags are ON, also in the decorative symbol variation start process Production points P may be added.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process of FIG. 104, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is ON (step S3441). If the variation pattern reception flag is ON (YES in step S3441), it is determined whether or not the short-time gaming state is set (step S3442).

  If it is determined in step S3442 that the game is not in the short-time gaming state (YES in step S3442), a special effect lottery process is performed (step S3443), and it is determined whether or not the variation pattern related to the effect command received in step S321 is a winning variation pattern. It is determined (step S3444).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3442 that the game is in the short-time gaming state (NO in step S3442), the special effect lottery process is omitted and the process proceeds to step S3444. Details of the special effect lottery process will be described later. As described above, during the short-time gaming state, even if a game ball wins at the second starting port 392 and the third starting port 394, the effect point P is not stored. A special effect lottery process for performing various effects related to the effect point P is omitted. In addition, during the short-time gaming state, not only the production point P is stored but also the storage status of the production point P is not displayed. Thereby, even if a game ball wins in the 2nd starting port 392, the fall of the interest by not having the production point P stored can be suppressed.

  If it is determined in step S3444 that the pattern is a winning variation pattern (YES in step S3444), a corresponding winning stop symbol determining process is performed (step S3445). In this stop symbol determination process, if it is a long hit, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is set. If the jackpot flag is not set, the stop symbol for the non-probable variable symbol is always determined. If it is a short hit or a small hit, the stop symbol for short hit / small hit is determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern is a deviation (NO in step S3444), a stop symbol of the deviation symbol is determined (step S3446).

  When the stop symbol is determined in step S3445 or step S3446, variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing are executed (step S3447). This variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing will be described later. Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern reception flag is turned off (step S3448). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the production hold counter is 0 (step S3449). If the production hold counter is not 0 (YES in step S3449), the fluctuation display (that is, the fluctuation display started from now) is the first. 2. It is determined whether or not the variation is based on the third start opening effective winning (step S3450).

  In step S3450, if the change display to be started is a change based on the second and third start opening effective winnings (YES in step S3450), one is subtracted from the effect suspension counter (step S3451), and the decorative symbol change is made. End the start process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3449 that the production hold counter is 0 (NO in step S3449), and when it is determined in step S3450 that the variation is based on the first start opening effective winning (step S3450). NO in
Finishes the decorative symbol variation start process without performing the subtraction process (step S3451) of the effect suspension counter.

  If the variation pattern reception flag is OFF in step S3441 (NO in step S3441), the decorative symbol variation start process is terminated as it is.

[Variation pattern determination and A mode setting process]
In the variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing of FIG. 105, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not it is not in time (step S34471). If it is not non-time saving, that is, if it is not a time saving gaming state (YES in step S34471), the process proceeds to step S34472. On the other hand, if the time is short, that is, if it is a time saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S34479.

  If it is determined that the time is short, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a small hit chance (step S34472). This determination processing is to determine whether or not the variation pattern is the chance number (small hit) of the variation number 44. If it is determined that the variation pattern is the small hit chance (YES in step S34472), the small hit hour A symbol usage number setting process is executed (step S34473), and the process proceeds to step S34479. The small hitting A symbol usage number setting process will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not the small hit chance (NO in step S34472), the process advances to step S34474.

  In step S34474, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a chance per 2R (step S34474). This determination processing is to determine whether or not the variation pattern is the chance number (short hit) of the variation number 43. If it is determined that the variation pattern is the 2nd chance per 2R (YES in step S34474), the A symbol usage number setting process per 2R is executed (step S34475), and the process proceeds to step S34479. The process for setting the number of A symbols used per 2R will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the 2R chance (NO in step S34474), the process proceeds to step S34476.

  In step S34476, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a chance per 15R (step S34476). This determination processing is to determine whether or not the variation pattern is the chance number (per probability variation length) of the variation number 45. Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is the 15th chance per 15R (YES in step S34476), the hour A symbol usage number setting process is executed per 15R (step S34477), and the process proceeds to step S34479. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not the chance per 15R (NO in step S34476), the A symbol consumption process is executed (step S34478), and the process proceeds to step S34479. The A symbol usage count setting process and the A symbol consumption process per 15R will be described later.

  In step S34479, the received variation pattern is set. Thereafter, the variation pattern determination and the A mode setting process are terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not a chance-like variation pattern has been received (steps S34472, S34474, and S34476). A setting process is performed.

  As described above, the “song” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol column 1153c, and only the middle symbol column 1153b scrolls in the vertical direction. This is a reach fluctuation that may be won per small hit or probable change (see FIG. 95 (G)). Then, when the “legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, occurrence of the short hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state, or the long hit gaming state is determined (see FIG. 95H).

  In the present embodiment, after the “legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, the decorative symbol 1153 starts scrolling again, and a part of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c is an almighty symbol (A It is replaced with (design). In a change after a part of the decorative symbol 1153 is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol), either the stop symbol of the left symbol column 1153a or the stop symbol of the right symbol column 1153c becomes the almighty symbol (A symbol). In such a case, control is always performed so that the reach mode is generated. Further, when both the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are almighty symbols (A symbol), control is performed so that long hits are always generated. Therefore, the greater the number of decorative symbols 1153 replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol), the greater the player's expectation for reach or win, and the lowering of interest can be suppressed. If the occurrence of the gaming state per probability variation length is confirmed, the stop symbol in the variable display from which the replacement to the almighty symbol (A symbol) is derived is a predetermined probability variable jackpot symbol ("1" in this embodiment). , “1”, “1”).

  The A symbol usage number setting process sets the quantity of the decorative symbol 1153 to be replaced with this almighty symbol (A symbol). In the present embodiment, up to six of the decorative symbols 1153 (specifically, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c) are replaced with almighty symbols (A symbol).

  Here, the A symbol usage number setting process will be described. As described above, the A symbol usage number setting process includes the small hitting time A symbol usage number setting process of FIG. 106, the 2A hourly A symbol usage number setting process of FIG. Use number setting processing is included.

[A symbol use count setting process for small hits]
In the small hitting time A symbol usage number setting process of FIG. 106, the CPU 664 first executes a chance A symbol consumption process (step S344731). This chance A symbol consumption process will be described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the state is a low probability state (step S344732). The low probability state means that it is not a probability variation gaming state (non-notification probability variation gaming state). If it is determined that the state is a low probability state (YES in step S344473), a lottery is performed from the low probability → small hitting table based on the remaining number of A symbols (step S344733), and the number of A symbols is set ( Step S344735). On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not the low probability state (NO in step S344732), that is, if it is the probability variation gaming state (non-notification probability variation gaming state), high probability → small hitting time based on the remaining number of A symbols A lottery is performed from the table (step S344734), and the number of A symbols is set (step S344735). When the number of A symbols is set, the small hitting A symbol number setting process is terminated. An example of the low probability → small hitting time table is shown in FIG. An example of the high probability → small hitting time table is shown in FIG.

[A symbol usage count setting process per 2R]
In the hour A symbol usage number setting process per 2R in FIG. 107, the CPU 664 first executes a chance A symbol consumption process (step S3447451). This chance A symbol consumption process will be described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is in a low probability state (step S344752). If it is determined that the state is in a low probability state (YES in step S344752), a lottery is performed from the low probability → 2R per hour table based on the remaining number of A symbols (step S344753), and the number of A symbols is set ( Step S344755). On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is not low probability (NO in step S344475), a lottery is performed from the high probability → 2R per hour table based on the remaining number of A symbols (step S344754), and the number of A symbols is set (step S34475). S344755). When the number of A symbols is set, the A symbol number setting process is ended per 2R. An example of the low probability → 2R per hour table is shown in FIG. 111 (c). An example of the high probability → 2R per hour table is shown in FIG. 111 (d).

[A symbol usage count setting process per 15R]
In the hour A symbol usage count setting process per 15R in FIG. 108, the CPU 664 first executes a chance A symbol consumption process (step S344747). This chance A symbol consumption process will be described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is in a low probability state (step S344772). If it is determined that the state is a low probability state (YES in step S344747), a lottery is performed from the low probability → 15R per hour table based on the remaining number of A symbols (step S344773), and the number of A symbols is set ( Step S344775). On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not a low probability state (NO in step S344472), a lottery is performed from the high probability → 15R per hour table based on the remaining number of A symbols (step S344774), and the number of A symbols is set (step S34477). S344775). When the number of A symbols is set, the hour A symbol number setting process is terminated per 15R. An example of the low probability → 15R per hour table is shown in FIG. An example of the high probability → 15R per hour table is shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is set by executing the A symbol usage number setting process (see FIGS. 106 to 108). Here, the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is determined with reference to the tables (FIGS. 111 and 112) based on the gaming state. In these tables, when the gaming state is advantageous to the player, the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is generally increased. Therefore, by setting the number of almighty symbols (A symbol), for example, expectation to a probable gaming state (short win) can be given, which contributes to the suppression of the decrease in interest.

[A symbol consumption processing]
In the A symbol consumption process of FIG. 109, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not the number of A symbols is 0 (step S344781). This number of A symbols is the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbols) set previously. If it is determined that the number of A symbols is 0 (YES in step S344781), the A symbol used number allocation table A (see FIG. 113) is selected (step S344787), and the process proceeds to step S344791. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of A symbols is not 0 (NO in step S344781), the process proceeds to step S344783.

  In step S344783, it is determined whether or not the number of A symbols is 1. Here, when it is determined that the number of symbols A is 1 (YES in step S344783), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (non-notification probability variation game state) (step S344784). If YES (YES in step S344784), the A symbol used number allocation table C (see FIG. 113) is selected (step S344785), and the process proceeds to step S3444471. If it is not in the high probability state (NO in step S344784), the A symbol used number allocation table B (see FIG. 113) is selected (step S344786), and the flow proceeds to step S3444471.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S344478 that the number of A symbols is not 1 (NO in step S34483, that is, if the number of A symbols is 2 or more), it is determined whether or not the number of A symbols is 2 (step S34483). S344787). If it is determined that the number of symbols A is 2 (YES in step S344787), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (non-notification probability variation game state) (step S344788). If YES (YES in step S344788), the A symbol used number allocation table D (see FIG. 113) is selected (step S344789), and the process proceeds to step S344791. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of A symbols is not 2 (NO in step S344787, that is, if the number of A symbols is 3 or more) or if it is determined that the state is not in a high probability state (NO in step S344788), use of A symbol The number distribution table E (see FIG. 113) is selected (step S344790), and the process proceeds to step S344791.

  In step S34491, based on the variation pattern, each of the A symbol used number allocation tables (that is, among the A symbol used number allocation tables A to E, any one of the above-described step S34482, step S344785, step S344786, step S344789, step S344790) The number of use of A symbol (consumption number) is selected by lottery. Next, the number of A symbols used is set (step S344792), the number of A symbols used is subtracted from the number of A symbols, and the number of A symbols is updated (step S344793). And A symbol consumption processing is complete | finished.

[A symbol consumption process at chance]
In the chance A symbol consumption process of FIG. 110, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not the number of A symbols (remaining number) is 0 (step S344731). If it is determined that the number of A symbols is 0 (YES in step S344731), the number of A symbol used (consumption number) is set to 0 (step S344731), and the process proceeds to step S3447316. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of A symbols is not 0 (NO in step S344731), the process proceeds to step S3447313.

  In step S3447313, it is determined whether the number of A symbols (remaining number) is any of 1 to 3. If it is determined that the number of A symbols is any one of 1 to 3 (YES in step S3447313), the number of A symbol used (consumption number) is set to 1 (step S3447314), and the process proceeds to step S3447316. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of A symbols is not any of 1 to 3 (NO in step S3447313), that is, when the number of A symbols is any of 4 to 6, the number of used A symbols (consumption number). Is set to 2 (step S3447315), and the process proceeds to step S3447316.

  In step S3447316, the number of A symbols is subtracted from the number of A symbols and the number of A symbols is updated. And A symbol consumption processing is complete | finished.

[Setting and consumption mode of almighty design (A design)]
In the present embodiment, the almighty symbol (A symbol) is set in a manner as shown in FIG. That is, the “song” symbol, “princess” symbol and “legend” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a shown in FIG. 114 (a), and the “song” symbol, “princess” symbol and “legend” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c are almighty. It is a symbol that may be replaced with a symbol (A symbol). Specifically, when the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 1, the “song” symbol in the left symbol row 1153a is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol) (see FIG. 114 (b)). When the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 2, the “song” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a and the “song” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c are replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol) (FIG. 114). (See (c)). Similarly, if the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 3, the “Princess” symbol in the left symbol row is further. If the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 4, the “princess” in the right symbol row 1153c is further increased. If the number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is 5, the “legend” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a is six, and if the number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is six, the right symbol column 1153c The “legend” symbol is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol) (see FIGS. 114D to 114G).

  When the almighty symbol (A symbol) is stopped and displayed, the almighty symbol (A symbol) is returned to the original symbol. This is the consumption of the almighty symbol (A symbol). The consumption order of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is basically as shown below. For example, when six almighty symbols (A symbol) are set (see FIG. 114 (g)), the “A (8)” symbol in the right symbol row 1153c is first stopped and displayed in the original “legend”. Returning to the design (see FIG. 114 (f)). Next, the symbol “A (8)” in the left symbol row 1153a is stopped and returned to the original symbol (see FIG. 114 (e)). Similarly, “A (7)” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c → “A (7)” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a → “A (6)” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c → “A (” in the left symbol column 1153a 6) The almighty symbol (A symbol) is consumed in the order of the symbol. As described above, the number of consumption of almighty symbols (A symbols) is determined by the table shown in FIG. That is, one or two almighty symbols (A symbol) are consumed in the order shown here by lottery by the table selected from A to E. In addition, there is a possibility that two almighty symbols (A symbol) may be consumed in this order based on the variation pattern per length of variation numbers 10, 13, 15, 28, 35, 42. Yes (see FIG. 113).

  On the other hand, an almighty symbol (A symbol) may be consumed separately from the above order. This is the case based on the variation pattern of the chance numbers of the variation numbers 43, 44, and 45. The process in this case is the chance A symbol consumption process. According to the chance pattern, the “song” symbol is first displayed in the left symbol column 1153a, and the “princess” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol column 1153c. Therefore, when the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 4 or more (see FIGS. 114 (e) to (f)), the “A (6)” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol column 1153c The “A (7)” symbol is consumed. Therefore, in the chance A symbol consumption process, if the number of A symbols is not 0 to 3 (NO in step S3447311, NO in step S3447313), that is, if the number of A symbols is 4 to 6, the number of A symbols used is 2 (Step S3447315). When the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 1 to 3 (see FIGS. 114 (b) to (d)), the symbol “A (6)” in the left symbol row 1153a is consumed. Therefore, in the chance A symbol consumption process, if the number of A symbols is 1 to 3 (NO in step S3447311, YES in step S3447313), that is, if the number of A symbols is 1 to 3, the number of A symbols used is 1 (step S3447315). In this case, the “A” symbol changes to the original symbol when stopped, and the function of the almighty symbol (A symbol) that forms the reach mode is not exhibited.

  From the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) consumed (maximum of two) due to such a chance pattern variation pattern, the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) in FIG. 111 and FIG. 112 (A during temporary stop in the diagram) The number is 4 at the maximum.

[Special production lottery processing]
In the special effect lottery process of FIG. 115, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not the effect hold counter is 1 (step S34431). Here, if it is determined that the production hold counter is not 1 (YES in step S34431), whether or not the production point is greater than 6 points and less than 10 points, that is, 7 points or more and 9 points or less. It is determined whether or not (step S34432). If the production hold counter is greater than 1, the production points are 10 points. If the production hold counter is 0, the production points are less than 10.

  If it is determined in step S34432 that the effect point P is greater than 6 points and less than 10 points (YES in step S34432), it is determined whether or not a special effect condition is satisfied (step S34433). On the other hand, when the production point P is within the range of 0 to 6 points (including 0 points and 6 points) or 10 points (NO in step S34432), the special production conditions are satisfied. The special effect lottery process is terminated without determining whether or not there is. That is, if the production point reaches 10 points, the second special symbol hold counter 713 that triggered the 10 points is counted (second special symbol hold by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874). In the variable display performed before the variable display based on the special effect lottery process is terminated without determining whether or not the special effect condition is satisfied. As a result, the special effect in the variable display based on the count by the second special symbol hold counter 713 (holding the second special symbol by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874) that triggered the 10 points wasted. Therefore, it is possible to continue to give the player a sense of expectation over a plurality of variable displays.

  Note that the special effect condition is that the effect command received in step S321 is a specific variation pattern, and the effect point P storage performed in response to the effect command received in step S321 is a specific variation pattern. Winning a lottery. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a long hit, or when it is out of reach, the effect point P storage lottery is performed. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116, in the case of variable numbers 11 to 21, 25 to 28, 32 to 35, 39 to 42, and 76 to 86, the effect point P storage lottery is performed. At this time, the probability of winning the effect point P storage lottery is set to, for example, one half as shown in FIG.

  In this way, the effect point is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold (7 points in the present embodiment) and the effect command received in step S321 is a specific variation pattern (that is, the first special symbol image display control means 851 or the second When the special symbol image display control means 852 is a specific fluctuation pattern, the special effect condition is established selectively (that is, when the effect point P storage lottery is won). Therefore, the production points are stored based on the winning of the game ball at the second start opening 392, and the special production conditions are established and the production points are 10 points rather than the accumulated production points reaching 10 points. Less frequently.

  When the special effect condition is satisfied in step S34433 (YES in step S34433), effect point P storage processing is performed (step S34444).

  In the effect point P storage process (step S34444), the storage process is performed so that the effect point P after the storage becomes the upper limit of 10 points. That is, if the production point P before storage is 7 points, 3 points are stored, if the production point P before storage is 8 points, 2 points are stored, and if the production point P before storage is 9 points, 1 point is stored. Stored. In other words, when the above-mentioned special effect condition is satisfied, the quantity necessary for the effect point P to reach a predetermined upper limit (10 points in the present embodiment) is added, and the effect point P after storage is the predetermined value. Increase to the upper limit of.

  Then, after the effect point storage process (step S34444) is performed, the special first effect flag and the special second effect flag are turned ON (step S34445), and the special effect lottery process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S34432 that the effect point is less than 7 points or 10 points (NO in step S34432), and when it is determined in step S34433 that the special effect condition is not satisfied (NO in step S34433). ), The special effect lottery process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S34431 that the production hold counter is 1 (NO in step S34431), the variation display (that is, the variation display started from now on) is a variation based on the second and third start opening effective winnings. It is determined whether or not (step S34446). Here, if it is determined that the variation display is variation based on the second and third start opening valid winnings (YES in step S34446), the special second effect flag is turned on (step S34447) and the effect hold counter is reset. (Step S34448). When the change display is a change based on the first start opening valid winning in step S34446 (NO in step S34446), the special effect lottery process is terminated.

  In this way, in the special effect lottery process of FIG. 115, when the effect hold counter is 1 (YES in S34431), since the effect points P are stored up to 10 points, the effect points P reach 10 points. When the variable display is performed based on the second and third valid winnings that have been triggered (YES in S34446), the flag for performing the special second effect is set to ON and the effect hold counter is reset (S34447). And S34448).

  On the other hand, even if the production hold counter is 0 (that is, when production point P is not stored up to 10 points) (NO in S34431), production point P may be greater than 6 points and less than 10 points. (YES in S34432) when the special performance condition is satisfied based on the first, second, and third effective winnings (that is, when a variable display based on a predetermined length or reach is made) (YES in S34433) ) In order to perform the special first effect and the special second effect, the effect points P are stored up to the upper limit value, and the special effect flag is set to ON (S34444 and S34445).

  Further, when the production hold counter is 2 or more (that is, production points P are stored up to 10 points, but before the second and third effective winnings that triggered the production point P to 10 points) If the first, second, and third effective winnings are held and the variable display based on the previously held effective winnings is not yet performed) (YES in S34431), the production point P Is 10 points (NO in S34432), each special effect flag remains OFF without being set ON. Then, when the variation display is made for all of the other first, second, and third effective winnings that are already held, the effect holding counter becomes 1 (NO in S34431), and the effect point P reaches 10 points. In response to the change display based on the second and third effective winnings, the special second effect is set to ON (YES in S34436 to S34448).

  In other words, the second and third effective prizes that triggered the production point P to 10 points until all of the other first, second and third valid prizes already held are displayed in a variable manner. The change display based on and the execution of the special second effect corresponding thereto are reserved (standby). Therefore, as described above, when the production point P reaches 10 points, the special first production is performed (S34287 in FIG. 103), and when the production point P is stored up to 10 points, other effective winnings are already put on hold. If it is, the special second effect is not executed until all the other active winnings that have been put on hold are variably displayed (so-called hold-up), so the display of the special first effect and the display of the special second effect There will be a time difference. As a result, only the special first effect is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until all the previous holds are consumed, so that the player can obtain the effect point P by the special first effect. It is possible to accurately confirm with a margin that the upper limit has been reached and to play with a sense of expectation until the special second performance is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the production points P are stored up to 10 points based on the second and third effective winnings, if other first, second and third effective winnings are already held, they are put on hold ahead. Even when the special effect condition is satisfied based on the valid winnings made (that is, when a variable display based on a predetermined length or reach is made), the storage of the effect point P and the ON setting of the special effect flag are not performed. Not executed. For this reason, even if the previously held effective prize establishes the special effect condition, the special second effect is not performed based on the previously held effective prize but the effect point P is 10 points. It is executed based on the second and third effective winnings that triggered the event. As a result, only the special first effect is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until all the previous holds are consumed, so that the player can obtain the effect point P by the special first effect. It is possible to accurately confirm with a margin that the upper limit has been reached and to play with a sense of expectation until the special second performance is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, when the effect point P storage lottery is won, regardless of whether the effective winning point from which the effect point P storage lottery is performed is the first start opening effective winning or the second / third starting opening effective winning. Special effects are performed. On the other hand, when the special effect is performed because the effect point P reaches 10 points without performing the effect point P storage lottery, the special effect is performed only when the effective winning is the second and third starting opening effective winnings. Is done.

  In addition, when the special first effect and the special second effect are performed, when the effect point P storage lottery is won, both effects are displayed in the same variation, whereas the effect point P storage lottery is performed. If the special effect is performed because the effect point P has reached 10 points, the first special symbol hold number storage means 872 and the second special symbol hold number storage means when the effect point P reaches 10 points. Depending on the number of holds held by 874, both effects are not always displayed in the same variation. Specifically, when the production point P reaches 10 points, the display of the special first production is started, and the variable display based on the second and third effective winnings that triggered the production point P to 10 points. When it is performed, the special second effect is started.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect point P is stored (added) in response to the fact that the second / third start opening valid winning flag is ON or the effect point P storage lottery is won. When the point P reaches the upper limit value, the special effect flag (the special first effect flag and / or the special second effect flag) is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, according to the fact that the second and third start opening valid winning flags are ON or the winning of the production point P storage lottery, the puzzles are combined, and when this puzzle is completed, the special production flag is set. It may be. In addition, a plurality of predetermined missions are cleared one by one in response to the fact that the second and third start opening valid winning flags are set or the stage point P storage lottery is won, and all the predetermined missions are cleared. The special effect flag may be turned on when the is cleared. That is, a condition for setting the special effect flag is set, and this condition is cleared when the second and third start opening effective winning flags are ON or when the effect point P storage lottery is won. Any configuration may be used as long as it approaches the direction in which it is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery result is derived by the variable display by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710, and the special effect is displayed separately from the variable display. Not limited to this. For example, you may make it derive | lead-out the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means 700 or the 2nd special symbol lottery means 710 by special production.

  Next, an aspect in which the effect points P are stored and displayed in the effect display device 115 will be described. FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating an example of a storage display mode of the effect points P that is performed in response to the second / third start opening valid winning flag being ON. FIG. 118 is a diagram illustrating an example of a storage display mode of the effect points P performed in response to winning of the effect point P storage lottery.

  The effect display device 115 has an effect point display area 1154 as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118. In the effect point display area 1154, an effect point 1 display unit 1154a to an effect point 10 display unit 1154j composed of 10 frames are displayed, and the display color in the frame changes every time the effect point P is stored. . Therefore, the player refers to the effect point display area 1154, so that both the achievement upper limit, which is the maximum value at which the effect points P can be stored, and the progress status, which is the accumulated value of the currently stored effect points P, are displayed. It is possible to grasp at the same time. For example, when the effect point P is 0, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the frames of the ten display portions 1154a to 1154j are all displayed in the same color as the background color (in the drawing, for convenience, white Is displayed).

  In this effect point display area 1154, effect points P are stored and displayed one by one as the game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, but the second special symbol hold number memory is stored. Regardless of the number of reservations of the means 874 and the maximum number of reservations (four in this case), up to ten effect points P that can be displayed on the display units 1154a to 1154j can be stored and displayed.

  First, the storage display mode of the production point P performed in response to the second / third start opening valid winning flag being ON will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117A shows an initial state (that is, a state where both the number of holds and the effect point P are 0).

  When the game ball wins the first start port 390, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the third reserved memory display portion 1151a is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Are displayed in the display mode. On the other hand, the display colors are all maintained in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j. This indicates that the production point P is maintained at 0.

  When the game ball is effectively won at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the holding number by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is added in the holding display area 1150. While the 2nd display mode is displayed, the display color in the frame of the production | presentation point 1 display part 1154a changes. Note that the display colors in the frames of the effect point 2 display unit 1154b to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j are maintained. Thereby, the player can grasp that the production point P is 1.

  As described above, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the effect points P are stored one by one, and the stored effect points P are displayed with an indicator. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first start port 390, the effect points P are not stored. That is, when the game ball wins at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the effect point P for displaying a predetermined special effect is stored. The stored effect points P are indicators that can be visually recognized by the player in the effect point display area 1154, and are stored and displayed in a manner approaching the predetermined achievement upper limit.

  Therefore, the player can confirm the remaining number of points necessary until a predetermined special effect, and can visually confirm that the player has won the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394. That is, when a player wins a game ball to the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the winning is not only an opportunity for internal processing such as a win determination or a variable display, but the player himself / herself plays a game ball. Since it is possible to visually grasp the production point P that has been won and stored, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation and sense of security.

  Further, since the game balls are less likely to win the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 than the first starting port 390 (except for the short-time gaming state), the second starting port 392 or the third starting port. When the game ball is won in 394, the production point P is stored as a privilege for the player. Thereby, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation when the game ball is won at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, which is difficult to win.

  The display of the effect point display area 1154 is based on the storage status of the effect points P (progress status for performing the special effect) according to the winning of the game balls to the start openings 390, 392, and 394. It may be displayed up to a predetermined achievement upper limit. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start opening 390, the effect point P may be increased, or the effect point P may be increased even if it is not reserved by the special symbol reservation number storage means 872, 874. Also good.

  FIG. 117 (d) is a diagram showing that the production points P are 9 points. That is, the display colors in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 9 display unit 1154i have changed, and the display color in the frame of the effect point 10 display unit 1154j is the same color as the background color. At this time, when the game ball is effectively won at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the display color within the frame of the effect point 10 display unit 1154j changes as shown in FIG. Thereby, the player can grasp that the production point P has reached the upper limit of 10 points. In the hold display area 1150, the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is displayed in a stored state. In FIG. 117 (e), the third reserved storage display unit 1151c changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  When the effect point P reaches 10 points, a character appears above the effect point display area 1154. Then, the hold based on the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that causes the production point P to reach 10 points (in FIG. 117 (e), it is displayed on the third hold storage display unit 1151c. The character continues to dance above the effect point display area 1154 until the change display is performed. Further, while the character continues to dance above the effect point display area 1154, the display colors in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j are changed. That is, the special effect has not yet been displayed until the on-hold variable display based on the effective winnings at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that causes the effect point P to reach 10 points. Nevertheless, the display of the derivation progress status (ie, the number of effect points) for deriving the special effect is continued. In other words, even when the production point P reaches 10 points, even if the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is 1 or more (that is, stored by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874). Even if the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 1 or more), the display of the number of effect points is maintained and the variable display based on the counter value (the holding) is performed. Thereby, the game is straddled across a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the hold based on the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that causes the production point P to reach 10 points. It is possible to continue to give a sense of expectation to the person, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Then, when the change display of the hold based on the effective winning at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 that causes the production point P to reach 10 points is started, as shown in FIG. 117 (f). The character dancing above the effect point display area 1154 moves to substantially the center of the effect display device 115 and is displayed in an enlarged manner. A series of effect display by such characters corresponds to the special effect of the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the aspect in which the character continues to dance above the effect point display area 1154 corresponds to the special first effect, and the character dancing above the effect point display area 1154 is substantially in the center of the effect display device 115. The mode displayed in an enlarged manner corresponds to the special second effect. Therefore, the special first effect is displayed immediately regardless of the number of holds when the effect point P reaches 10 points by the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. On the other hand, the special second effect is effective for the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 when the effect point P reaches 10 points by the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. If a valid winning is held in addition to the winning, it will be displayed after the variable display based on the holding is completed.

  Thus, when the production point P is stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (here, 10 points) due to the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the production point P is a predetermined achievement upper limit. Since the special first effect that solicits the fact that the player has reached is displayed, the player can easily grasp that the special effect has been obtained, and can maintain the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the special 2nd effect which is the special production privilege regarding derivation | leading-out of a lottery result is performed based on the achievement point P having reached the predetermined achievement upper limit, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  Then, when both the special first effect and the special second effect are finished, that is, the suspension based on the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that causes the effect point P to reach 10 points. When the variable display is finished, the effect point P is reset to 0, and the effect point P is displayed in the effect point display area 1154 in a mode where it is 0.

  In the present embodiment, the effect point P is also reset when a jackpot game (more specifically, a long game) is started, and the storage of the effect points P is started from 0 after the jackpot game ends. As a result, with the jackpot game as an opportunity, the player can enter the game with a new feeling. In addition, during the jackpot game, even if a game ball wins the second starting port 392, the effect points are not stored, and therefore the storage status of the effect points is not displayed. Accordingly, since the newly displayed effect points after the jackpot game ends are 0, the player can renew the mood and restart the game after the jackpot game ends.

  Next, a storage display mode of effect points P performed in response to winning of the effect point P storage lottery will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which the effect points P displayed in the effect point display area 1154 are 7 points. That is, the display colors in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 7 display unit 1154g are changed, and the display colors in the frames of the effect point 8 display unit 1154h to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j are the background color. It is the same color.

  When the game ball wins an effective winning at the first start opening 390, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), in the hold display area 1150, the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (first special symbol hold number storage means 872). Is displayed in a mode in which (the number of hold by) is added. Note that when the game ball effectively wins the first start opening 390, the CPU 664 receives an effect command from the main control board 131 and the variation pattern reception flag is turned on (see step S329 in FIG. 100). If the special effect condition is satisfied, effect point P storage processing (see step S34444 in FIG. 115) is performed. Here, the special effect condition is an effect point P performed in response to the effect command received in step S321 being a specific variation pattern and the effect command received in step S321 being a specific variation pattern. Winning the storage lottery. In addition, it is a precondition for special production conditions to be satisfied that a production point is more than a predetermined threshold (7 points in this embodiment) and less than an achievement upper limit (10 points).

  Here, “greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value” means a value that reaches a predetermined achievement upper limit value when a game ball is slightly awarded to the second start port 392. In the present embodiment, since the achievement upper limit value is 10 points, a value that reaches the achievement upper limit value, that is, 7 points becomes a predetermined threshold value when about 3 game balls win the second starting port 392. In addition, when the predetermined achievement upper limit is 100 points, for example, a value that reaches the achievement upper limit when about 3 to 5 game balls win the second starting port 392, that is, about 95 to 97 points is predetermined. It becomes a threshold value. In other words, if the difference between the stored performance points and the predetermined achievement upper limit is too large, the player plays the game thinking that the predetermined achievement upper limit is not reached, but in a short time When the predetermined achievement upper limit is reached, attention is drawn to the winning of the game ball at the second start port 392, and interest is drawn to the trend of the game ball. At this time, it is usual to feel that the predetermined achievement upper limit is not reached only by winning one ball at the second starting port 392, but at this time, the production points are stored together such as 2 points or 3 points. Thus, it is possible to give a surprise to the player, thereby giving a great sense of expectation to the player and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In the effect point P storage process, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), the suspension based on winning in the first start port 390 that is the basis for the effect point P storage process (in this embodiment, FIG. 118 (b) ) Is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1151b), the display is stored and displayed until the production point P reaches the upper limit of 10 points, and the special first Production is performed. Then, in this same variable display, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), the special second effect is performed subsequent to the special first effect. In addition, the display of the effect point P in the effect point display area 1154 is displayed up to the special second effect that is the final aspect as the effect privilege.

  Thus, even when the production point P is not stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (here, 10 points), the production point P is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (here, 7 points), and When the special effect condition is satisfied (that is, when a variable display based on a predetermined length or reach is made), the effect point P for displaying the predetermined special effect is stored. . In other words, even if the difference between the stored production point P and the predetermined upper limit value (here, 10 points) is 2 or more, the special production condition is satisfied as long as the difference is within a small difference range of 3 or less. If is established, it means that the production point P is stored. The stored effect points P are indicators that can be visually recognized by the player in the effect point display area 1154, and are stored and displayed in a manner approaching the predetermined achievement upper limit.

  Therefore, the player can confirm the remaining number of points necessary until a predetermined special performance, and that the special performance condition is established based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening 390, 392, 394. I can confirm. And the special 1st production which teaches that the production | presentation point P has reached the predetermined achievement upper limit, and the special 2nd production which is a special production privilege regarding derivation | leading-out of a lottery result are displayed as a series of special productions. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation to obtain a privilege of a series of special effects (first special effect and special second effect) even if the effect points P are not stored up to a predetermined upper limit value. Can maintain and improve the interests of

  In addition, regarding the effect point P storage process performed in response to winning of the effect point P storage lottery, in the present embodiment, the effect command received based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start port 390 is specified. Although the effect point P storage lottery is performed when the effect command indicates the fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the effect command based on the fact that the game ball is effectively won at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 is a command indicating a specific variation pattern, the effect point P is always performed without performing the effect point P storage lottery. You may make it perform a storage process.

  In addition, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a short win or a small hit, the effect item in the game state after the short hit game or the small hit game is executed. An effect using a game ball by 430 is performed. The effect using the game ball by the effect agent 430 is not always performed immediately after the short hit game or the small hit game ends. Therefore, when the production point P becomes 10 points between the end of the short hit game or the small hit game and the production using the game ball by the production role 430, or the production point P Even if the storage lottery is won, a special effect is performed.

  As described above, when the production point P reaches 10 points, until the variation display based on the hold by the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 that triggered the production point P to 10 points, is performed. Display of special effects is put on hold.

  In this way, the change display based on the hold by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874 that triggered the effect point P to 10 points is managed by the effect hold count means 855. More specifically, when the production point P reaches 10 points, the number of second special symbols stored in the second special symbol storage means 874 (see FIG. 57) at this time is used as the production reservation counter value. Remember. Then, each time the variable display is performed by the second special symbol image display control means 852 (see FIG. 57), one is subtracted from the production suspension counter value. When the production hold counter value becomes 1, the variable display based on the hold of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol hold number storage means 874 that triggered the production point P to 10 points is performed. And the second special effect is displayed. The first special effect is performed when the effect point P reaches 10 points.

[About game effects]
Next, typical ones of the game effect modes (including the variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153) executed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that the “game effect mode” refers to effects by the effect display device 115 (including variations of the decoration pattern 1153), effects by the effect for the purpose 430, sounds such as sound effects output from the speakers 18 and 57, This is a concept including various effects such as opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 executed according to the gaming state.

  In the “game effect mode”, an effect in which a character imitating a person sings music (hereinafter referred to as a character singing effect) may be executed. In the present embodiment, there are four characters (here, a first character to a fourth character) having different hairstyles and clothes for a specific person. In the “character singing effect”, images (including moving images) representing the singing actions corresponding to the first to fourth characters are displayed on the effect display device 115, and each character is unique from the speakers 18 and 57. (Songs A to D here) are output as audio.

  In addition, the “music piece” in the present embodiment includes three parts of an introduction part (intro part), a first half part, and a second half part, and one piece of music is configured as a whole by combining the parts. Specifically, the “introduction section (intro section)” is a musical tone at the beginning of a song, and makes the player conceive the title of the song and the subsequent musical tone. The “first half” is a musical sound of a part following the intro part of the music, and includes at least the first half of the main part (so-called rust part) of the music. The “second half part” is a musical sound of the part following the first half part of the music, and includes at least the second half of the main part of the music (a so-called chorus part).

  In this embodiment, the “music piece” is composed of the introduction part (intro part) and the main part (rust part), but may be a series of music from the introduction part to the end of the music piece. In addition, “musical sound” means a part of music. Therefore, only the introduction part (intro part), only the first half part, and only the second half part correspond to musical sounds. The musical sound is not limited to one phrase, and may be a plurality of phrases.

[Regarding normal fluctuation mode]
First, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a “normal variation mode” that is the most basic game effect mode will be described. This “normal variation mode” is a mode for deriving the winning or losing of the lottery result without performing a special effect (for example, an intro effect or a chance eye effect described later) until the reach occurs. Three patterns are included: “out of normal reach” and “per normal length”.

  As described with reference to FIG. 93, “normally off” is an effect mode in which the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153 a, the middle symbol row 1153 b, and the right symbol row 1153 c stop at different symbols that are completely unrelated (that is, , Deviation fluctuation without reach production). Note that, as described above, the “normal deviation” is a variation number 1 to 7 depending on whether the variation is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, whether or not the short-time operation is performed, whether or not the certain variation operation is performed, and the number of holdings. Is selected (see FIG. 85).

  As described with reference to FIG. 93 and FIG. 94, “normal reach failure” means that the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are the same, and only the stop symbol of the middle symbol row 1153b is. It is an effect mode that stops at a different symbol (that is, deviation fluctuation with reach effect). 93 corresponds to the fluctuation based on the “normal deviation” of the fluctuation numbers 8 and 9 (see FIG. 81), and the “normal reach deviation” in FIG. 94 corresponds to the “normal deviation” of the fluctuation numbers 73 and 74. (Refer to FIG. 84).

  As described with reference to FIG. 93 and FIG. 94, “normal length hit” is an effect mode in which the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b all stop at the same symbol (that is, jackpot fluctuation) ). Note that “per normal length” in FIG. 93 corresponds to a variation based on “per normal length” of variation number 10 (see FIG. 73), and “per normal length” in FIG. This corresponds to a variation based on “winning” (see FIG. 75).

  In addition, in both “out of normal reach” and “per normal length”, all symbol variation periods in which all symbol sequences 1153a to 1153c are displayed are changed, and the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol column 1153c are stopped at the same symbol. The reach variation period in which only the middle symbol 1153b varies. In addition, not only “out of normal reach” and “per normal length”, but also in the variable display where the reach described below occurs, it is composed of at least the entire symbol change period and the reach change period. In the all symbol variation period, variation display of all symbols is performed and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 18 and 57. The reach variation period is reached after the entire symbol variation period, and a specific musical tone (a specific portion including a chorus portion) of a predetermined music is output from the speakers 18 and 57.

[Regarding normal special mode]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when normal reach is established in the “normal fluctuation mode” (see FIG. 93D or 94C), a sense of expectation for hitting the normal reach is urged. With reference to FIG. 119, the “normal special mode” that is a game effect mode with a special effect will be described. FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating a mode displayed on the effect display device when the “normal special mode” is executed. That is, FIG. 119 (A) is a diagram showing a state of a character singing effect displayed after normal reach is established, FIG. 119 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect of an encore effect, and FIGS. 119 (C) to (F) ) Is a diagram showing an aspect at the time of singing the character displayed after the encore effect.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (A), after the normal reach is established, the middle symbol row 1153b is scrolled and the singing effect of the character is executed. That is, the singing action by the first character is displayed on the effect display device 115, and the first half of the music unique to the character (here, music A) is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the action. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to fluctuations based on 11,76 “song reach A out (before encore)” (see FIGS. 81 and 84). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation”, and “ This corresponds to a variation based on “reach A per normal length” (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), when the first character is hidden behind the curtain by the curtain that is closed from the left and right direction, a display further prompting the player to press the effect selection switch 60 is displayed. At the same time, the sound imitating the clapping is output from the speakers 18 and 57. That is, an encore effect is made to request further singing of music for the first character hidden behind the curtain. Then, after the effect selection switch 60 is pressed or a predetermined time has elapsed, any of the effects shown in FIGS. 119 (C) to (F) below is displayed. If the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c without the effects of FIGS. 119 (C) to 119 (F) being executed, the decorative symbol 1153 will be displayed. The variation is “out-of-track variation with reach production”, and corresponds to variation based on “single reach A out (after encore)” of variation numbers 12 and 77 (see FIGS. 81 and 84).

  In FIG. 119 (C), the first character hidden behind the curtain in FIG. 119 (B) is displayed again, and the second half of the music A is the speaker 18, in accordance with the singing action of the first character. 57. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “Song Reach A Long Out” of 14,79 (see FIGS. 81 and 84). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decoration symbol 1153 is “big hit variation”, and “ This corresponds to the fluctuation based on “reach A long length” (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In FIG. 119 (D), a second character having a different hairstyle, clothes, etc. is displayed from the first character, and in accordance with the action of the second character singing, a music unique to the character (here, The latter half of the music B) is output from the speakers 18, 57. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “Song reach B (via song reach A)” of 16, 81 (see FIGS. 81 and 84). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation” and the “song of variation numbers 17 and 82” This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “reach B (via song reach A) per length” (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In FIG. 119 (E), a third character having a different hairstyle, clothes, etc. is displayed from the first and second characters, and in accordance with the action of the third character singing, Here, the latter half of the music C) is output from the speakers 18 and 57. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “Deciding of song reach C (via song reach A)” of 18, 83 (see FIGS. 81 and 84). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation” and the “song of variation numbers 19 and 84” This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “reach C (via song reach A) per length” (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In FIG. 119 (F), a fourth character having a different hairstyle, clothes, etc. is displayed from the first to third characters, and in accordance with the movement of the fourth character singing, Here, the latter half of the music D) is output from the speakers 18, 57. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to fluctuations based on 20,85 “song reach D (via song reach A)” (see FIGS. 81 and 84). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation” and the “song of variation numbers 21 and 86” This corresponds to a variation based on “reach D (via song reach A) per length” (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  As described above, in the “normal special mode” of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for normal reach and suppress the decrease in interest by the singing effect or the encore effect of the character.

[Intro special aspects]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a special effect that promotes a sense of expectation for reach by executing the singing effect of the character before the reach occurs during the symbol variation (that is, during the entire symbol variation period). The “intro special mode”, which is a game effect mode with the following, will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 122. In the present embodiment, an “intro special mode” is provided for each of the second character (song B), the third character (song C), and the fourth character (song D).

  First, the “intro special mode” of the second character (music B) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating an aspect displayed on the effect display device when the “intro special aspect” of the second character (music B) is executed. That is, FIG. 120 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative symbol 1153 before the start of change, FIG. 120 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 being changed before reach, and FIG. 120 (C) is a diagram. FIG. 120D is a diagram showing an aspect at the time of the flashlight effect, FIG. 120D is a diagram showing an aspect at the time of singing the second character before the reach, and FIGS. 120E to 120F are views after the reach. It is a figure which shows the aspect at the time of the singing performance of 2 characters.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (B), in this “intro special mode”, similarly to the “normal variation mode” described above, first, the scroll variation of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c is started. During the scroll fluctuation, the display screen of the effect display device 115 suddenly becomes dark. Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (C), after an effect imitating a flash (flash light) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 120 (D), the singing operation of the music by the second character is displayed, Only the introduction part (intro part) of the music B is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the singing operation. As described above, in the “intro special mode”, the introduction section (intro section) of the music B is output instead of the sound effect output during the entire symbol variation period. After the singing effect (ie, intro effect) of the intro part by the second character, if the stop symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol in the right symbol row 1153c stop at different symbols (that is, reach occurs) If not, the variation of the decorative pattern 1153 is “out-of-track variation without reach effect”, and corresponds to variation based on “single reach B in-track out” of variation number 22 (see FIGS. 81 and 84).

  However, even if the reach does not occur after the intro effect performed during the entire symbol variation period of the music B (that is, when the reach variation period does not occur), the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right When the symbol row 1153c stops at a predetermined related symbol after the scroll change, the short hit or the small win game state is won, and thus the short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state occurs. As a result, in the case where the introduction part (intro part) of the music B is output instead of the sound effect during the entire symbol variation period, even if the reach is not reached, there is a possibility that the player wins a short win. Therefore, a player's discouragement can be reduced and the fall of interest can be suppressed. It should be noted that the variation of the decorative pattern 1153 corresponds to the variation based on the “song reach B intro (short hit)” of variation number 23 or the “song reach B intro (small hit)” of variation number 24 (FIG. 78). reference).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 120 (E), if the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c become the same after the intro effect (that is, when the shift to the reach variation period), it is always performed. A reach (hereinafter referred to as “super reach”) in which the expected value won in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is relatively higher than the normal reach occurs. Thus, when the intro effect is performed during the entire symbol variation period (that is, when the introduction part (intro part) of the music is output instead of the sound effect), the reach variation period is passed after the entire symbol variation period. Since a super reach having an expected value higher than that of normal reach is always derived, the player plays a game in the hope of shifting to the reach change period, and can suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, when the intro effect is performed, the introduction part (intro part) of the music is output instead of the sound effect even in the entire symbol variation period, so even in the entire symbol variation period in which the symbol variation can only be visually recognized. The pleasure of whether to shift to the reach fluctuation period is increased, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Note that super reach is performed via normal reach. Therefore, when the super reach is performed, the shift to the super reach is performed after the normal reach is performed. Therefore, the reach variation period is longer than that in the case where only the normal reach is performed.

  The “expected value” is a probability that the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 (hereinafter simply referred to as “lottery result” in this paragraph) is not selected. And the probability selected in the case of winning, and if the expected value is high, the sense of expectation that has been won increases. Specifically, for example, when there is a reach mode A and a reach mode B as reach modes, the probability that the reach A and the reach B are selected when the lottery result is out of place is 1/2, When the probability that the reach A and the reach B are selected when the lottery result is a win is 9/10 and 1/10, respectively, the reach value of the reach A is higher than that of the reach B. In addition, the probability that reach A and reach B are selected when the lottery result is off is 9/10 and 1/10, respectively, and reach A and reach B are selected when the lottery result is win. When the probability of being played is one-half, reach B has a higher expected value than reach A.

  And if it shifts to a reach variation period after the intro effect performed in all the symbol variation periods, the first half part of the music B will be output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the singing action by the second character. Here, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation This corresponds to a fluctuation based on the number 25 “single reach B first half off” (see FIGS. 81 and 84). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation”, and the variation number 26 “song reach B” This corresponds to a variation based on “per second half length” (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  Furthermore, when the lottery result is not derived in the singing performance of the second character shown in FIG. 120 (E) (the first half of the music B), the singing action by the second character is performed as shown in FIG. 120 (F). In addition, the latter half of the music B is output from the speakers 18 and 57. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to a variation based on 27 “Long-term reach of Song Reach B” (see FIGS. 81 and 84). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation”, and the variation number 28 “song reach B” This corresponds to a variation based on “per second half length” (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  Next, the “intro special mode” of the third character (song C) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating an aspect displayed on the effect display device when the “intro special aspect” of the third character (music C) is executed. That is, FIG. 121 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative symbol 1153 before the start of change, FIG. 121 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 being changed before reach, and FIG. The figure which shows the mode at the time of flashlight production, FIG. 121 (D) is the figure which shows the mode at the time of the singing performance of the third character before reach, and FIGS. 121 (E) to (F) are the figures after the reach. It is a figure which shows the aspect at the time of the singing performance of 3 characters.

  The flow of the “intro special mode” of the third character (music C) (see FIGS. 121 (A) to (F)) is the flow of the “intro special mode” of the second character (music B) (FIG. 120 ( A) to (F)) are basically the same. That is, in this “intro special mode”, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), in the effect display device 115, the display screen suddenly becomes dark during the scroll fluctuation of the decorative symbol 1153, and as shown in FIG. 121 (C), An effect imitating a flash (flashlight) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), the singing operation of the music by the third character is displayed, and only the introduction part (intro) of the music C is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the singing operation. The Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (E), if reach occurs after the intro effect, the first half of the song C is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the singing action by the third character. Furthermore, when the lottery result is not derived in the singing performance of the third character (the first half of the song C), as shown in FIG. 121 (F), the latter half of the song C in accordance with the singing action by the third character. Are output from the speakers 18 and 57.

  Therefore, each variation command (variation numbers 29 to 35) for the “intro special mode” of the third character (song C) is also used for each variation command (intro special mode) of the second character (song B). The same as the variation numbers 22 to 28). However, the above-described flashlight effect is displayed in a different manner in FIG. 120C and FIG. 121C because the display manner differs depending on the music that the character subsequently sings. The third character's singing effect (see FIGS. 121D to 121F) is different from the second character's singing effect (see FIGS. 120D to 120F). And so on.

  Next, the “intro special mode” of the fourth character (song D) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating an aspect displayed on the effect display device when the “intro special aspect” of the fourth character (music D) is executed. That is, FIG. 122 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative symbol 1153 before the start of change, FIG. 122 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 before change, and FIG. The figure which shows the mode at the time of flashlight production, FIG. 122 (D) is the figure which shows the mode at the time of singing the fourth character before reach, and FIGS. 122 (E) to (F) are the figures after reach. It is a figure which shows the aspect at the time of the singing effect of 4 characters.

  The flow of the “intro special mode” of the fourth character (music D) (see FIGS. 122A to 122F) is also the flow of the “intro special mode” of the second character (music B) (FIG. 120 ( A) to (F)) are basically the same. That is, in this “intro special mode”, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), in the effect display device 115, the display screen suddenly becomes dark during the scroll fluctuation of the decorative symbol 1153, and as shown in FIG. 122 (C), An effect imitating a flash (flashlight) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), the singing operation of the music by the fourth character is displayed, and only the introduction part (intro) of the music D is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the singing operation. The Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), if a reach occurs after the intro effect, the first half of the music D is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the action of the fourth character singing. Furthermore, when the lottery result is not derived in the singing effect of the fourth character (the first half of the music D), as shown in FIG. 122 (F), the second half of the music D is synchronized with the action of the fourth character singing. Are output from the speakers 18 and 57.

  Therefore, each variation command (variation numbers 36 to 42) for the “intro special mode” of the fourth character (music D) is also used for each variation command (intro special mode) of the second character (music B). The same as the variation numbers 22 to 28). However, the above-described flashlight effect is displayed in a different manner in FIG. 120C and FIG. 122C because the display manner differs depending on the music that the character subsequently sings. The fourth character singing effect (see FIGS. 122D to 122F) is the second character singing effect (see FIGS. 120D to 120F) and the third character singing effect. (See FIGS. 121 (D) to (F)).

  As described above, in the “intro special mode” of the present embodiment, the singing action of the character is displayed before the reach occurs during the symbol variation (that is, the entire symbol variation period), and the music introduction unit ( Intro part) is output. When reach is established by this intro effect, the continuation of the intro part (the first half part and the second half part) in the music is output together with the singing action of the character. At this time, the super reach is suddenly displayed without going through the normal reach. That is, the reach form in which the continuation of the intro part (first half part and second half part) in the music outputted during the entire symbol variation period is output together with the singing action of the character corresponds to super reach. In this way, the sudden reach of the player can be surprised by the display of the super reach, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, when an intro effect is performed during the entire symbol variation period (that is, when a music introduction part (intro part) is output instead of the predetermined sound effect), instead of the predetermined sound effect during the entire symbol variation period. The general musical sound that is the same music as the specific musical sound (rust part) that is output during the reach fluctuation period and includes a part (intro part) that is different from the specific musical sound (rust part) is output. When the intro part of the music is output, the sense of expectation that a reach mode having a higher expected value than that of normal reach is derived increases, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the musical sound output during the reach variation period includes the phrase of the chorus part that is most exciting in the music. Thereby, a player's mood can be raised by the combination of the effect display in the effect display device 115 and the musical sound output from the speakers 18 and 57, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the general musical sound that is output instead of the specified sound effect during the entire symbol variation period is a musical tone that includes phrases related to the musical composition that is output during the reach variation period, so what music is output when the reach variation period is entered. The player can be reminded of what is being done, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the general musical sound that is output instead of the predetermined sound effect during the entire symbol variation period is a musical tone that includes a phrase applied to the introduction part (intro part) of the music that is output during the reach variation period. If so, it is possible to give the player an interesting feeling such as “intro quiz” that predicts what kind of music will be output, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the entire symbol variation period.

[About special aspects of chance]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, “chance” that is a game effect mode with a special effect that derives a small hit or short hit and directs a transition to a mode that is likely to be advantageous to the player. The “eye special mode” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating an aspect displayed on the effect display device when the “chance eye special aspect” is executed. That is, FIG. 123 (A) shows a mode in which the decorative symbol 1153 represents a small hit or short hit, and FIG. 123 (B) shows a mode in which a part of the decorative symbol 1153 changes to an almighty symbol (A symbol). FIG. 123 (C) is a diagram illustrating a mode for deriving that the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened, and FIGS. 123 (D) to 123 (E) are diagrams illustrating a mode change chance mode. 123 (F) to (G) are diagrams illustrating the mode of the first mode, and FIGS. 123 (H) to (I) are diagrams illustrating the mode of the second mode.

  The following “chance eye special mode” is executed at the time of fluctuation based on the “chance eye (short hit)” of the fluctuation number 43 or the “chance eye (small hit)” of the fluctuation number 44.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (A), when the “song” symbol is stopped on the left symbol column 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped on the right symbol column 1153c, and the “legend” symbol is stopped on the middle symbol column 1153b. The decorative design 1153 derives a short hit or a small hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), the decorative symbol 1153 starts scrolling again, and a part of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c changes to an almighty symbol (A symbol). Specifically, in parallel with the scroll variation of the decorative symbol 1153, the “song” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a → the “song” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c → the “princess” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a → the “song” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c. The number of decorative symbols 1153 is the almighty symbol (2 to 6 in this embodiment) by the number set in the order of “princess” symbol → “legend” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a → “legend” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c. (Design A).

  Here, the almighty symbol (A symbol) will be described repeatedly. In a change after a part of the decorative symbol 1153 changes to an almighty symbol (A symbol), when one of the stop symbol of the left symbol column 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol column 1153c becomes an almighty symbol (A symbol) Are controlled so that reach always occurs. Further, when both the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are almighty symbols (A symbol), control is performed so that long hits are always generated. Therefore, in FIG. 123 (B), as the number of decoration symbols 1153 that change to an almighty symbol (A symbol) increases, the player's sense of expectation for reach or win increases, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  The quantity of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is displayed in the lower left part of the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 123 (B)), and every time the almighty symbol (A symbol) triggers reach ( In other words, every time the symbol becomes a stop symbol, the normal symbol before the change is restored and the quantity of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is subtracted. Therefore, since the player can easily grasp the remaining amount of the almighty symbol (A symbol), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. In the present embodiment, up to six of the decorative symbols 1153 (specifically, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c) can be changed to an almighty symbol (A symbol). Conventionally, there has been a change in the decorative design to an almighty design, but all of the decorative designs in a certain design row are changed to an almighty design. This is because, for example, an effect using an almighty symbol is performed only in the variation in which the reach mode is formed. When using an almighty symbol (A symbol) over a plurality of subsequent variations as in the present embodiment, changing all of the symbol columns to an almighty symbol (A symbol) requires frequent reach production. , Can put excessive expectations on the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, by changing the maximum six decorative symbols 1153 to the almighty symbol (A symbol), it becomes possible to produce a disengagement that does not use the almighty symbol (A symbol). The load is reduced. In addition, the game can be made appropriate without giving excessive expectations to the player.

  Then, after the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 1153 shown in FIG. 123 (B) is stopped, the short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 123 (C), an effect (for example, “Aim for the top!”) That prompts the game ball to be ejected toward the effect opening / closing device 398 is displayed. At the same time, as described above, the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed twice as “short hit” or “small hit”. One of the game balls won in the effect opening / closing device 398 is held by the distribution mechanism 438 until an effect by the effect accessory 430 described later is performed.

  Here, a winning manner to the effect opening / closing device 398 by short hit or small hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. 124 is a front view of the effect display device and effect accessory before winning the effect opening / closing device, and FIG. 125 is a front view of the effect display device and effect accessory after winning the effect opening / closing device. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 438 because the game opening / closing device 398 is in a state where no game ball is won before the short hit or the small hit is executed. As described above, since the accessory guiding path 436 through which the game ball is guided from the effect opening / closing device 398 is formed of a transparent member, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the player side) It can be visually recognized that the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 438.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 125, when a game ball wins the effect opening / closing device 398 by performing a short hit or a small hit, the game ball is held by the distribution mechanism 438. From the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the player side), it is possible to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball rolls in the accessory guide path 436, and the game ball is held by the distribution mechanism 438. Is visible. The fluctuation after the game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 438 indicates that the game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 438 (in other words, a mode transition chance described later may be activated). ) To the player (specifically, “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 125) is displayed on the effect display device 115.

  Returning to FIG. 123, when the game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 438, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a mode transition chance (in this embodiment, “diva chance”). When it is determined that the mode transition chance is to be executed, the mode transition chance accompanied by the effect by the following effect accessory 430 is executed. The mode transition chance of the present embodiment is not necessarily executed by the next change, but is activated after execution of the hold change for the number of times selected by the lottery. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the mode transition chance, the mode transition chance is not executed, and the effect by the effect accessory 430 is not executed.

  Here, the mode transition chance will be described. Since the player cannot determine whether it is a small hit or a short hit only by opening / closing operation of the performance object 430, whether or not the player has shifted to the probable game state due to the short hit by the “mode shift chance” in this embodiment The player's expectation is improved by being able to judge to some extent (in other words, whether or not the normal gaming state remains due to the small hit).

  First, when the mode transition chance is activated, an effect for deriving the mode transition opportunity is displayed as shown in FIG. 123 (D). Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (E), an effect of lottery of which mode to shift to among a plurality of modes is displayed along with an effect by an effect-use accessory 430 described later. In the present embodiment, as a plurality of modes to be transferred to, a first mode (in this embodiment, “diva mode”) that is highly likely to be a probability variation gaming state, and a probability variation gaming state that is more likely than the first mode Has a high second mode (in this embodiment, “SUPER diva mode”). Further, in this mode transition chance, there is a case where the mode is not changed and the normal gaming state is selected (in this embodiment, “out”), but here “first mode” and “first” are selected. A case where a lottery is selected as a mode transition destination will be described.

  Here, the mode lottery effect by the effect accessory 430 executed at the mode transition chance will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a front view of the effect display device and the effect accessory for the mode lottery effect. As shown in FIG. 126, in the mode lottery effect by the effect actor 430, the effect actor 430 is rotationally driven and the figure 434 arranged inside the accessory rotator 432 is the front side (that is, the player side). ) And the game ball held by the distribution mechanism 438 is guided to the first performance basket 470. And the aspect (refer Fig.54 (a)) which the 1st production | generation bowl 470 inclined downward toward the 1st stage exit 476, and the 1st stage 樋 470 below toward the 2nd production pole 478 An inclined operation (see FIG. 54B) is repeated, and an effect operation in which the game ball rolls in the left-right direction on the first effect rod 470 is performed. In the present embodiment, when the game ball rolls in the left-right direction, by changing the inclination mode (for example, the degree of inclination) of the first performance pole 470, the performance outlets 476, 480 for winning the game ball are awarded. It has a structure that can be suggested before. Thereby, a lottery result to be described later can be suggested to some extent even during the lottery, and the mode lottery effect does not become monotonous. As a result, the interest of the mode lottery effect can be improved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126, the arrow of “first mode” (diva mode) displayed on the effect screen of FIG. 123 (E) points to the first stage 476, and “second mode” ( The arrow of (SUPER Diva Mode) points to the second performance exit 480. Therefore, when the first stage 樋 470 is inclined toward the first stage 476 and the game ball wins the first stage 476, the “first mode” is selected as the mode transition destination. On the other hand, when the first effect 樋 470 is inclined toward the second effect 樋 guide port 478 and the game ball rolls on the second effect 樋 472 and wins the second performance exit 480, the mode transition destination “Second mode” is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 123, when the “first mode” is selected by the mode lottery effect of the effect item 430, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 123 (G), in the “first mode”, the background effect displayed on the effect display device 115 is different from that in the normal mode (see FIG. 93, etc.). The scroll variation of the decorative pattern 1153 is executed. Therefore, by executing the “first mode” that is highly likely to be a probability-changing gaming state, it is possible to improve a player's expectation for winning.

  On the other hand, when the “second mode” is selected by the mode lottery effect of the effect item 430, as shown in FIG. 123 (H), an effect for deriving the transition to the “second mode” is displayed. . As shown in FIG. 123 (I), in the “second mode”, the background effect displayed on the effect display device 115 is different from the normal mode (see FIG. 93, etc.) and the “first mode”. Under such a display state, the scroll variation of the decorative design 1153 is executed. Therefore, by executing the “second mode” that is more likely to be a probability variation gaming state, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

  As described above, when a game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 438, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a mode transition opportunity (in this embodiment, “diva chance”). However, even when a game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 438, a lottery for shifting to the “first mode” or the “second mode” is performed. Then, after the transition to the “first mode” or the “second mode” is determined, an execution lottery based on the variation pattern is performed from the next variation. Only after winning in the execution lottery, the mode is shifted to the “first mode” or the “second mode”. However, when the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 438, the probability of shifting to the “first mode” or the “second mode” is lower than when the game ball is held.

  As described above, in the “chance eye special mode” of the present embodiment, not only a small hit or short win is derived, but also an almighty symbol (A symbol) effect or a mode lottery effect for the director for an effect 430 is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for winning or mode transition and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball that the player has struck toward the game area 37 is received by the effect opening / closing device 398, and the mode transition effect is performed by the figure 434 using the received game ball. . As a result, while being a first-class gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with a sense similar to that of a second-class gaming machine (that is, a feeling in which a game result is determined using a game ball that has been struck by itself) As a result, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  The “song” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped in the right symbol row 1153c, and the “legend” symbol is stopped in the middle symbol row 1153b, and then the decorative symbol 1153 is scrolled again. As described above, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c partially change to the almighty symbol (A symbol). In the variation that produces the replacement with the almighty symbol (A symbol), in the “chance eye special mode”, the decorative symbol 1153 is a predetermined symbol (“1”, “3”, “2” in this embodiment). Stopped display. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the variation that produces the replacement to the almighty symbol (A symbol), the decorative symbol 1153 is a predetermined probable big hit symbol (in this embodiment, “1”, “1”, “1”). ) Is displayed in a stopped state. This mode is executed at the time of fluctuation based on the “number of chances (per probability variation length)” of the fluctuation number 45. In this case, the substitution to the almighty symbol (A symbol) is virtually meaningless, but since the probability variation per unit is suddenly derived, it is possible to surprise the player and delight the player. It becomes. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

[About long-performing effects]
Next, a “long win effect mode” that is a game effect mode with a special effect for generating a long hit game in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating an aspect displayed on the effect display device when the “long hit effect mode” is executed. That is, FIG. 127 (A) is a diagram showing a mode for deriving long hits, FIGS. 127 (B) to (E) are diagrams showing modes during long hits, and FIGS. 127 (F) to (H) are The figure which shows the mode at the time of mode lottery after completion | finish of a game per long, and FIG.

  First, when the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c become the same stop symbol (that is, when the big hit variation ends), as shown in FIG. 127 (A), the start of the long hit game is derived. After that, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is executed for 15 rounds, and accompanying this, the effect image (including characters) of the effect display device 115 and the sound of the speakers 18 and 57 (including music). Winning effect is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), an effect (for example, an arrow image pointing upward) that prompts the game ball to be ejected toward the effect opening / closing device 398 is displayed, and the effect opening / closing device The opening / closing operation 398 is performed for two rounds. Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (C), an effect (for example, an arrow image pointing downward) that prompts the player to inject a game ball toward the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is displayed, and the jackpot game The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 400 is performed over 12 rounds.

  Here, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1153 is a symbol (so-called normal symbol) for notifying a normal long-term shift to a time-short mode (private mode) to be described later after a long hit game, and will be described later after a long hit game. There is a case of a symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) for notifying the probability variation per unit of transition to the probability variation mode (live mode). Then, when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1153 is “normal symbol” (that is, when the lottery result is per normal length, the lottery result is per probable length, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1153 is “ In the case of “normal symbol”), a mode lottery effect as shown in FIGS. 127 (D) to (I) below is executed. In addition, when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1153 is “probability variable” (that is, when the lottery result is per probable variable length and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1153 is “probable variable symbol”), the long symbol After the end of the game, the mode shifts to the later-described probability change mode (live mode) without performing the mode lottery effect (see FIG. 127 (I)).

  When the stop symbol of the decoration symbol 1153 is “normal symbol”, in this embodiment, in the fourteenth round, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), a plurality of characters (here, the second to second characters) are displayed on the effect display device 115. 4 characters) are displayed in a selectable manner, and the player can select an arbitrary character by pressing the effect selection switch 60. Then, in correspondence with the character selected on the effect screen of FIG. 127 (D), a long hitting mode lottery effect, which will be described later, is executed.

  Finally, as shown in FIG. 127 (E), an effect (for example, an arrow image pointing upward) that prompts the player to inject the game ball toward the effect opening / closing device 398 is displayed, and the effect opening / closing is performed. The opening / closing operation of the device 398 is performed only for one round. With the above, a total of 15 rounds per game is completed. Then, at the end of the long winning game, different long hitting mode lottery effects are executed depending on the character selected on the effect screen of FIG. 127 (D). In the screen shown in FIG. 127 (D), when the player uses the effect selection switch 60 to select a fourth character corresponding to an accessory lottery effect described later, the screen shown in FIG. 127 (E). Is displayed with the text “Aim at the top!”. This is a guidance effect for allowing the player to reliably win a game ball to the effect opening / closing device 398.

  Specifically, when the second character is selected, a long hitting mode lottery effect (plate effect) shown in FIG. 127 (F) is executed. In this plate effect, a plurality of panels representing the mode transition destination are sequentially specified while the second character moves, and the second character stops and shifts to the mode represented by the last designated panel. . Further, when the third character is selected, the long hit after mode lottery effect (one notification effect) shown in FIG. 127 (G) is executed. In this one-announcement effect, only the transition destination mode is displayed in accordance with the action of the third character, and the mode is shifted to that mode. In addition, when the fourth character is selected, a long hitting mode lottery effect (an accessory lottery effect) shown in FIG. 127 (H) is executed, and details of the accessory lottery effect will be described later.

  And after completion | finish of the game per length in this embodiment, if the said length per "short per length with a probable change" is according to the long hit mode lottery effect of FIG. 127 (F)-(H), FIG. As shown in I), a transition is made to a probability variation mode (live mode) in which both a probability variation gaming state and a short time gaming state occur. On the other hand, if the per unit length is “regular per unit”, as shown in FIG. 127 (J), the mode shifts to the short time mode (private mode) in which only the short time gaming state occurs after the end of the long per game.

  Here, the long hitting mode lottery effect (a combination lottery effect) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a front view of the effect display device and the effect accessory at the time of long hitting mode lottery effect (actor lottery effect). In this accessory lottery effect, a mode lottery effect by the effect accessory 430 is performed using the game balls held in the distribution mechanism 438 by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 398 for the 15th round.

  That is, when the fourth character is selected on the effect screen of FIG. 127 (D), when the game ball wins the effect opening / closing device 398 in the 15th round, as in FIG. Is retained. When the game ball is held by the distribution mechanism 438, the game ball that has won the effect opening / closing device 398 after that is discharged to the back of the game board 5 by the distribution mechanism 438. From the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the player side), it is possible to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball rolls in the accessory guide path 436, and the game ball is held by the distribution mechanism 438. Is visible. In the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 in the first and second rounds, even when a game ball is won, the sorting mechanism 438 discharges the game ball 5 behind the game board 5 without holding the game ball. This is because the mode lottery effect by the effect object 430 is executed by using the game ball that the player has won in the effect opening / closing device 398 immediately before (i.e., the 15th round). Thereby, since the player can surely grasp that the game ball used for the mode lottery effect has been won by himself, the decrease in interest can be suppressed. If the game ball is not won in the effect opening / closing device 398 in the 15th round, the game ball for performing the mode lottery effect by the effect accessory 430 cannot be secured, so other mode lottery effects (described above) Plate production etc.) is executed.

  Therefore, even though it is a first-class gaming machine, it can be played with a sense that the gaming result is determined using a game ball that it has struck like a second-class gaming machine, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest it can.

  In addition, when the second or third character is selected on the effect screen of FIG. 127 (D), the effect by the effect object 430 is not performed, so that the game ball is sent to the effect opening / closing device 398 in the 15th round. Even if the prize is won, the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 438. Further, when the fourth character is selected, an effect by the effect agent 430 is always executed, and therefore an effect that derives that the game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 438 (specifically, FIG. 125). “CHANCE” shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128, in the mode lottery effect by the effect item 430, the effect character 430 is driven to rotate, and the figure 434 disposed inside the accessory rotation body 432 is moved to the front side (that is, Directed to the player side). Then, the game ball held by the distribution mechanism 438 is guided to the first effect rod 470. And the aspect (refer Fig.54 (a)) which the 1st production | generation bowl 470 inclined downward toward the 1st stage exit 476, and the 1st production | generation hall | pass 470 below the 2nd production pole guidance port 478 The tilted mode (see FIG. 54B) is repeated, and an effect operation in which the game ball rolls in the left-right direction on the first effect rod 470 is performed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 128, the arrow of “time reduction mode” (private mode) displayed on the effect screen of FIG. 127 (H) points to the first performance exit 476, and “probability change mode” (live mode) The (mode) arrow points to the second performance exit 480. Therefore, when the first performance pole 470 is inclined toward the first performance exit 476 and the game ball wins the first performance exit 476, the “time reduction mode” is selected as the mode transition destination. On the other hand, when the first effect 樋 470 is tilted toward the second effect 樋 guide port 478 and the game ball rolls on the second effect 樋 472 and wins the second performance exit 480, the mode transition destination “Probability mode” is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 127, when the “probability change mode” is selected by the mode lottery effect of the effect item 430, as shown in FIG. 127 (I), the end of the long hit game and the transition to the “probability change mode” are performed. The screen to derive is displayed. In the “probability change mode”, the probability change game state and the short-time game state are executed until the next jackpot, and the background of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 is the normal mode (see FIG. 93 etc.) and the “short-time mode”. Is different. Therefore, by executing the “probability change mode”, which is a game state that is extremely advantageous for the player, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

  On the other hand, when the “short time mode” is selected by the mode lottery effect of the production effect 430, as shown in FIG. 127 (J), a screen for deriving the end of the long hit game and the transition to the “short time mode” Is displayed. In the “short time mode”, the short time gaming state is executed until a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) is changed, and the background of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 is the normal mode (see FIG. 93, etc.). Is different. Therefore, by executing the “short time mode”, which is a game state advantageous to the player, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

  As described above, in the “long winning effect mode” of the present embodiment, the long winning game is not only generated with various images and sounds, but also the player can arbitrarily select the long winning mode lottery effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. In particular, in the after-long winning mode lottery effect (actor lottery effect), the effect by the effecting agent 430 using the game ball won in the effect opening / closing device 398 immediately before the end of the long hit game (that is, the 15th round). Therefore, even if `` normal long win '' is announced before the long hit game occurs, the expectation to shift to the `` probable change mode '' advantageous to the player after the long hit game is maintained, The decrease can be suppressed.

  The long hitting mode lottery effects shown in FIGS. 127 (F) to 127 (H) have different execution timings of the effect operations. That is, in the case of the mode lottery effect (the plate effect of FIG. 127 (F) and the one-notification effect of FIG. 127 (G)) that does not involve the effect operation of the effect for the effect 430, the effect of FIG. 127 (D). A predetermined performance operation is started immediately after a character is selected on the screen. And after completion | finish of all opening / closing operation | movement of the opening / closing device 397 in a long hit game (here after 15 rounds end), the end of a long hit game and the said long hit game are shown by the screen shown to FIG. 127 (I)-(J). The game state after the end is derived.

  On the other hand, in the case of the mode lottery effect (the character lottery effect of FIG. 127 (H)) accompanied by the effect operation of the effect for the effect 430, as described above, the character is selected on the effect screen of FIG. 127 (D). Later, on the screen shown in FIG. 127 (E), a guidance effect is displayed in which “Please aim up!” Is displayed. Then, after the full opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 in the long hit game is finished (here, after the 15th round is finished), the production operation by the production actor 430 is started, and FIGS. 127 (I) to (J). The end of the long hit game and the game state after the end of the long hit game are derived from the screen shown.

  Note that from the end of the full opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 in the long hit game (here, after the end of the 15th round) until the end of the long hit game is derived (here, FIGS. 127 (I) to (J) ) Until the screen shown in () is displayed) (hereinafter referred to as the interval period) is the same length (in the present embodiment, all of the long hitting mode lottery effects shown in FIGS. 127 (F) to 127 (H). 14400 ms). That is, regardless of which long win-winning mode lottery effect is executed, the timing for displaying the screen shown in FIGS. 127 (I) to (J) (that is, the end of the long win game and the end of the long win game) The derived timing is substantially the same.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1153 is “probable variation”, the long win after mode lottery effect is not executed. In this case, the long hit after mode lottery effect is executed. (In this embodiment, 1440 ms). As a result, when performing the long win after mode lottery effect, it is possible to secure an interval period sufficient to perform the effect operation, while when not performing the long hit after mode lottery effect, Immediately after the full opening / closing operation of the device 397 is completed, it is possible to shift to the “probability change mode”.

  By the way, as described above, the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed a predetermined number of times (here, two rounds) also in the small hit game and the short hit game (see FIG. 123 and the like). However, in the small hit game and the short hit game, unlike the long hit game, the game state executed after the game is not notified. In the “chance eye special mode” shown in FIG. 123, the mode transition chance is performed after the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is completed, but each mode shown here (FIGS. 123 (F) and (H)). ) Is not a warning of the gaming state itself. Thus, in the small hit game and the short hit game, the game state is not notified, so the interval period from the end of the full opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 until the end of the game is derived is the long hit after mode. It is shorter than the case where the lottery effect is executed (1440 ms in this embodiment).

[About Probability Game Production Mode]
Next, a “probability game effect mode” that is a game effect mode with a special effect for generating a probable game in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131. In the present embodiment, the singing effects (that is, the probability-changing game effect mode) of the second to fourth characters (music B to music D) as described below in the probability-changing game state after the long hit game are as follows. It is executed until derivation per length. Below, the “probability game effect mode” for each character (music) will be described.

  First, the “probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating an aspect displayed on the effect display device when the “probability change game effect mode” of the second character (music B) is executed. That is, FIG. 129 (A) is a diagram showing a mode for deriving a probability variation game, and FIGS. 129 (B) to (H) are diagrams showing a mode during the probability variation game.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (A), after the long hit game is completed, the mode shifts to the “probability change mode” (that is, shifts to the probability change game state), and one of the change commands having the change numbers 46 to 54 is selected. In this case, the singing effect of the following second character (song B) is executed based on the change command. That is, as shown in FIGS. 129 (B) to 129 (E), an effect that the four doors are sequentially closed from the left and right directions (that is, a maximum of four door effects) is performed, and accordingly, the music B Each part is output together with the character's singing performance. Here, the music B is composed of five consecutive parts (the first part to the fifth part), and the first first part is a prelude of the so-called music B (the same applies to the other music C and D). ). In the probability variation gaming state, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is not a reach effect by a plurality of symbol strings as in the normal gaming state (formally The variation display is performed until the lottery result is derived), and the singing effect itself by the character is the reach effect.

  Specifically, the first first part is output together with the singing effect of the character from the start of the singing effect of the second character (Song B) until the first door closes (see FIG. 129 (B)). If there is an effect that the second character closes out to the front side of the first door, the singing effect of the character continues and the next second part is output until the second door closes. (See FIG. 129 (C)). If an effect of exiting to the front side of the second door where the second character closes is made, the next third part is output until the singing effect of the character continues and the third door closes. (See FIG. 129 (D)). If an effect of exiting to the front side of the third door where the second character is closed is made, the next fourth part is output until the singing effect of the character is continued and the fourth door is closed. (See FIG. 129 (E)). Finally, if an effect is made to escape to the front side of the fourth door where the second character closes, the singing effect of the character continues and the final part (fifth part) is output (FIG. 129). (See (G)). That is, if the second character can be sequentially pulled out to the front side of the closing door, the singing effect of the character continues and the continuation portion in the music B is output from the speakers 18 and 57. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 129 (F), when the second character is concealed on the back side of the closing door, the singing effect of the character ends and the output of the music B is also interrupted. Thus, the case where the singing effect of the second character is interrupted due to the door effect and falls off corresponds to the fluctuation based on the fluctuation number 46 of “song reach B door nth off”.

  The “n-th” means that in the probability variation game effect mode, the door effect is continuously performed up to four times as described above, and what number (n-th) door effect determines the change. Indicates. The same applies to the following.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (G), when the singing effect continues without the second character being concealed by any of the four doors, the entire music B corresponding to the character is output without interruption. That's right. As a result, as shown in FIG. 129 (H), the jackpot variation is executed in which the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c all have the same stop symbol, and the second character derives the jackpot. An effect of taking a predetermined pose is performed. Thereafter, the long winning game and the long winning effect mode are executed in the same manner as described above.

  Thus, the case where the singing effect of the music B by the second character is completed corresponds to the fluctuation based on the fluctuation number 51 of “per song run B completion length”. Even if the singing effect of the music B is interrupted by the door effect, the singing effect of the second character may be revived and win. This corresponds to the fluctuations based on the fluctuation numbers 52 to 54 based on “single reach B door nth recovery length”. In addition, when the singing production of the music B is interrupted by the door production, but the small hit or short win is won, the variation numbers 47 to 48 “song reach B door nth short hit” and the variation numbers 49 to 50 This corresponds to the fluctuation based on “Song Reach B Door nth Small Hit”.

  Next, the “probability game effect mode” of the third character (song C) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating an aspect displayed on the effect display device when the “probability game effect aspect” of the third character (music C) is executed. That is, FIG. 130 (A) is a diagram showing a mode for deriving a probability variation game, and FIGS. 130 (B) to (H) are diagrams showing a mode during a probability variation game.

  The flow of the “probability game effect mode” of the third character (music C) (see FIGS. 130A to 130H) is the flow of the “probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B) (FIG. 129 (A) to (H)). As shown in FIG. 130 (A), after the long hit game is over, the mode shifts to the “probability change mode”, and when one of the change commands having the change numbers 55 to 63 is selected, the following third character ( The singing effect of the music piece C) is executed based on the variation command. That is, as shown in FIGS. 130 (B) to 130 (E), a maximum of four door effects are performed, and if the third character can be sequentially pulled out to the front side of the closing door, the singing effect of the character is performed. The continuation of the music piece C is continuously output from the speakers 18 and 57. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130 (F), when the third character is concealed on the back side of the closing door, the singing effect of the character ends and the output of the song C is also interrupted. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (G), when the singing effect continues without the third character being concealed by any of the four doors, the entire music piece C corresponding to the character is output without interruption. That's right. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 130 (H), the jackpot variation is executed, and the third character takes an effect of taking a predetermined pose for deriving the jackpot, and thereafter, the long win game and the long win effect mode are performed. Executed.

  Therefore, each variation command (variation numbers 55 to 63) for the “probability change game effect mode” of the third character (song C) is also changed for each “change probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B). This is the same as the command (variation numbers 46 to 54). However, the third character's singing effect (see FIGS. 130 (B) to (G)) is different from the second character's singing effect (see FIGS. 129 (B) to (G)). And so on.

  Next, the “probability game effect mode” of the fourth character (music D) will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an aspect displayed on the effect display device when the “probability game effect aspect” of the fourth character (music D) is executed. That is, FIG. 131 (A) is a diagram showing a mode for deriving a probability variation game, and FIGS. 131 (B) to (H) are diagrams showing a mode during a probability variation game.

  The flow of the “probability game effect mode” of the fourth character (music D) (see FIGS. 131A to 131H) is the flow of the “probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B) (FIG. 129 (A) to (H)). As shown in FIG. 131 (A), after the long hit game is over, the mode shifts to the “probability change mode”, and when any of the change commands having the change numbers 64 to 72 is selected, the following fourth character ( The singing effect of the music D) is executed based on the change command. That is, as shown in FIGS. 131 (B) to 131 (E), a maximum of four door effects are performed, and if the fourth character can escape to the front side of the closing door, the singing effect of the character continues. Then, the continuation of the music D is output from the speakers 18 and 57. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 131 (F), when the fourth character is concealed behind the closing door, the singing effect of the character ends and the output of the music D is also interrupted. Then, as shown in FIG. 131 (G), when the fourth character is not concealed by any of the four doors and the singing effect continues, the entire music D corresponding to the character is output without interruption. That's right. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 131 (H), the jackpot variation is executed, and the fourth character performs an effect of taking a predetermined pose for deriving the jackpot, and thereafter, the long win game and the long win effect mode are performed. Executed.

  Therefore, each variation command (variation numbers 64 to 72) for the “probability change game effect mode” of the fourth character (music D) is also changed for each “probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B). This is the same as the command (variation numbers 46 to 54). However, the singing effect of the fourth character (see FIGS. 131 (B) to (G)) is the singing effect of the second character (see FIGS. 129 (B) to (G)) and the singing effect of the third character. (See FIGS. 130 (B) to 130 (G)).

  In the above “probability game effect mode”, when a short win is won (that is, when any variation command of variation numbers 47, 48, 56, 57, 65, 66 is selected) Is won (that is, when any change command of change numbers 49, 50, 58, 59, 67, and 68 is selected), the character is concealed by one of the first to third door effects. Since the output of the music is interrupted, the singing effect of the character ends without outputting the entire music. This is because the probability variation game is executed in the “probability game effect mode”, so that the game state does not change even if the probability variation is performed by winning the short win.

  Thus, in the “probability variation game effect mode” of the present embodiment, if the probability variation game is effected not only by the character singing effect and the door effect, but also if the character singing effect (that is, the output of the music) continues. The more you do, the better your expectations for winning. When the singing performance of the character is completed (that is, when the entire music is output), the long hit is derived. Therefore, the impact is more varied without depending on the decorative pattern 1153 displayed on the rendering display screen 115. It is possible to produce a certain effect and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Further, since the reach state and the lottery result are taught by the output of the music, the player can grasp the reach state and the lottery result by listening to the music, and can have an unprecedented interest. Since the player plays the game while wishing to “listen to the music”, the player can enjoy the game with a sense of tension. Further, when the music is output, the reach state can be grasped, and when all the music is outputted, it is possible to grasp that the player has won the long game, so that the player can enjoy the game with a more thrilling feeling.

  Further, the first special is performed by the character singing effect and the door effect (that is, by the image effect in the effect display device 115 and the sound output by the speakers 18 and 57) without performing the reach effect by using a plurality of symbol rows as in the prior art. Reach production is performed to give the player a sense of expectation of winning the lottery by the symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710. Originally, the image effect in the effect display device 115 is performed in order to increase the reach form by a plurality of symbol sequences. However, as in the present embodiment, the image effect and the image effect can be performed without performing the reach effect by the plurality of symbol sequences. By performing the reach effect only by the sound output from the speakers 18 and 57, the player can listen to the singing by the character without paying attention to the change display of the symbol sequence, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the “probability variation game effect mode” shown in FIGS. 129 to 131, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is “per probability variation length”, the emblem accessory You may make it selectively perform the definite notification of "per probability variation length" by 385 effect production. In this case, it is determined by a predetermined lottery whether or not the effect lottery means 760 performs the accessory effect by the emblem accessory 385 at the execution timing of the door effect (when the effect of closing the door from the left and right directions). As a result of the lottery, when it is decided to perform the effect production by the emblem accessory 385, the effect accessory operation execution means 762 activates the predetermined light source 380 to cause the emblem accessory 385 to be in a predetermined light emission mode. Light up. In addition, when performing an effect of the emblem accessory 385, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the effect display screen 115 or another effect is performed (for example, the effector 430 is turned on). A predetermined sound effect may be emitted from the speakers 18 and 57. Thereby, without depending on the decorative design 1153 displayed on the effect display screen 115, it is possible to notify the player of the confirmation of “per probability variation” by various effects having a stronger impact.

  In addition, each of the music B, C, and D (in other words, the second to fourth characters) output in the “probability game effect mode” shown in FIGS. 129 to 131 has an expectation degree for “long hit”. It may be set differently. For example, when the song D (fourth character) is output, “long hit” may be derived more than when the other songs B and C (second and third characters) are output. It may be high. As a result, various effects using various music pieces can be made, and the player can estimate the expectation for the long hit by the music piece type (character type).

  The gaming machine of the present embodiment described above has the following configuration. In addition, the following structures 1-7 are provided independently or in combination as appropriate.

[Configuration 1]
A game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball is driven toward the game area;
A starting port capable of accepting a game ball driven toward the game area;
A game effect deriving means capable of deriving at least a plurality of symbols and sound effects as a predetermined game effect;
Start detection means for detecting that a game ball driven toward the game area is received by the start port;
Lottery means for determining whether or not at least a jackpot has been won in accordance with detection of a game ball by the start detection means;
Game effect derivation control means for deriving the predetermined game effect and the lottery result by the lottery means to the game effect derivation means;
After a plurality of symbol variation periods in which a plurality of symbol variations are displayed, a plurality of out symbol effects in which a lottery result of losing by the lottery means is derived, and the plurality of symbol variation periods and a plurality of symbols are the same A plurality of reach symbol effects in which a lottery result is derived after the reach symbol variation period in which the remaining symbols are variably displayed after stopping at the symbol, and the plurality of symbol variation periods and one of the predetermined reach songs Game effect storage means for storing a plurality of game effects including at least a plurality of special reach effects from which a lottery result is derived after a reach music output period in which a part or all of them are output;
And a jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game in response to the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is won.
A game control means having at least
A gaming machine equipped with
The game effect derivation control means includes
When the lottery result by the lottery means is out, one of the plurality of out symbol effects and the plurality of reach symbol effects is derived to the game effect deriving means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a big hit, one of the plurality of reach design effects is derived to the game effect derivation means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is unsuccessful or jackpot, the game effect deriving means is replaced with one of the plurality of special reach effects instead of the plurality of lost symbol effects and the plurality of reach symbol effects. Derivable, and
The plurality of special reach productions are:
The reach music that is output in the reach music output period is composed of one continuous music, and the reach state that has a higher expectation for jackpot than the multiple symbol fluctuation period is replaced by the symbol fluctuation in the reach symbol fluctuation period It is generated by the output of the reach music,
In the reach music output period, after only a part of the reach music is output, a plurality of special reach release effects from which the lottery result of the release by the lottery means is derived,
In the reach music output period, after all of the reach music has been output, the lottery lottery results derived by the lottery means are derived, and at least a special reach per reach,
The game control means includes
A game effect derived to the game effect deriving unit by the game effect deriving control unit is selectively determined from a plurality of game effects stored in the game effect storage unit according to at least a lottery result by the lottery unit. A game production determining means,
The game effect determining means is
If the lottery result by the lottery means is out of the first game state, one of the plurality of out symbol effects and the plurality of reach symbol effects is selectively selected from the game effect storage means. Decided on
If the lottery result by the lottery means is out of the second game state in which a privilege more advantageous to the player than the first game state is given, the plurality of game effect storage means Select one of the special reach off-directories,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a big hit and the first gaming state, one of the plurality of reach symbol effects is selectively determined from the game effect storage means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a big hit and the second gaming state, any one of the plurality of special reach winning effects is selectively determined from the game effect storage means. There,
When the game effect deriving control means derives any of the special reach effects to the game effect deriving means, the reach music is output by the reach music output during the reach music output period, and a part of the reach music is generated. Is output to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is out of order, or that all of the reach music is output to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is a big hit. It is characterized by that.

  The gaming machine according to this configuration includes a gaming board 5 in which a gaming area 37 is formed. In the game area 37, a start port (first start port 390, second start port 392, and third start port 394) that can receive a game ball driven toward the game region 37 and a predetermined game effect are derived. Possible game effect deriving means (effect display device 115 and speakers 18, 57) and game control means (main control board 131, peripheral control board 662 and display device control board 116) are provided. The game control means includes start detection means (step S1104, step S1101), lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700, second special symbol lottery means 710), game effect derivation control means (first special symbol image display control means). 851 and sound source IC 670, second special symbol image display control means 852 and sound source IC 670), game effect storage means (tables 1 to 33), and jackpot game execution means 748. When it is detected by the start detection means (step S1104, step S1101) that the game ball is received by the start opening (first start opening 390, second start opening 392, third start opening 394), the lottery means (first 1 special symbol lottery means 700 and second special symbol lottery means 710) determine whether or not at least a big win has been won. And it was memorize | stored in the game effect memory | storage means (Tables 1-33) by the game effect derivation | leading-out control means (The 1st special symbol image display control means 851 and sound source IC670, the 2nd special symbol image display control means 852, and sound source IC670). Any one of the plurality of game effects and the lottery result by the lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700, second special symbol lottery means 710) are the game effect derivation means (effect display device 115 and speakers 18, 57). To be derived. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot game execution means 748 executes the jackpot game.

  Here, the game effect storage means (tables 1 to 33) include a plurality of out symbol effects (variation patterns of variation numbers 1 to 7) from which a lottery result is derived after a plurality of symbol variation periods. After a symbol variation period and a reach symbol variation period, a plurality of reach symbol effects (variation patterns of variation numbers 8 to 45, 73 to 86) from which a lottery result is derived, a plurality of symbol variation periods and a reach music output period A plurality of game effects including at least a plurality of special reach effects (variation patterns of variation numbers 46 to 72) from which lottery results are derived later are stored. If the lottery result is out of order, a plurality of out symbol effects (variation patterns with fluctuation numbers 1 to 7) and a plurality of reach symbol effects (out of fluctuation patterns among fluctuation numbers 8 to 45 and 73 to 86). If any one is derived and the lottery result is a jackpot, any one of a plurality of reach design effects (a jackpot variation pattern among variation numbers 8 to 45, 73 to 86) is derived, or a plurality A plurality of special reach effects (variation patterns of fluctuation numbers 46 to 72) instead of outlier design effects (variation patterns of fluctuation numbers 1 to 7) and a plurality of reach design effects (variation patterns of fluctuation numbers 8 to 45, 73 to 86) ) Can be derived. “Multiple symbol variation period” is a period during which multiple symbols are displayed. “Reach symbol variation period” is a part of multiple symbols that stops at the same symbol and the remaining symbols are variablely displayed. The “reach music output period” is a period during which a part or all of a predetermined reach music is output.

  A plurality of special reach effects (variation patterns of variation numbers 46 to 72) are a continuous state in which a reach state having a higher expectation for jackpot than a plurality of symbol variation periods is replaced with symbol variations in the reach symbol variation period. This is generated when the reach music composed of the above music is output during the reach music output period. And, in the reach music output period, a plurality of special reach off effects (out of fluctuation patterns among the fluctuation numbers 46 to 72) from which only a part of the reach music is outputted and then a lottery result of the out is derived. , Including a plurality of special reach achievements (a jackpot variation pattern among the variation numbers 46 to 72) from which a lottery lottery result is derived after all of the reach music is output.

  Further, the game control means (main control board 131, peripheral control board 662 and display device control board 116) is at least in accordance with the lottery result by the lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700, second special symbol lottery means 710). The game effects derived to the game effect deriving means (the effect display device 115 and the speakers 18 and 57) are stored in a plurality of game effects (variation numbers 1 to 86) stored in the game effect storage means (tables 1 to 33). It further has game effect determining means (step S1540, step S1550, step S1560, step S1580, step S1600, step S1610, step S1620) that is selectively determined from the pattern. Specifically, if the lottery result is out and the game state is the first game state, a plurality of out symbol effects (variation patterns with variation numbers 1 to 7) and a plurality of reach symbol effects (variation numbers 8 to 45). , 73 to 86) is selectively determined. Further, if the lottery result is out and the game state is the second game state, any one of a plurality of special reach out effects (out of change patterns among the change numbers 46 to 72) is selectively determined. The In addition, if the lottery result is a big hit and the first gaming state, any one of a plurality of reach design effects (a big hit variation pattern among the variation numbers 8 to 45 and 73 to 86) is selective. To be determined. Further, if the lottery result is a big hit and the second gaming state, any one of a plurality of special reach wins (a big hit fluctuation pattern among the fluctuation numbers 46 to 72) is selectively determined. . The “second gaming state” is a gaming state in which a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the “first gaming state” is given.

  With the above configuration, when any special reach effect (variation pattern of change numbers 46 to 72) is derived to the game effect deriving means (effect display device 115 and speakers 18, 57), it is output during the reach music output period. The reach state is taught by the reach music. At the same time, it is taught that the lottery result is out of order by outputting only a part of the reach music, or that the lottery result is a big hit by outputting all of the reach music. The

  Therefore, when it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won by the lottery means, a plurality of symbols are variably displayed from a plurality of symbol variation periods without going through a reach symbol variation period in which a reach state occurs depending on a symbol stop mode. The lottery result by the lottery means can be derived after a reach music output period in which part or all of the predetermined reach music is output. Therefore, it becomes possible to derive the lottery result related to the jackpot in a new manner that does not depend on the display manner of a plurality of symbols, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lowered in the lottery result derivation process.

  In other words, in conventional gaming machines, lottery results are derived via multiple symbol variation periods (or multiple symbol variation periods and reach symbol variation periods), so that lottery results can be derived in a plurality of symbol display modes. In addition to being addicted, the production tends to be monotonous, and the player's interest has been concentrated only on the manner in which the stop symbols are aligned. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the lottery result can be derived via the reach music output period, so that the lottery result can be derived also by the reach music without depending on the display mode of a plurality of symbols. It is. Thereby, when deriving the lottery result related to the jackpot, it is possible to produce more diverse and impactful effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being reduced in the process of deriving the lottery result.

  Further, when the special reach effect is derived, the reach state is taught by the reach music output in the reach music output period. Here, conventionally, the reach state is taught by stopping a part of a plurality of variation symbols at the same symbol, and the player grasps the reach state by visually checking the stop state of the variation symbols. . On the other hand, according to the present invention, since the occurrence of the reach state is taught by the output of the reach song, the player can grasp the occurrence of the reach state by listening to the reach song, and has an unprecedented interest Can do. Further, since the player plays the game while wishing to listen to the reach music in order to obtain a reach state with high expectation for the jackpot, the player can enjoy the game with a sense of tension. Further, when the reach music is output, the player can grasp the reach state with high expectation for the jackpot, so that the game can be enjoyed with a more thrilling feeling.

  Further, during the reach music output period, only a part of the reach music is output to teach the disengagement, or the entire reach music is output to teach the jackpot. Here, conventionally, it is taught whether or not a big win is won depending on whether or not a plurality of floating symbols stop at the same symbol, and the player draws a lottery regarding the big hit by visually checking the stop mode of the variable symbols. I knew the result. On the other hand, according to the present invention, since the lottery result is taught according to the output status of the reach music, the player can grasp whether or not the big hit is won by listening to the reach music, and has an unprecedented interest. Can play. In addition, the player plays the game while wishing to “listen to all of the reach music pieces” in order to win the jackpot, so that the player can entertain the game with a sense of tension. Further, when all of the reach music is output, the player can grasp that the player has won the jackpot, so that the game can be enjoyed with a more thrilling feeling.

  In the first gaming state, any one of a plurality of out symbol effects and a plurality of reach symbol effects is derived based on the lottery result, and in the second gaming state, a plurality of special reach effects ( Any one of the special reach off effect and the special reach per effect) is derived based on the lottery result. That is, depending on the gaming state, there are a case where the reach state and the lottery result are taught via the reach symbol variation period and a case where the reach state and the lottery result are taught via the reach music output period. Therefore, the reach state and the lottery result can be derived in a form using any of a plurality of symbols or reach music according to the game state, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Here, the reach music output in the reach music output period is composed of one continuous music. For this reason, when the jackpot is won, all of one piece of music is output, while when it is out of play, up to the middle of one piece of music is output. Therefore, when winning the jackpot, not only is a privilege given that a large amount of game balls can be paid out, but also a player can be given a sense of accomplishment that he can listen to all of the reach music.

  Note that “the degree of expectation for jackpot is high” means the probability of being selected when the lottery result (the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710) is out of place, and the winning case The degree of expectation derived from the probability of being selected, and the higher the degree of expectation, the higher the possibility (probability) of winning the lottery. Specifically, for example, when there is a reach mode A and a reach mode B as reach modes, the probability that the reach A and the reach B are selected when the lottery result is out of place is 1/2, Expectation that Reach A wins more than Reach B when the probability that Reach A and Reach B are selected when the lottery result is win is 9/10 and 1/10, respectively. The degree becomes higher. In addition, the probability that reach A and reach B are selected when the lottery result is off is 9/10 and 1/10, respectively, and reach A and reach B are selected when the lottery result is win. When the probability of being played is one-half, the expectation that reach B wins the lottery is higher than reach A.

  In the present embodiment, “reach music” refers to music that is output based on song reach B, C, D (variation patterns of fluctuation numbers 46 to 72). The “single piece of music” that constitutes this reach piece may include the whole piece of music as long as it is one piece of music, or may include only the main part (rust part) of one piece of music. Good. Also, it may be composed of a plurality of parts obtained by continuously time-dividing one piece of music or a plurality of parts obtained by continuously dividing one piece of music according to contents (for example, an intro part and a rust part). Good.

[Configuration 2]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 1,
The game control means includes
When the lottery result by the lottery means wins the first jackpot, the probability that the lottery means that the jackpot is won after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the first jackpot is a predetermined probability. Normal game execution means for executing a normal game controlled by
When the lottery result by the lottery means wins the second jackpot, the probability that the lottery means that the jackpot is won after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the second jackpot is determined in the normal game. Probability game execution means for executing a probability change game controlled with a higher probability than a predetermined probability,
The first gaming state is:
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means wins the first jackpot, the normal game is being executed by the normal game executing means,
The second gaming state is:
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means wins the second jackpot, the probability changing game is being executed by the probability changing game executing means.

  In the gaming machine according to the present configuration, the first gaming state is based on the fact that the first jackpot (ordinary length) is won, and the normal game execution means (step S15402, step S15502, step S15602, step S15802, etc.) Thus, the normal game is being executed. The second game state is a state in which the probability change game is being executed by the probability change game execution means (the probability change game execution means 740) based on the winning of the second jackpot (per probability change length).

  Accordingly, a plurality of special reach effects (special reach off effects and special games only when the second jackpot (per probability variation length) is won and the game state is in the second game state (probability game is being executed). Any one of the effects per reach) is derived based on the lottery result. That is, when a probability variation game advantageous to the player is being executed, the reach state and the lottery result are taught by the reach music unlike the normal game. Therefore, by teaching the reach state and the lottery results in a special manner using reach music during probability change games, it is possible to make the player have an interest and expectation different from those during normal games, and to reduce the interest Can be suppressed.

  Further, the “big hit game” corresponds to the long hit game in the present embodiment. “Normal game” means a game in which a probability change game is not executed in the present embodiment, and may be accompanied by an advantageous game (short-time game). “Probability change game” means a game in which a probability change game is executed, and may be accompanied by an advantageous game (short-time game).

[Configuration 3]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 2,
A special appeal that is provided in the vicinity of the game effect deriving means and can appeal that the lottery result by the lottery means wins the second jackpot in a manner different from the game effect derived to the game effect deriving means. Means, and
The game control means includes
When the lottery result by the lottery means wins the second jackpot, the appeal determination unit for selectively determining whether or not to appeal the second jackpot by the special appeal means;
And when it is determined that the appeal is determined by the appeal determination unit, the special appeal unit has a special appeal control unit for appealing that the second jackpot has been won.

  In the gaming machine according to the present configuration, special appeal means (emblem role) that can appeal that the second big hit (per probability variation length) is won in the vicinity of the game effect deriving means (the effect display device 115 and the speakers 18, 57). Object 385). Then, when it is determined that the appeal is determined by the appeal determination unit (effect lottery means 760) in the case of winning the second jackpot (per probability variation length), the special appeal control means (the effect accessory operation executing means 762) is used. It is appealed that the second jackpot (per probable length) was won by the special appeal means (emblem accessory 385).

  Therefore, when the second big hit (per probability variation length) is won and the second gaming state (the probability variation game is being executed), if the second big hit (per probability variation length) is further won It is possible to appeal that the second jackpot (per probable length) has been won by the special appeal means (emblem accessory 385). Therefore, it becomes possible to derive the lottery result related to the jackpot in a new manner that does not depend on the display manner of a plurality of symbols.

  In other words, in the past, it was derived that when a plurality of variation symbols were aligned with the “probable variation” stop symbol, it was derived that the second jackpot (per probable variation length) was won, and it depended on the variation display of the plurality of symbols There was a tendency for interest to decline due to the monotonous performance. However, according to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the second big hit (per probability variation length) is won, the fact is selectively appealed by the special appeal means (emblem accessory 385). There can be no new interest.

  In particular, when the reach state and the lottery result are taught in a special manner using the reach musical composition, the reach state using a plurality of symbols is not derived, so the second design effect using a plurality of symbols is performed. It is not possible to derive the jackpot (per probability variation length). However, according to this configuration, it is possible to derive the second jackpot (per probability variation length) with a special appeal means (emblem accessory 385) without using a symbol effect using a plurality of symbols, and further reach Combined with the production by the music, the production can be performed with more novelty and impact.

[Configuration 4]
In the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1 to 3,
The game effect storage means stores each of the plurality of special reach effects in association with one of a plurality of songs as a reach song output in the reach song output period,
When the game effect deriving control means derives any one of the special reach effects determined by the game effect determining means to the game effect deriving means, the reach music corresponding to the special reach effect is output during the reach music output period. To do,
When one of the special reach effects is derived to the game effect deriving means, the degree of expectation that the special reach effect is an effect per one special reach differs depending on the reach music output in the reach music output period. It is characterized by that.

  In the gaming machine according to the present configuration, in the game effect storage means (Tables 1 to 33), each of the plurality of special reach effects (variation patterns with variation numbers 46 to 72) is output as a reach song in the reach song output period. Any one of a plurality of music pieces is stored in association with each other. Then, when deriving a special reach effect (variation patterns of variation numbers 46 to 72), the reach music corresponding to the special reach effect is output during the reach music output period, and the special reach is performed according to the reach music. The degree of expectation that is a winning effect (a jackpot variation pattern among the variation numbers 46 to 72) is different.

  Therefore, when any of the special reach effects (variation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 46 to 72) is derived, the music associated with each special reach effect is output as the reach music, and the special reach per the reach music is output. The degree of expectation that is the production (that is, the degree of expectation that all the reach music is output and the jackpot is derived) is different. Therefore, it is possible to produce various effects using various reach songs, and further, the player can estimate the degree of expectation for the big hit with the music pieces of the reach songs, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, the music B is associated with the special reach effect (variation pattern of fluctuation numbers 46 to 54), and the music C is associated with the special reach effect (variation pattern of fluctuation numbers 45 to 63). The music D is associated with a special reach effect (variation patterns with variation numbers 64 to 72) (see FIGS. 129 to 131). And the expectation degree which is the effect per special reach (the jackpot variation pattern among the variation numbers 46 to 72) can be arbitrarily changed for each of the music B, the music C, and the music D.

[Configuration 5]
In the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1 to 4,
The plurality of special reach productions are:
During the reach music output period, the reach production is taught at least once, instructing whether or not to continue the output of the reach music, and the output of the reach music is taught by the branch effect. The reach music is continuously output, but if the branch effect is taught not to continue the output of the reach music, the output of the reach music is interrupted,
The plurality of special reach deviating effects are:
In any branching effect executed in the reach music output period, it is taught that the output of the reach music is not continued, and after the output of the reach music is interrupted, the lottery result by the lottery means is lost. While it is derived that there is
The production per special reach is as follows:
In all branch effects executed during the reach music output period, it is taught that the output of the reach music is taught, and after the output of the reach music is completed, the lottery result by the lottery means is a big hit Is derived.

  In the gaming machine according to this configuration, a plurality of special reach effects (variation patterns with fluctuation numbers 46 to 72) teach whether or not to continue the output of the reach music during the reach music output process in the reach music output period. The branch effect (door effect) is performed at least once. Then, if it is taught that the output of the reach music is not continued in any branch effect (door effect), the release is derived after the output of the reach music is interrupted (special reach loss effect). On the other hand, if it is taught that the output of reach music is continued in all branch effects (door effects), the jackpot is derived after the output of the reach music is completed (effect per special reach).

  Therefore, when the special reach effect is derived, the branch effect (door effect) is performed at least once in the reach music output process during the reach music output period, and the reach music is continued with the branch effect (door effect) as an opportunity. Or an interruption is made. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the game while being thrilled whether or not it is taught to continue the output of the reach music by the branch effect (door effect).

  Furthermore, if it is instructed not to continue the output of reach music in any branch effect (door effect) during the reach music output period, the output of reach music is interrupted and a release is derived (special reach out effect) ). In other words, even if it is a special reach off effect, a branch effect (door effect) is performed and the reach music is interrupted, so not only can the player's tension be maintained, but the reach music is suddenly interrupted and discourages the player. Can be prevented.

  On the other hand, if it is taught that the output of reach music is continued in all branch effects (door effects) during the reach music output period, the output of reach music is completed and the jackpot is derived (effect per special reach) . Therefore, in the special reach per stage, the player will clear multiple branch effects (door effects) one after another, and when the last branch effect (door effects) is cleared, the reach music will be completed and the jackpot will be derived. Can not only receive the bonus of bonus game, but can also achieve a sense of accomplishment that has cleared all branch effects (door effects).

  In this embodiment, the door effect shown in FIGS. 129 (B) to (G), FIGS. 130 (B) to (G), and FIGS. This is equivalent to the branching effect executed in In addition, what is necessary is just to set arbitrarily the execution frequency and execution timing of a branch effect in a reach music output period.

[Configuration 6]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 5,
The game effect deriving means is:
At least image display means capable of displaying an image including a plurality of symbols, and sound output means capable of outputting sound including sound effects and reach music,
The game effect derivation control means includes
Image control means for controlling image display in the image display means, and sound control means for controlling sound output in the sound output means,
The plurality of special reach productions are:
In the reach music output period, the voice control means outputs the reach music by the voice output means, and the image control means displays a predetermined character on the image display means,
When a branch effect is taught that teaches that the output of reach music is not continued, the image control means conceals the character by the image display means, and the voice control means causes the reach of the reach music in the audio output means. While the output is interrupted
When a branch effect that teaches continuing the output of the reach music is executed, the character is continuously displayed on the image display means by the image control means, and the sound output means by the sound control means. The reach music is output continuously.

  In the gaming machine according to this configuration, a plurality of special reach effects (variation patterns with fluctuation numbers 46 to 72) are reached by the voice output means (speakers 18 and 57) by the voice control means (sound source IC 670) during the reach music output period. The music is output and a predetermined character is displayed on the image display means (effect display device 115) by the image control means (first special symbol image display control means 851 and second special symbol image display control means 852). When a branch effect (door effect) that teaches that the output of reach music is not continued is executed, the character is concealed and the output of reach music is interrupted. On the other hand, when a branch effect that teaches continuing the output of the reach music is executed, the character is continuously displayed and the reach music is continuously output.

  Accordingly, when the special reach effect is derived, the reach music is output and a predetermined character is displayed. And if it is instructed not to continue the output of reach music in the branch effect (door effect), the character is concealed, while the character is instructed to continue output of reach music in the branch effect (door effect). Will continue to be displayed. That is, during the reach music output period, the character is concealed or continuously displayed with a branch effect (door effect) as an opportunity. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the game while throbbing whether or not the character is continuously displayed by the branch effect (door effect). Furthermore, the character is concealed or continuously displayed in conjunction with the continuation or interruption of reach music, so that the player can enjoy a variety of branch effects (door effects) both visually and auditorily. You can concentrate on the game with a sense of tension.

  In the present embodiment, the character B is displayed corresponding to the special reach effect (variation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 46 to 54), and the character C is displayed corresponding to the special reach effect (the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 45 to 63). The character D is displayed corresponding to the special reach effect (variation patterns with variation numbers 64 to 72) (see FIGS. 129 to 131). In other words, since the characters B, C, and D correspond to the music B, C, and D, respectively, depending on which of the characters B, C, and D is displayed, an effect per special reach (variation numbers 46 to 72). The expectation that is the jackpot fluctuation pattern) will be different.

[Configuration 7]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 5 or 6,
The plurality of special reach productions are:
The reach music that is output during the reach music output period is composed of a plurality of continuous music parts by dividing one music in stages, and the music sounds that are output in order from the first music part during the reach music output period The number of parts output varies depending on each special reach production.
The branch effect executed in the reach music output period is executed when the output of the plurality of musical sound parts constituting the reach music ends,
When teaching that the output of the reach music is continued by the branch effect, the next music part following the music part corresponding to the branch effect is output and the output of the reach music is continued.
If the branch effect teaches that the output of the reach music is not continued, the output of the reach music is interrupted without outputting the next music part following the music part corresponding to the branch effect. There,
While the plurality of special reach off-stage effects, only a part of the plurality of musical sound parts constituting the reach music is sequentially and sequentially output from the leading musical sound part,
The plurality of special reach-performing effects are characterized in that all of the plurality of musical sound parts constituting the reach music are sequentially and sequentially output from the first musical sound part.

  In the gaming machine according to this configuration, a plurality of special reach effects (variation patterns with variation numbers 46 to 72) are obtained by dividing a reach song output in a reach song output period into a plurality of consecutive pieces. The number of musical sound parts that are output in order from the first musical sound part in the reach music output period differs depending on each special reach effect. Further, in the reach music output period, the branch effect (door effect) is executed when the output of the plurality of musical sound parts is finished. If it is instructed not to continue the output of the reach music in any branch effect (door effect), the next music part following the music part corresponding to the branch effect is not output. Only a part of is continuously output sequentially from the first musical sound part (special reach off effect). On the other hand, if it is instructed to continue the output of reach music in all branch effects (door effects), the next music part that follows the music part corresponding to each branch effect is output, so there are multiple music parts. Are output sequentially and sequentially from the first musical sound part (production per special reach).

  Therefore, if it is taught that the output of the reach music is not continued in the branch effect (door effect), the next musical sound part following the music part corresponding to the branch effect is not output, while the branch effect (door effect) When it is instructed to continue the output of the reach musical piece, the next musical part following the musical part corresponding to the branch effect is output. For this reason, during the reach music output period, the musical sound part constituting the reach music is output or non-output triggered by the branch effect (door effect), so that the player has the subsequent music part by the branch effect (door effect). It is possible to concentrate on the game while throbbing whether or not it is output.

  In addition, the reach music is composed of a plurality of continuous music parts by dividing one music in stages, and the number of music parts output in order from the first music part in the reach music output period, It depends on the special reach production. That is, each subsequent musical sound part is output in order from the first musical sound part, so that the player can easily grasp the degree of progress with respect to the entire reach musical piece from the content of the outputted musical sound part. You can enjoy the game with tension that you want to listen to the part. In addition, by making it possible to selectively change the number of musical sound parts that are output during the reach music output period (ie, the ratio that is output in the entire reach music), it is possible to produce more diverse effects using reach music. Can be.

  In addition, during the reach music output period, if only a part of the plurality of music parts that make up the reach music is successively output from the head music part in sequence, the release is taught (special reach off effect), and the reach music The jackpot is taught when all of the plurality of musical sound parts constituting the sound are successively output sequentially from the first musical sound part (effect per special reach). In other words, a jackpot is derived if it is output up to the last musical sound part of the reach music, while a miss is derived otherwise, so the musical sound part that is output during the reach music output period is brought closer to the last musical sound part. The closer it is, the higher the player's expectation for the jackpot and the lowering of interest.

  Note that the “musical sound part” is a plurality of continuous blocks obtained by dividing one music piece in stages, and means a part of the music piece. Therefore, only the introduction part (intro part), only the first half part, and only the second half part correspond to the musical sound part. The musical sound part is not limited to one phrase, and may be a plurality of phrases. In this embodiment, each reach musical piece is composed of five musical sound parts, and branch effects (door effects) are executed corresponding to the first to fourth musical sound parts (see FIGS. 129 to 131). ).

  The “starting port” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to any one of “first starting port 390”, “second starting port 392”, and “third starting port 394” of the present embodiment. To do. The “game effect deriving means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to both the “effect display device 115” and the “speakers 18 and 57” of the present embodiment. The “game control means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “main control board 131”, the “peripheral control board 662”, and the “display device control board 116” of the present embodiment. The “start detection means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to “step S1104” or “step S1101” in the present embodiment. The “lottery means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to “first special symbol lottery means 700” or “second special symbol lottery means 710” of the present embodiment. The “game effect derivation control means” described in each of the above configurations is the “first special symbol image display control means 851 and sound source IC 670” or “second special symbol image display control means 852 and sound source IC 670” of the present embodiment. Equivalent to. The “game effect storage means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to “tables 1 to 33” of the present embodiment. The “game effect determining means” described in each of the above configurations is “Step S1540”, “Step S1550”, “Step S1560”, “Step S1580”, “Step S1600”, “Step S1610” and “Step S1610” of this embodiment. This corresponds to any of “step S1620”. The “normal game execution means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to any of “Step S15402”, “Step S15502”, “Step S15602”, “Step S15802”, and the like of this embodiment. The “probability change game execution means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “probability change game execution means 740” of the present embodiment. The “special appeal means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “emblem accessory 385” of the present embodiment. The “appeal appeal determination unit” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “effect lottery unit 760” of the present embodiment. The “special appeal control means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “actuating accessory operation executing means 762” of the present embodiment. The “audio output means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to “speakers 18 and 57” of the present embodiment. The “image display means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “effect display device 115” of the present embodiment. The “voice control means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “sound source IC 670” of the present embodiment. The “image control means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to “first special symbol image display control means 851” or “second special symbol image display control means 852” of the present embodiment.

  Moreover, although this invention is described in said preferable embodiment, this invention is not restrict | limited only to it. Various embodiments are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.

  For example, the effect image display device in the above-described embodiment is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine, a gaming machine that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, etc. The invention can be applied.

  In other words, a pachinko machine is a game in which an input medium such as a game ball that is a medium that a player inserts into the game machine and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player are the same. This is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball that has been inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  There are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as “digipachi”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (ie, game state) Detection means), lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the entrance state detection means, and special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. Or “additional effect image display means for displaying a decorative symbol sequence composed of a plurality of decorative symbols and causing characters or the like to appear at a predetermined timing” , Which is generally represented by what is referred to as a “multi-function machine”, comprising a lottery means for performing lottery by distributing game balls in an accessory and lottery means for performing lottery by winning at the start opening. ”, Represented by what is generally called“ Alepatchi ”“ For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 games, and the game balls are placed in a plurality of entrances in one game. In accordance with this, “a payout of a predetermined number of game balls” can be exemplified.

  On the other hand, with a pachislot machine, a medal that is a game medium is inserted, and after inserting the medal, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the operation of the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). It is a slot machine with a stop operation function that performs a substantial game of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the variation of the symbol row satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large amount of medals. In addition, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined is a plurality of (for example, five) game balls that are used as one unit of input medium. ) Is variably displayed in accordance with the operation of), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time when the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. In this case, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, it seems that there is no gaming medium at first glance in a gaming machine that does not play a substantial game depending on the medium to be inserted, such as a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. However, even in such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that the game content played using a game ball or other appropriate article is included in the entire game content. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be a target of a gaming machine in which a game is played using a gaming medium.

  In addition, the effect display device in the above-described embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to a liquid crystal display device. It may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT. That is, as long as the first display mode, the third display mode, and the second display mode can be displayed, and any of these modes can be hidden, the mode is not limited.

It is a perspective view which shows the state by which the main body frame was opened by the one side of the outer frame of a pachinko machine, and the front frame was opened by the one side of the main body frame. It is a front view which shows the whole front side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which isolate | separates the main body frame and game board of a pachinko machine, and shows from diagonally upper right front. It is a rear view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine from upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the back cover body, various control boards, etc. from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which various members were assembled | attached to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows a main-body frame simple substance from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the game board with which various control board boxes were mounted | worn from lower right back. It is an enlarged front view showing the configuration of a game board having a game area. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a game board for every main component and shows from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a game board for every main component and shows from diagonally back. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from diagonally forward, Comprising: It is a perspective view which enabled visual recognition of the 1st warp and the 2nd warp by removing a decoration cover. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the periphery of a 1st warp and a 2nd warp. It is the figure which showed the positional relationship of a light transmissive member, a 1st warp, and a 2nd warp. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the light transmissive member of the position different from FIG. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view including a light transmissive member according to FIG. 17. It is a perspective view shown from the front in the state where the back unit and the effect display device were assembled. It is a perspective view which shows FIG. 19 from back. It is a perspective view which shows a back unit from back. It is a rear view of an effect display device. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a back unit, an effect display apparatus, etc., and shows from the front. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board containing the effect for an effect. It is a perspective view which shows the back unit attached to the back of a game board from the front upper front. It is a front view of a game board. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a back unit for every main member and shows from the front. It is an irregular front view shown from the front of a figure in the state which provided the distribution mechanism in the production | presentation accessory. It is a rear view shown in the state provided with the distribution mechanism in the effect | action thing. It is a top view in FIG. It is a bottom view in FIG. It is a perspective view shown from the front in the state provided with the distribution mechanism in the effect | action thing. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the effect | action tool for every main structure, and shows from the front. It is a perspective view which shows an accessory rotating body. It is an anomalous front view which shows an accessory rotary body as a figure front. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the figure side of the accessory rotating body. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the decoration member side of an accessory rotary body. It is a figure which shows the rotation drive mechanism of the 1st production | presentation fence in an accessory rotating body. It is BB sectional drawing in FIG. It is CC sectional drawing in FIG. It is DD sectional drawing in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the discharge path | route of the game ball in the effect | action thing for a production. It is a perspective view which shows the opening / closing apparatus for effects from the left front. It is a perspective view which shows the opening / closing apparatus for effects from the front right. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the opening / closing apparatus for effects. It is the perspective view which looked at the opening / closing apparatus for production | presentation, the accessory guidance path, the distribution mechanism, and the production | presentation accessory from the upper left. It is a top view of an accessory guide path, a distribution mechanism, and a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the aspect by which a game ball is distributed by the distribution mechanism. It is a figure which shows the aspect by which the game ball following FIG. 48 is distributed by the distribution mechanism. It is a figure which shows the aspect by which the game ball following FIG. 49 is distributed by the distribution mechanism. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a main substrate. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a peripheral substrate. It is a functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of the peripheral control board in a main board | substrate and a peripheral board | substrate. (A) It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the accessory container of a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows that the 1st production eaves inclines downward toward the 1st performance exit. (B) It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the accessory container of a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows that the 1st production | presentation heel inclines below toward the 2nd production | presentation 樋 induction port. It is the figure which looked at the production display device from the front. It is the figure which looked at the production display device from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the periphery control board in a periphery board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main system process which CPU mounted in the main control board of a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory | storage area | region concerned with a reservation order. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st, 2nd, 3rd starting opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time variation pattern table setting process per 1st special symbol length. It is a list figure which shows the variation pattern selected in the pattern table setting process at the time of the 1st special symbol length. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time variation pattern table setting process per 2nd special symbol length. It is a list figure which shows the fluctuation pattern selected in the 2nd special symbol length per hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a short hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the fluctuation pattern selected in the short hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process and the small hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table setting process at the time of the 1st special symbol removal. 80 is a flowchart continuing from A of FIG. 79. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern selected when it is judged as reach in the 1st special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd special symbol change time fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart continuing from C of FIG. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern selected when it is judged that it is reach in the 2nd special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selected when it is not judged as reach in the 1st special symbol deviation time fluctuation pattern table setting process and the 2nd special symbol loss time fluctuation pattern table setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory small hit control process. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the change time concerning the change pattern of the detachment without the reach production at the time short-time function non-operation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the fluctuation time concerning the deviation fluctuation pattern which does not accompany the reach production at the time short-time function operation. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of a decoration symbol when deriving the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means to an effect display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of a decoration symbol in the case of deriving the lottery result by the 2nd special symbol lottery means to an effect display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of a decoration symbol in the case of deriving the said lottery result to an effect display apparatus, when the lottery result by a special symbol lottery means is a short hit or a small hit. It is a functional block diagram which shows mainly the function which concerns on display mode determination among the functional structures of a main control board. It is a time chart which expressed the display mode of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol in time series. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st, 2nd, 3rd start opening effective winning memory | storage process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd and 3rd start opening effective winning effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern determination in an ornamental symbol variation start process, and an A mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit hour A symbol use number setting process in a fluctuation pattern determination and A mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time A symbol usage number setting process per 2R in a fluctuation pattern determination and A mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hour A symbol usage number setting process per 15R in a fluctuation pattern determination and A mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the A symbol consumption process in a fluctuation pattern determination and A mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a chance A symbol consumption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the setting number of A symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the setting number of A symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the use number (consumption number) of A symbol in A symbol consumption processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the use number (consumption number) of A symbol in A symbol consumption process at the time of a chance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special effect lottery process in a decoration design change start process. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining whether an effect point storage process is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the storage display mode of the production | presentation point P performed according to the 2nd and 3rd starting opening valid winning flag being ON. It is a figure which shows an example of the storage display mode of the production | presentation point P performed according to having won the production | presentation point P storage lottery. It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of a "normal special aspect". It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of the "intro special aspect" of the 2nd character (music B). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of the "intro special aspect" of the 3rd character (musical piece C). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of the "intro special aspect" of the 4th character (musical piece D). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed with an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of a "chance eyes special aspect". It is a front view of the effect display device and the effect item before winning the effect opening / closing device. It is a front view of the effect display device after winning the effect opening / closing device and the effect accessory. It is a front view of the production | presentation display apparatus at the time of mode lottery production | presentation, and the effect | action thing for production. It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of a "long hit effect aspect." It is a front view of the production | presentation display apparatus at the time lottery production effect after long hit (community drawing lottery production) and the production | presentation accessory. It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of the "probability change game effect aspect" of the 2nd character (music B). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of the "probability change game effect aspect" of the 3rd character (music C). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of the "probability change game effect aspect" of the 4th character (music D).

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Front frame 5 Game board 6 Bottom receiving plate 7 Hinge mechanism 11 Front frame body 12 Game board installation frame 13 Mechanism installation body 14 Outer frame side hinge tool 15 Main body frame side hinge tool 16 Speaker box Part 17 Speaker mounting plate 18 Speaker 19 Launch rail 30 Lower front plate 31 Lower plate 32 Operation handle 33 Ashtray 33 Variable number 34 Ball discharge lever 36 Hinge mechanism 37 Game area 38 Open window 38 Variable number 39 Window frame 50 Transparent plate 51 Upper plate 52 Side decoration device 53 Acoustic decoration device 54 Side decoration body 55 Lens 56 Transparent cover body 57 Speaker 58 Speaker cover 60 Production selection switch 70 Locking device 71 Closing tool 72 Body frame locking hook 73 Closing tool 74 Door locking hook 75 Cylinder lock 76 Outer rail 77 Inner rail 78 Guide rail 79 Front component member 80 Zone forming wall 82 Normal symbol display 84 First special symbol indicator 86 Second special symbol indicator 88 First special symbol hold indicator 90 Second special symbol hold indicator 92 Normal symbol hold indicator 115 Production display device 115a First 1 judgment result display area 115b second judgment result display area 115c common symbol display area 116 display device control board 117 display device control board box 118 box mounting base 119 sub control board 130 sub control board box 131 main control board 132 main control Substrate box 133 Tank mounting part 134 Rail mounting part 135 Dispensing device mounting part 136 Ball tank 137 Bottom plate part 138 Release port 139 Rail component 150 Tank rail 151 Front wall part 152 Rear wall part 155 Rail shelf 156 Rectifier 157 Shaft 158 Rail receiver Part 170 ball dispensing device 172 dispensing motor 1 3 opening 192 firing motor 193 mounting board 194 launching device unit 195 power board 196 power board box 197 delivery control board 198 delivery control board box 199 power relay terminal board 210 rear cover body 211 cover hinge mechanism 212 rear wall part 213 peripheral wall part 213a Wall part 213b Wall part 213c Upper side wall part 214 Hinge body 215 Hinge pin 216 Hinge body 217 Elastic closing body 218 Inspection connector 230 Heat radiation hole 231 Heat radiation hole 232 Heat radiation hole 233 Heat radiation hole 235 Sealing part 237 Code holding body 238 Power distribution board 239 Board Connector 252 Interface board 253 Lower plate ball derivative 254 Board box 260 Prize opening unit 262 Side decoration member 264 Through hole 266 Game board base 268 Board box holder 270 Back unit 300 Center role Object 301 Opening 302 Center illumination part 304 Center decoration lamp 306 First warp inlet 308 Second warp inlet 310 Second warp guide piece 312 First warp outlet 314 Second warp outlet 316 First warp 318 Second warp 330 First Stage 332 Mountain portion 334 Valley portion 336 First warp outlet side end portion 338 First warp counter-exit side end portion 340 Second start guide port 342 Second stage inclined groove 350 Second stage 352 High platform portion 353 Inclined portion 354 Curved portion 356 Second warp outlet side end 358 Second warp counter-exit side end 360 Front inclined groove 362 First start guide port guide groove 364 Stage partition wall 366 Communication portion 368 First start guide port 370 Frame-shaped decorative body 370a Lower frame 370b Left frame 370c Right frame 372 Opening 374 First start port guide path 376 Third stage 378 Front Guide groove 379 Electric decoration member 380 Light source 382 Base 385 Emblem accessory 386 Decoration cover 386a First warp visual recognition hole 386b Second warp visual recognition hole 388 Light transmission member 388b End portion 388a Plane portion 389 Light transmission member 389a Incident end portion side 389b Radiation Side end portion 389c Notch portion 389d First light guiding portion 389e Second light guiding portion 390 First starting port 392 Second starting port 394 Third starting port 396 A pair of movable pieces 397 Opening / closing device 398 Production opening / closing device 398a For production Big prize opening 398b Production big prize opening opening / closing door 398ba Supporting part 398bb Connection port 400 Big hit game opening / closing device 400a Big hit game big winning opening 400b Big hit game big winning opening opening / closing door 402 Pass gate 404 General winning opening 406 Ball discharge opening 410 Back box 410a Rotating body relay board fixing part 412 Opening part 414 Detachable groove 416 Detachable lever 416a Knob part 416b Opening part 418 Detachment mechanism 420 Detachable protrusion 422 Detachment locking part 424 Production accessory back sphere path upper member 426 Production accessory back sphere path lower member 430 Production accessory 432 Rotating object 434 Figure 434a One hand 436 Actor guiding path 438 Distributing mechanism 440 Lamp drive board box 442 Center light source 444 Opening 446 Production accessory base 448 Rotation drive unit 450 First closing member 452 Second closing member 452a Cylindrical part 452b Flat part 452c Curved part 452d Light incident part 452e First light guiding part 452f Second light guiding part 452g Light emitting part 454 Light source 458 Light source substrate 460 Rotating object body 460a Sphere distribution space 460b Decoration space 462 Top plate Portion 462a bearing groove 462b slot 464 bottom plate portion 64a Opening 464b Through-hole 466 Bulkhead portion 466a First guiding portion 466b Second guiding portion 466c Recessed portion 468 Ball emitting member 468a Decoration portion 468b Covering portion 468c Discharging portion 470 First effect rod 470a Right end 470b Left end 472 Second effect rod 472a Right end 472b Left end 474 Support shaft 476 First stage outlet 478 Second stage 樋 guide port 480 Second stage outlet 482 Rotating shaft 484 Ball distribution motor 486 Motor cover 488 Decoration lens 490 Cover lens 490a Cover part 490b Bottom part 490c Light incident part 490d First light guiding portion 490e Second light guiding portion 490f Light emitting portion 492 Rotation drive mechanism 494 First link member 494a Slit 496 Second link member 496a Pin 498 Detection piece 500 Ball sorting portion motor sensor 502 Decoration member 504 Decoration Lens 506 diffusion 506a Light emitting portion 506b Light reflecting portion 506c Light incident portion 506d Opening portion 508 Substrate 512 Light source substrate 514 Rotating member upper substrate 518 Rotating member lower substrate 522 Connecting connector 524 Rotating connecting member 524a Opening portion 524b Cylindrical portion 524c Protrusion 526 Rotating portion motor 528 1st gear 530 Pedestal gear 530a 2nd gear 530b Pedestal cylindrical part 530c Notch 530d Detection piece 532 Rotating part motor sensor 534 Rotation drive unit casing 534a Opening 534b Support roller 536 Base top plate part 536a Upper ball guide path 536b Falling Port 536c Through hole 538 Base bottom plate portion 538a Through hole 540 Base outer peripheral wall portion 540a First discharge receiving port 540b Second discharge receiving port 540c Mounting step 542 Sphere discharge channel 542a Sphere discharge channel upper 542b Sphere discharge channel lower 544 Ball discharge channel 546 Ball discharge channel sensor 548 First effect ball discharge channel sensor 550 Second effect ball discharge channel sensor 552 Solenoid 552a Plunger 554 Game ball holding member 554a Housing recess 554b Extension portion 556 Connecting member 558 Pin 560 Protruding pin 562 Lower casing 562a Discharge port 564 Upper casing 566 Opening / closing drive mechanism 568 Production opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568a Plunger 570 Drive transmission member 570a First shaft 570b Second piece 572 Production opening / closing device Count sensor 600 Main Board 614 Bottom plate full switch 616 Launch control board 618 External terminal board 620 Inner frame opening switch 622 Door opening switch 624 Panel relay terminal board 626 Production switchgear relay terminal board 628 Big hit game switchgear relay terminal board 630 Game Sensor 632 General winning opening sensor 636 Normal symbol / special symbol display board 638 Normal electric accessory solenoid 640 Big hit game opening / closing device count sensor 642 Big hit game opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 644 First start port sensor 646 Second start port sensor 648 3 start opening sensor 650 All winning opening winning prize detection sensor 651 Production switchgear state display lamp 660 Peripheral board 662 Peripheral control board 674 Frame decoration relay terminal board 676 Frame decoration lamp 688 Lamp drive board 690 Panel decoration lamp 692 Discharge opening detection sensor 694 Center decoration drive unit relay terminal board 696 Rotating unit LED board 700 First special symbol lottery means 702 First special symbol per-determination random number extraction unit 703 First special symbol hold counter 704 First special symbol success / failure determination unit 706 Special symbol normal Per hour Special table 708 Special symbol probability changing time determination table 710 Second special symbol lottery means 712 Second special symbol per random number extraction means 713 Second special symbol hold counter 714 Second special symbol success / failure determination means 720 Normal symbol lottery means 722 Normal symbol per-determining random number extraction means 723 Normal symbol hold counter 724 Normal symbol win / fail judgment means 726 Normal symbol normal per-hour judgment table 727 Normal symbol probability change per-hour judgment table 728 Third start port opening / closing control means 730 First special Symbol hold display control means 732 Second special symbol hold display control means 734 Normal symbol hold display control means 740 Probability game execution means 742 Time-short game execution means 744 Opening / closing operation control means 746 Small hit game execution means 748 Big hit game execution means 748a Long hit Game execution means 748b Short hit game execution means 749 Command transmission means 750 Command reception means 760 Effect lottery means 762 Effect accessory action execution means 764 Effect opening / closing device state display control means 790 Reservation order storage means 800 Effect image display control means 802 First special symbol Display control unit 804 Second special symbol display control unit 806 Normal symbol display control unit 810 First display mode determination unit 811 First display mode determination selection unit 812 Reach out display mode selection determination unit 813 Hit display mode selection determination unit 814 Outlier display Mode determination means 815 Advantageous gaming state out-of-display display mode determination means 820 Second display mode determination means 821 Second display mode determination selection means 822 Reach out of special display mode selection determination means 823 Per special display mode selection determination means 824 Outlier special display mode determination Means 825 Out advantageous game state shortening Display mode determining means 830 Display mode storage means 851 First special symbol image display control means 852 Second special symbol image display control means 855 Production hold count means 860 Merge hold display control means 870 Merge hold order storage means 872 First special symbol Reserved number storage means 874 Second special symbol reserved number storage means 1150 Reserved display area 1151 First reserved display area 1151a First reserved storage display section 1151b Second reserved storage display section 1151c Third reserved storage display section 1151d 4 on-hold storage display section 1152 2nd on-hold display area 1152a 5th on-hold storage display section 1152b 6th on-hold storage display section 1152c 7th on-hold storage display section 1152d 8th on-hold storage display section 1153 Decorative design 1153a left Symbol row 1153b Middle symbol row 1153c Right symbol row 1154 Production points Display area 1154a Effect point 1 display portion 1154b Effect point 2 display portion 1154c Effect point 3 display portion 1154d Effect point 4 display portion 1154e Effect point 5 display portion 1154f Effect point 6 display portion 1154g Effect point 7 display portion 1154h Effect point 8 display portion 1154i effect point 9 display unit 1154j effect point 10 display unit 6061 special symbol random number storage area 6061a first storage area 6061b second storage area 6061c third storage area 6061d fourth storage area 6061e fifth storage area 6061f sixth storage area 6061g 7th storage area 6061h 8th storage area 6062 Processing area 8601 Reservable information image display control means 8602 Reservation information image display control means 8603 Retention information image display control means 8604 Identification code image Display control means 8605 merged pending order image display control means

Claims (1)

A game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball is driven toward the game area;
A starting port capable of accepting a game ball driven toward the game area;
A game effect deriving means capable of deriving at least a plurality of symbols and sound effects as a predetermined game effect;
Start detection means for detecting that a game ball driven toward the game area is received by the start port;
Lottery means for determining whether or not at least a jackpot has been won in accordance with detection of a game ball by the start detection means;
Game effect derivation control means for deriving the predetermined game effect and the lottery result by the lottery means to the game effect derivation means;
After a plurality of symbol variation periods in which a plurality of symbol variations are displayed, a plurality of out symbol effects in which a lottery result of losing by the lottery means is derived, and the plurality of symbol variation periods and a plurality of symbols are the same A plurality of reach symbol effects in which a lottery result is derived after the reach symbol variation period in which the remaining symbols are variably displayed after stopping at the symbol, and the plurality of symbol variation periods and one of the predetermined reach songs Game effect storage means for storing a plurality of game effects including at least a plurality of special reach effects from which a lottery result is derived after a reach music output period in which a part or all of them are output;
And a jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game in response to the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is won.
A game control means having at least
A gaming machine equipped with
The game effect derivation control means includes
When the lottery result by the lottery means is out, one of the plurality of out symbol effects and the plurality of reach symbol effects is derived to the game effect deriving means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a big hit, one of the plurality of reach design effects is derived to the game effect derivation means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is unsuccessful or jackpot, the game effect deriving means is replaced with one of the plurality of special reach effects instead of the plurality of lost symbol effects and the plurality of reach symbol effects. Derivable, and
The plurality of special reach productions are:
The reach music that is output in the reach music output period is composed of one continuous music, and the reach state that has a higher expectation for jackpot than the multiple symbol fluctuation period is replaced by the symbol fluctuation in the reach symbol fluctuation period It is generated by the output of the reach music,
In the reach music output period, after only a part of the reach music is output, a plurality of special reach release effects from which the lottery result of the release by the lottery means is derived,
In the reach music output period, after all of the reach music has been output, the lottery lottery results derived by the lottery means are derived, and at least a special reach per reach,
The game control means includes
A game effect derived to the game effect deriving unit by the game effect deriving control unit is selectively determined from a plurality of game effects stored in the game effect storage unit according to at least a lottery result by the lottery unit. A game production determining means,
The game effect determining means is
If the lottery result by the lottery means is out of the first game state, one of the plurality of out symbol effects and the plurality of reach symbol effects is selectively selected from the game effect storage means. Decided on
If the lottery result by the lottery means is out of the second game state in which a privilege more advantageous to the player than the first game state is given, the plurality of game effect storage means Select one of the special reach off-directories,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a big hit and the first gaming state, one of the plurality of reach symbol effects is selectively determined from the game effect storage means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a big hit and the second gaming state, any one of the plurality of special reach winning effects is selectively determined from the game effect storage means. There,
When the game effect deriving control means derives any of the special reach effects to the game effect deriving means, the reach music is output by the reach music output during the reach music output period, and a part of the reach music is generated. Is output to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is out of order, or that all of the reach music is output to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is a big hit. A gaming machine characterized by that.